PAPERLESS RECORDER USER MANUAL

PR10/PR20/PR30

UMFPR01I
January, 2021
Document Approval No: UM00PR1A
Revision History
Version Description Date
AO Card & PID card calibration procedure added
UMFPR01I PID card parameters table updated January, 2021
General spelling and grammar check done
Safety
This recorder is compliant with the requirements of EN61010-1, UL 61010C-1 & CSA C22.2 No.
24-93. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by
the equipment may be impaired. The manufacturer is not liable for any damages incurred to
equipment/personal during installation or use of equipment as explained in this document. User must
acquire sufficient knowledge & skills prior to using equipment in the application and follow all the local
standards & regulations to meet safety requirements.

Warning Symbol
This document contains notices that you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as
well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a
warning triangle and are marked as follows.
The danger symbol indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper
precautions are not taken. Do not proceed beyond a Warning symbol until the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.
Before connecting the power cord, ensure that the power supply voltage matches the voltage
rating for the instrument.
Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON
the power. Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the
protective grounding terminal. Doing so will pose a potential shock hazard. Do not operate the instrument
when the protective grounding or the fuse might be defective. Also, make sure to check them before the
operation.
❖ Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapours. Operation
of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard.
❖ Some areas inside the instrument have high voltages. Do not remove the cover if the power
supply is connected. The cover should be removed by our qualified personnel only.
❖ Using the instrument in a manner not specified in this manual can damage the instrument’s
protection
❖ Keep signal and supply voltage wiring separated from one another. If this is impractical,
use shielded cables for signal wiring. Double insulation should be used for signal wiring
when the recorder is used with hazardous voltage.
❖ Do not use the recorder where there is high vibration or a high magnetic field. This could
cause damage or error of measurement.
❖ All maintenance or repairs should be carried out with power disconnected to avoid personal
injury or damage to the unit.
❖ In areas with conductive pollution, adequate ventilation, filtering and sealing must be
installed.
❖ When cleaning the recorder, handle carefully and use a soft dry cloth. Avoid the use of
abrasives, or any sharp or hard objects which would damage the display.
❖ Do not operate the recorder if any part has been removed or disassembled. Consult your
nearest dealer at once.
❖ Static Electricity: Appropriate precautions must be taken when handling the recorder. The
circuit board components are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge.

Page 2 of 499
 Take static electricity precautions while handling and inserting USB memory into the
recorder.
Preface
Original equipment manufacturer reserves the right to change information available in this
document without notice. The manufacturer is not liable for any damages incurred to equipment/personal
during installation or use of equipment as explained in this document. User must acquire sufficient
knowledge & skills prior to using equipment in the application and follow all the local standards & regulations
to meet safety requirements.

Copyright
The documentation and the software included with this product are copyrighted 2016 by
Brainchild Electronic Co. Ltd. All rights are reserved. Brainchild Electronic Co., Ltd. reserves the right to
make improvements in the products described in this manual at any time without notice.
No part of this manual may be reproduced/copied/translated or transmitted in any form or by any
means without the prior written permission of Brainchild Electronic Co., Ltd. The information we supply is
believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we assume no responsibility for its use.

Contact Information
Head Office & Factory
Brainchild Electronic Co. Ltd.
209 Chong yang Road, Nangang Dist.,
Taipei 11573, Taiwan
Tel: +886-2-2786-1299 Fax: +886-2-2786-1395
Website: www.brainchildtw.com;
Email: [email protected]; [email protected]

China Sales Office

Brainchild Electronic (Kunshan) Co. Ltd.
Room 405, Building #6, Huamin Gentlefolk Garden
No. 13, Qianjin Central Road, Kunshan City, Jiangsu 215300, China
Tel: +86-512-5511-6133 Fax: +86-512-5511-6113
Email: [email protected] ; [email protected]

Page 3 of 499
 Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION 9
1.1 INTRODUCTION 9
1.2 FEATURES 9
1.2.1 Hardware 9
1.2.2 Firmware 9
1.2.3 PC Software 10
1.2.4 Firmware and Software Features 10
1.3 COMPARISON OF PR SERIES RECORDERS 13
1.4 EXPANDABLE INPUT AND OUTPUT CARDS 14
1.4.1 Analog Input cards (part number AI206 & AI203) 14
1.4.2 Relay Output card (RO206) 14
1.4.3 Digital Input card (DI206) 14
1.4.4 Combination Relay Output and Digital Input Card (RD233) 14
1.4.5 Analog Output cards (AO206) 15
1.4.6 PID Process Control card (PC201) 15
1.5 COMMUNICATION 15
1.6 EXTERNAL STORAGE MEDIA 15
1.7 SMART MECHANISM 16
1.8 ORDERING CODE 17
1.8.1 PR10 Ordering code 17
1.8.2 PR20 Ordering code 18
1.8.3 PR30 Ordering code 20
1.8.4 PID Process Control Card PC201 Ordering code 21
1.8.5 Accessories 21
1.9 SPECIFICATIONS 22
1.9.1 General Specifications 22
1.9.2 Analog Input Specifications (AI203 & AI206) 23
1.9.3 Digital Input Specifications (DI206 & RD233) 25
1.9.4 Relay Output Specifications (RO206 & RD206) 25
1.9.5 Analog Output Specifications (AO206) 25
1.9.6 PID Process Control card Specifications 25
1.9.7 COMM Module (IF232 and IF485) Specifications 29
1.9.8 Standard Ethernet Communication 29
1.9.9 Real-time Clock 29
1.9.10 Environmental & Physical Specifications 29
1.9.11 Approval Standards 30
2. INSTALLATION AND WIRING 31
2.1 UNPACKING 31
2.2 DIMENSIONS 32
2.2.1 Panel mounting style 32
2.2.2 Portable styles 36
2.3 INPUT AND OUTPUT CONFIGURATION 39
2.3.1 Analog Input Card (AI206 & AI203) 39
2.3.2 Relay Output card (RO206) 40
2.3.3 Digital Input card (DI206) 41
2.3.4 Combination Digital Input and Output card (RD233) 41
2.3.5 Analog output cards (AO206) 42
2.3.6 PID Process Control Module (PC201) 42
2.4 WIRING 43
2.4.1 Wiring Precautions 43
2.4.2 Analog Input Wiring 44
2.4.3 Relay Output Wiring 45
2.4.4 Digital Input Wiring 45
2.4.5 Combination Relay Output and Digital Input Wiring 46
2.4.6 Analog Output Wiring 46

Page 4 of 499
 2.4.7 PID Process Control Card Wiring 47
2.4.8 RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485 wiring 47
2.5 EXTERNAL MEMORY CARD 48
3. BASIC FUNCTIONS OF RECORDERS 50
3.1 CONFIGURATION 50
3.2 FIRMWARE 50
3.2.1 Standard Firmware 50
3.2.2 Plus 1 Firmware 50
3.2.3 Plus 2 Firmware 50
3.2.4 Plus 3 Firmware 50
3.3 PULSE INPUT THROUGH DIGITAL INPUT 51
3.4 PID CONTROL WITH RAMP & SOAK PROFILE FUNCTION 51
3.5 ON-FIELD CALIBRATION 51
3.6 COMMUNICATION WITH THIRD-PARTY INTERFACES 51
3.7 WEB SERVER 51
3.8 EMAIL 51
3.9 HANDWRITING MESSAGES ON HISTORICAL TREND SCREENS 52
3.10 CUSTOM DISPLAY SCREEN 52
3.11 LOG SPEED FLEXIBILITY 52
3.12 SYSTEM CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION VIA INTERNET 53
3.13 INCREASED SECURITY 53
3.14 AUTO OUTPUT TO PRINTER 53
3.15 EXTERNAL CHANNELS 53
3.16 BATCH 53
3.17 FDA 21 CFR PART 11 53
3.18 CIRCULAR CHART 53
3.19 MULTILINGUAL LANGUAGES 54
3.20 USB BARCODE READER, KEYBOARD AND MOUSE CONNECTIVITY 54
4. GETTING STARTED 55
4.1 SCREEN NAVIGATION 55
4.1.1 Title Bar 55
5. CONFIGURATION 72
5.1 CHANNEL 73
5.1.1 Analog Input 73
5.1.2 Digital Input 80
5.1.3 Math Channel 84
5.1.4 Analog Output 102
5.1.5 Digital Output 105
5.1.6 External 106
5.2 CONTROLLER 111
5.2.1 Name 111
5.2.2 Parameter 111
5.2.3 Channel 127
5.2.4 Configuration of Process Control Card 131
5.2.5 Profile 149
5.3 JOBS 157
5.3.1 No Action 157
5.3.2 Send Email 157
5.3.3 Pause 157
5.3.4 Start 157
5.3.5 Sound Buzzer 157
5.3.6 Dump Data 157
5.3.7 Enable Fast Mode 157
5.3.8 Disable Fast Mode 157
5.3.9 DO Latch On 157
5.3.10 DO Latch Off 158

Page 5 of 499
 5.3.11 DO Process 158
5.3.12 Enable Timer 158
5.3.13 Disable Timer 158
5.3.14 Preset Totalizer 158
5.3.15 Reset Totalizer 158
5.3.16 Enable Totalizer 158
5.3.17 Disable Totalizer 158
5.3.18 Preset Counter 158
5.3.19 Reset Counter 158
5.3.20 Inc Counter 158
5.3.21 Dec Counter 158
5.3.22 Log Report 158
5.3.23 Reset MinMaxAve 158
5.3.24 Print Historical data 159
5.3.25 Print Event List 159
5.3.26 Print Report List 159
5.3.27 Print Snapshot 159
5.3.28 Output Historical Data 159
5.3.29 Copy Value and Paste Value 159
5.3.30 Select Controller 159
5.3.31 Run Profile 159
5.4 DISPLAY 159
5.4.1 Name 160
5.4.2 Mode 160
5.4.3 Speed 160
5.4.4 Direction 161
5.4.5 Background 161
5.4.6 Print Enable 161
5.4.7 Trend Graph Scale 161
5.4.8 Pen 162
5.5 BATCH 165
5.5.1 Name 165
5.5.2 Desc 167
5.5.3 Example for Batch Application 167
5.5.4 How to view batch data in Recorder 167
5.5.5 How to Dump Batch data to an external USB memory 168
5.6 START / STOP 169
5.6.1 Start 169
5.6.2 Stop 169
5.7 TIMER 170
5.7.1 Type 170
5.7.2 Action 171
5.7.3 Job1, Job2 171
5.7.4 Timer Example-1 171
5.7.5 Timer Example-2 172
5.8 CLOCK 172
5.8.1 Date Style 173
5.8.2 Time Zone 173
5.8.3 Synchronize via Internet 173
5.8.4 Date / Time 173
5.8.5 Summertime 173
5.9 COMMUNICATION 173
5.9.1 Ethernet 174
5.9.2 Serial 174
5.9.3 Modbus Server / Slave 175
5.9.4 Modbus Client/Master 175
5.9.5 Email 177
5.9.6 Example for IO Modules as External Channels for Analog Input 179
5.9.7 Example for IO module as External Channel for Relay Output 183

Page 6 of 499
 5.9.8 Example for IO module as External Channel for Analog Output 187
5.9.9 Example for Controller as External Channels 190
5.9.10 Example for SIO Module as External Channel via PC-E 193
5.9.11 Example for Recorder as Modbus Slave 197
5.10 INSTRUMENT 198
5.10.1 Name 199
5.10.2 Language 199
5.10.3 Security 199
5.10.4 Batch Control 200
5.10.5 Volume 200
5.10.6 Tool Bar 200
5.10.7 Scan Page 200
5.10.8 LCD 200
5.10.9 Storage 200
5.10.10 Data Transfer 200
5.10.11 Custom Page 201
5.10.12 Setup Start-up Image 201
5.11 SECURITY 202
5.11.1 Normal 202
5.11.2 CFR-21 202
5.12 DEMO 204
5.13 AUTO-OUTPUT 204
5.13.1 Setup Printer 205
5.13.2 Print Header 205
5.13.3 Title 205
5.13.4 Historical Data 206
5.13.5 Report Data 206
5.13.6 Output Files 206
5.13.7 USB Printer Configuration 206
5.13.8 Network Printer Configuration 206
5.13.9 Sample Configuration of Printer 207
5.14 SYSTEM INFORMATION 209
5.14.1 Firmware Upgrade 210
5.14.2 Touch Screen Calibration 211
5.15 CALIBRATE 214
5.15.1 Calibrate an AI with 0-5V 217
5.15.2 Calibrate an AI with K type Thermocouple 219
5.15.3 Calibrate an AI with Pt100 RTD 221
5.15.4 Calibrate an AO with 4 to 20 mA 224
5.15.5 Calibrate an AO with 0 to 10 V 228
5.15.6 Calibrate PID process control card with K type Thermocouple 231
5.16 PROCEDURE TO UPGRADE AND RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS 234
6. PC BASED SOFTWARE 236
6.1 FREE BASIC SOFTWARE 236
6.1.1 Historical Viewer Software Installation 236
6.1.2 Start and Exit 239
6.1.3 Historical Viewer 239
6.2 EXTENSIVE SOFTWARE 257
6.2.1 Data Acquisition Studio Software Installation 257
6.2.2 Start and Exit 259
6.2.3 Real-Time Viewer 260
6.2.4 Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) 294
6.2.5 Configuration of Recorder 297
6.3 CUSTOM SCREEN EDITING SOFTWARE - PANEL STUDIO 303
6.3.1 Panel Studio Software Installation 304
6.3.2 Start and Exit 306
6.3.3 Project status 306
6.3.4 Create a new project 307

Page 7 of 499
 6.3.5 Menu bar 308
6.3.6 Standard bar 317
6.3.7 Format bar 318
6.3.8 Project Explorer 318
6.3.9 Toolbox 321
7. WEB SERVER 401
7.1 REQUIREMENTS 401
7.2 HOW TO CONFIGURE WEBSERVER SETTINGS 402
7.2.1 How to Configure Static IP Address 402
7.2.2 How to Enable Web Server 403
7.3 HOW TO ACCESS RECORDER REAL-TIME DATA IN PC VIA WEBSERVER: 403
8. PR MOBILE VIEWER 410
8.1 REQUIREMENTS 410
8.2 HOW TO CONFIGURE STATIC IP 411
8.2.1 How to Configure Static IP Address 411
8.3 PR MOBILE VIEWER OPERATION 412
9. MODBUS COMMUNICATION 420
9.1 MODBUS ADDRESS MAPPING 420
9.1.1 Input Register (3xxxxx) Parameter Table for Modbus RTU Slave / TCP Server 420
9.1.2 Holding Register (4xxxxx) Parameter Table for Modbus RTU Slave / TCP Server 447
9.1.3 Holding Register Parameter Table for Remote Command 454
9.2 MODBUS COMMUNICATION 485
9.2.1 Read Input Registers (Function 0x04) 485
9.2.2 Preset (Write) Multiple Registers (Function 0x10) 485
9.2.3 Placing the CRC into a message 486
9.3 SAMPLE CODE 486
9.3.1 CRC Generation Function 486
9.3.2 Read Data Function 488
9.3.3 Convert Data Function 489
9.3.4 Read AI Function 489
9.3.5 Read Math Function 490
9.3.6 Read DI Function 491
9.3.7 Read AO Function 492
9.3.8 Read DO Function 492
9.3.9 Read External Function 493
9.4 APPENDIX 493
9.4.1 Modbus RTU Slave / TCP Server Register data type table 493
9.4.2 Inquire AI range 493
9.4.3 AI Conversion Example 494
9.4.4 Math Conversion Sample 494
9.4.5 AO Conversion Example 497
9.4.6 External Channel Conversion for AI channel 497
9.4.7 External Channel Conversion for DI and DO channel 497
9.4.8 External Channel Conversion for AO channel 498
9.4.9 External Channel Conversion for Math channel 498

Page 8 of 499
1. Introduction
1.1 Introduction
The new generation PR series paperless recorder has many outstanding features to meet the
industry requirements.

1.2 Features
1.2.1 Hardware
The PR series hardware has the following unique features.
❖ Available in three display sizes 4.3”, 5.6〞and 12.1”
❖ PR10, with a 4.3” display, with 3 or 6 universal analog inputs and 24 Optional External Channels
❖ PR20, with a 5.6” display, with 6, 12, 18 or 24 universal analog inputs and 48 Optional External
Channels
❖ PR30, with a 12.1” display, with 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 or 48 universal analog inputs and 96
Optional External Channels
❖ High-resolution TFT Colour LCD display with Touch screen
❖ 100-millisecond sampling rate and data logging
❖ PID Process Control card (PC201) to control the process.
❖ High accuracy 24-bit A-D Analog Input
❖ 16-bit D-A Analog Output
❖ Pulse input through Digital input, maximum 100 Hz.
❖ Plug & play I/O cards (AI, AO, DI, and DO) for easy expansion.
❖ On-board SD card slot for external storage.
❖ Two USB Host Ports for external storage and printer connectivity
❖ Ethernet as standard with optional RS-232 or RS422/RS485 communication
❖ IP65 water-resistant

1.2.2 Firmware
The PR series recorder has 4 different versions of firmware for the user to select as per the
application requirement.
1. Standard Firmware
2. Plus 1 Firmware
3. Plus 2 Firmware
4. Plus 3 Firmware

Page 9 of 499
1.2.3 PC Software
The PR series has the below user-friendly software for configuration, analysis, data acquisition
and custom display
1. Free Basic Software Historical Viewer for configuration and analysis
2. Extensive Software Data Acquisition Studio for configuration, analysis and data acquisition
on PC.
3. Panel Studio Software for Custom display

1.2.4 Firmware and Software Features

The below are the unique features of the PR series different firmware.
❖ Circular Chart in PR30
❖ Panel Studio Software for editing and customizing display pages.
❖ Display values in Digital, Trend, Bar graph and mix format.
❖ Real-time and Historical Trends
❖ Real-time and Historical Alarms
❖ Event management, Jobs linked with events
❖ Reports (Daily, Weekly and Monthly)
❖ Timers, Counters, Totalizers, Math channels
❖ FDA 21 CFR part 11 compliance
❖ Customized messages for alarms
❖ Alarms by email directly from the paperless recorder
❖ Batch control, log data in batches
❖ 100 milliseconds data logging and historical data archival tools
❖ Display pages rotation
❖ Start/Stop data logging functions which can be linked with real-time clock or events
❖ Search data with reference Time, Period, Tag, Event, Alarm, Remark, Handwrite
❖ Export data to Excel and database format (*.csv only)
❖ Webserver
❖ Handwriting function in historical data
❖ PID control with Profile function
❖ Multiple Languages for users to select
❖ Data logging by value change or time base
❖ Dynamic Data Exchange via PC software
❖ On-Field Calibration
❖ Direct Printer Connectivity with PDF Printer included
❖ USB Barcode Reader Connectivity for Data Entry
❖ USB Keyboard and Mouse Connectivity
❖ Clock Synchronization via Internet

Page 10 of 499
 1-1 Historical Viewer Software

1-2 Configuration Viewer Software in Historical Viewer Software

Page 11 of 499
1-3 Real-Time Viewer in Data Acquisition Studio Software

1-4 Panel Studio Software for Custom Display

Page 12 of 499
 1-5 Circular Chart in PR30

1.3 Comparison of PR series Recorders

The below table shows the differences between different models of PR series recorder.

Description PR10 PR20 PR30

Display Size 4.3” 5.6” 12.1”

Analog Inputs (Maximum) 6 24 48
Analog Outputs (Maximum) 6 6 12
Digital Inputs (Maximum) 24 24 24
Relay Outputs (Maximum) 24 24 24
PID Process Control Card 4 4 8
Math Channels (Maximum) 15 40 60
External Channels (Other devices via Modbus) 24 48 96
Total Pages 8 20 21
Pens/Page (Maximum) 6 6 10
Batches (Maximum) 1 1 1
Timers (Maximum) 6 20 48
1-1 Comparison of PR10, PR20 and PR30

Page 13 of 499
1.4 Expandable Input and Output cards
There are 4 rear expansion slots in PR10 and PR20 and 16 rear expansion slots in PR30
available for expansion with the following plug and play I/O Cards.

1.4.1 Analog Input cards (part number AI206 & AI203)

These two cards are used for 3 or 6-channel analog inputs. Each input is isolated from each
other to avoid noise and to ensure stable measurement.

1.4.2 Relay Output card (RO206)

Each card includes 6 relay outputs. The relay contacts are rated 5 Amp/240 VAC.

1.4.3 Digital Input card (DI206)

Each card includes 6 channels. Logic Low: -5V minimum, 0.8V maximum, Logic High: 3.5V
minimum, 24V maximum

1.4.4 Combination Relay Output and Digital Input Card (RD233)

Each Card includes 3 Digital Inputs and 3 Relay Outputs. For Digital Inputs, Logic Low: -5V
minimum, 0.8V maximum, Logic High: -3.5V minimum, 24V maximum. For Relay Outputs, the Contacts are
rated 5 Amp/240 VAC

Page 14 of 499
1.4.5 Analog Output cards (AO206)
Each card includes 6 channels. They are used for 4-20mA, 0-20mA current output, 0-5V, 1-5V,
0-10VDC voltage output.

1.4.6 PID Process Control card (PC201)

Each card includes one single loop PID process control function with ramp and soak profile
segment.

1.5 Communication
The standard communication interface is Ethernet with protocol IEEE 802.3 – 10/100 Base T.
Other options are RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485. Details are explained in Chapter 2.4.8 - RS-232, RS-422, RS-
485 wiring.

1.6 External Storage media

The recorder has 256MB internal memory to store the data. There are two types of External
storage media available for the recorder to dump the stored data from internal memory. They are SD card
and USB. Only one storage media can be used at a time in the recorder.
If the recorder is used with 6-channel inputs, the below chart shows the maximum no of days
historical data can be stored based on available memory.
SD card
16GB 32GB
Log speed
1 second 15, 808 days 31,616 days
10 seconds 158,032 days 316,064 days
120 seconds 1,896,304 days 3,792,608 days

Page 15 of 499
* The above is an approximation, each record of data uses 2 or 4 bytes of memory depending on the data
type.
For ex: Selected data size = 2 bytes
If the Log Speed (the recording speed of measured data) is set to the speed at 1 second per
data, then for six channels, a 16GB SD Card will last approximately 15, 808 days [16GB / (2 bytes x 24
hours x 60 minutes x 60 seconds x 6 Channels].
The following formula is to calculate how many days a USB disk can do saving before it is full.
No of days = (The capacity of SD card memory x Log Speed) / (2 x # of hours per day x 60 x 60 x Number
of channels)
If the user is using USB to dump the data then it is necessary to insert USB memory back to
recorder after loading recorded data onto PC. Otherwise, the dumping process will fail and the oldest data
will be deleted once the internal memory is full. The recorder will do automatic dumping process when the
internal memory is occupied by 85%.

1.7 Smart Mechanism

The recorded data is stored in the manufacturer’s special binary format. It is not possible to
manipulate or modify the recorded data. This feature fully guarantees the security of the data.

Page 16 of 499
1.8 Ordering Code
1.8.1 PR10 Ordering code
PR1003 (3 Analog Inputs)
Other Inputs and Outputs
0: none
6: 3 relays + 3 DI

PR1006 (6 Analog Inputs)

Other Inputs and Outputs
0: none
1: 6 relays
3: 6DI
6: 3 relays + 3 DI
7: 6 relays + 6 DI
Power
A: 90-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D: 11-36 VDC
Communication
0: standard Ethernet interface
1: Ethernet + RS-232
2: Ethernet + RS-422/485
Firmware
0: Standard Version with Mathematic Functions
1: Plus Version 1 with external channels, batch & FDA 21 CFR part 11
2: Plus Version 2 with editable custom display and Panel Studio software
3: Plus Version 3- includes Plus Version 1+2 above
PC Software
1: Free Basic Software of Historical Viewer and Configuration
2: Extensive software Data Acquisition Studio
(Real-Time Viewer + Historical Viewer + Configuration)
Mounting types, Power Cord & Switch
0: panel mount, no power cord, no power switch
1: panel mount, no power cord, power switch
2: portable, UL & CSA power cord, power switch
3: portable, VDE power cord, power switch
4: portable, SAA power cord, power switch
5: portable, BS power cord, power switch
6: portable, no power cord, power switch
7: Panel mount, UL & CSA power cord, power switch
8: Panel mount, VDE power cord, power switch
9: Panel mount, SAA power cord, power switch
A: Panel mount, BS power cord, power switch
Special options
00: none
S1: 16G SD card
S2: 32G SD card

Note:
DI- Digital Input
PID Process Control card can be purchased separately.

Page 17 of 499
1.8.2 PR20 Ordering code
PR2003 (3 Analog Inputs)
Other Inputs and Outputs
0: none
6: 3 relays + 3 DI
C: 3 relays + 3 DI + 6 AO
PR2006 (6 Analog Inputs)
Other Inputs and Outputs
0: none
1: 6 Relays
3: 6 DI
5: 6 AO Special options
6: 3 relays + 3 DI (Select from the option in the next page)
7: 6 relays + 6 DI
A: 6 relays + 6 AO
B: 6 DI + 6 AO
C: 3 relays + 3 DI + 6 AO
D: 6 relays + 6 DI + 6 AO
PR2009 / PR2012 (9 / 12 Analog Inputs)
Other Inputs and Outputs Mounting types, Power Cord & Switch
0: none (Select from the option in the next page)
1: 6 Relays
2: 12 Relays
3: 6 DI
4: 12 DI
5: 6 AO
6: 3 relays + 3 DI
7: 6 relays + 6 DI
8: 9 relays + 3 DI
9: 3 relays + 9 DI
A: 6 relays + 6 AO
B: 6 DI + 6 AO
C: 3 relays + 3 DI + 6 AO
PR2015 / PR2018 (15 / 18 Analog Inputs)
Other Inputs and Outputs
0: none
1: 6 Relays
3: 6 DI
5: 6 AO
6: 3 relays + 3 DI
PR2021 / PR2024 (21 / 24 Analog Inputs)
Other Inputs and Outputs
0: none
Power
A: 90-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D: 11-36 VDC
Communication
0: standard Ethernet interface
1: Ethernet + RS-232
2: Ethernet + RS-422/485
Firmware
0: Standard Version with Mathematic Functions
1: Plus Version 1 with external channels, batch & FDA 21 CFR part 11
2: Plus Version 2 with editable custom display and Panel Studio software
3: Plus Version 3- includes Plus Version 1+2 above
PC Software
1: Free Basic Software of Historical Viewer and Configuration
2: Extensive software Data Acquisition Studio
(Real-Time Viewer + Historical Viewer + Configuration)

Page 18 of 499
Mounting types, Power Cord & Switch
0: panel mount, no power cord, no power switch
1: panel mount, no power cord, power switch
2: portable, UL & CSA power cord, power switch
3: portable, VDE power cord, power switch
4: portable, SAA power cord, power switch
5: portable, BS power cord, power switch
6: portable, no power cord, power switch
7: Panel mount, UL & CSA power cord, power switch
8: Panel mount, VDE power cord, power switch
9: Panel mount, SAA power cord, power switch
A: Panel mount, BS power cord, power switch
Special options
00: none
S1: 16G SD card
S2: 32G SD card

Note:
DI- Digital Input
AO- Analog Output
PID Process Control card can be purchased separately
Process control card cannot be chosen together with
5: 6AO,
A: 6 relays + 6AO
B: 6DI +6AO
C: 3 relays + 3DI + 6AO
D: 6 relays + 6DI + 6AO
Nor with 24 analog inputs

Page 19 of 499
1.8.3 PR30 Ordering code
PR3006 (6 Analog Inputs) -
PR3012 (12 Analog Inputs)
PR3018 (18 Analog Inputs)
PR3024 (24 Analog Inputs)
PR3030 (30 Analog Inputs)
PR3036 (36 Analog Inputs)
PR3042 (42 Analog Inputs)
PR3030 (48 Analog Inputs)

Relay
0: none
1: 6 Relays
2: 12 Relays
3: 18 Relays
4: 24 Relays
Digital Inputs
0: none
1: 6 Channels
2: 12 Channels
3: 18 Channels
Analog Outputs
0: none
1: 6 Channels
2: 12 Channels
Power
A: 90-250 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D: 11-36 VDC (UL Certification Not available)
Communication
0: standard Ethernet interface
1: Ethernet + RS-232
2: Ethernet + RS-422/485
Firmware
0: Standard Version with Mathematic Functions
1: Plus Version 1 with external channels, batch & FDA 21 CFR part 11
2: Plus Version 2 with editable custom display and Panel Studio software
3: Plus Version 3- includes Plus Version 1+2 above
PC Software
1: Free Basic Software of Historical Viewer and Configuration
2: Extensive software Data Acquisition Studio
(Real-Time Viewer + Historical Viewer + Configuration)
Mounting types, Power Cord & Switch
0: panel mount, no power cord, no power switch
1: panel mount, no power cord, power switch
2: portable, UL & CSA power cord, power switch
3: portable, VDE power cord, power switch
4: portable, SAA power cord, power switch
5: portable, BS power cord, power switch
6: portable, no power cord, power switch
7: Panel mount, UL & CSA power cord, power switch
8: Panel mount, VDE power cord, power switch
9: Panel mount, SAA power cord, power switch
A: Panel mount, BS power cord, power switch
Special options
00: none
S1: 16G SD card
S2: 32G SD card

Page 20 of 499
1.8.4 PID Process Control Card PC201 Ordering code
PC201-

Output 1
0: None
1: Relay 2A/240VAC
2: Pulse voltage to drive SSR, 5V/30mA
3: Isolated 4-20mA/0-20mA (OM95-3)
4: Isolated 1-5V/0-5V (OM95-4)
5: Isolated 0-10V (OM95-5)
6: Triac output 1A/240VAC, SSR
C: Pulse voltage to drive SSR, 14V/40mA (OM94-7)
Output 2
0: None
1: Relay 2A/240VAC
2: Pulse voltage to drive SSR, 5V/30mA
3: Isolated 4-20mA/0-20mA (OM95-3)
4: Isolated 1-5V/0-5V (OM95-4)
5: Isolated 0-10V (OM95-5)
6: Triac output 1A/240VAC, SSR
7: Isolated 20VDC/25mA power supply (DC94-1)
8: Isolated 12VDC/40mA power supply (DC94-2)
9: Isolated 5VDC/80mA power supply (DC94-3)
C: Pulse voltage to drive SSR, 14V/40mA (OM94-7)
Alarm 1
0: None
1: Form C relay 2A/240VAC
Alarm 2
0: None
1: Form A relay 2A/240VAC

1.8.5 Accessories

Part no Description
AI203 3-channel analog input card (TC, RTD, mA, V, mV)
AI206 6-channel analog input card (TC, RTD, mA, V, mV)
PC201 PID process control card
RO206 6-channel relay output card
DI206 6-channel digital input card
RD233 3-channel relay output and 3-channel digital input card
AO206 6-channel analog output card
IF232 RS-232 communication module for PR10 and PR20
IF485 RS-422/485 communication module for PR10 and PR20
IF232A RS-232 communication module for PR30
IF485A RS-422/485 communication module for PR30
90-250VAC 47-63Hz panel mount power supply board without power Switch for PR10 and
PM201
PR20

Page 21 of 499
 Part no Description
PM202 90-250VAC 47-63Hz panel mount power supply board with power switch For PR10 and PR20
PM203 90-250VAC 47-63Hz portable power supply board with a power switch for PR10 and PR20
PM211 11-36VDC panel mount power supply board without power switch for PR10 and PR20
PM212 11-36VDC panel mount power supply board with a power switch for PR10 and PR20
PM213 11-36VDC portable power supply board with a power switch for PR10 and PR20
PM301 90-250VAC 47-63Hz panel mount power supply board without power Switch for PR30
PM302 90-250VAC 47-63Hz panel mount power supply board with power switch For PR30
PM303 90-250VAC 47-63Hz portable power supply board with a power switch for PR30
PM311 11-36VDC panel mount power supply board without power switch for PR30
PM312 11-36VDC panel mount power supply board with a power switch for PR30
PM313 11-36VDC portable power supply board with a power switch for PR30
1-2 Accessories Ordering Code
Note:
❖ The rear slots of the recorder will accept certain Input or output cards only in any combination
based on the selected model.
❖ The basic PC software is supplied free with the recorder. There is an additional charge for the
extensive Data Acquisition Software and communication ports of RS-232/422/485.
❖ The Ordering Code for various standard model Recorders with an AC supply and without any
additional options are as follows:
PR1003- 0A001000
PR2003- 0A001000
PR3006- 000A001000

1.9 Specifications
1.9.1 General Specifications
PR10 PR20 PR30
Number of Analog Input 3,6 3,6,12,18,24 6,12,18,24,30,36,42,48
Thermocouples: J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, L, U, P, W5, W3, LR, A1, A2, A3, M
RTD: PT50, PT100, PT200, PT500, PT1000(α=0.00385), PT50,
Input Signals PT100(α=0.00391), JPT50, JPT100, JPT200, JPT500, JPT1000(α=0.003916),
Cu10(α=0.00427), Cu50, Cu100(α=0.00426, 0.00428), Ni100, Ni200, Ni500,
Ni1000(α=0.00617), Current(mA), Voltage (Volts, mV)
Fastest Sampling rate 100msec/dot, Default setting: 1sec/dot
Calibration Correction On-site Calibration possible or using Offset and Gain for correction
90-250VAC, 47-63Hz, 110VA, 62W
90-250VAC, 47-63Hz, 52VA, 26W maximum,
Power maximum 11-36VDC, 62VA, 62W maximum (UL
11-36VDC, 26VA, 26W maximum Certification Not available)

Display Size 4.3” 5.6” 12.1”

Display Type 65K Colour, TFT Touch Screen
Display Resolution 480 x 272 640 x 480 1024 x 768
Backlight LED
Display MTBF @25°C 30000 Hours 60000 Hours
CPU ARM Cortex-A8, 1GHz
Internal Memory 256MB

Page 22 of 499
 PR10 PR20 PR30
External Storage Max. Up to 32GB SD Card or USB Disk
SD Card Slot Standard one slot at Front
USB Slot Standard one USB slot in front and one USB slot in the rear
Pulse Input Optional DI card support pulse Input up to 100Hz
PID Process Control PID, Ramp & Dwell
Math Channel Available by Standard version
External Channel,
Batch, Custom Display, Available by plus versions
FDA 21 CFR Part 11
Convenient for local users by offering languages in Brazil Portuguese, Chinese
(Simplified, Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, French, German, Greek,
Multilingual
Italian, Japanese, Korean, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai,
Turkish. Other Languages are negotiable.
Screen saver, Email Available by Standard version
Standard Ethernet Port. Modbus TCP/IP (Server by default, Client available with
Ethernet
plus 1 version)
Optional Rs232 or Optional RS422/485. Modbus RTU (Slave by default, Master
RS-232/422/485
available with plus 1 version)
Standard: Historical Viewer + Configuration
PC Software
Optional: Extensive Software Data Acquisition Studio for real-time monitoring

1.9.2 Analog Input Specifications (AI203 & AI206)

Channels: AI203 ~ 3 channels, AI206 ~ 6 channels
Resolution: 24 bits
Sampling Rate: 10 times/ second (100milliseconds)
Maximum Rating:
❖ RTD input ±20V
❖ Thermocouple and Voltage input ± 50V
❖ mA input ±10V
Temperature Effect:
❖ ±0.1uV ±15PPM of reading for all inputs except mA
❖ ±30PPM of reading for mA input
Sensor Lead Resistance Effect:
❖ Thermocouple: 0.32PPM of reading/Ω
❖ 3-wire RTD: 2.6˚C/Ω of resistance difference of two leads (Based on °C
measurement temperature for PT100)
❖ 2-wire RTD: 2.6˚C/Ω of resistance sum of two leads (Based on °C measurement
temperature for PT100)
Burn-out Current: 10uA
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR): 120dB
Normal Mode Rejection Ratio (NMRR): 55dB
Isolation Breakdown Voltage between channels: 1500VAC min.
Sensor Break Detection:
❖ Sensor opened for TC, RTD and mV inputs
❖ Below 1 mA for 4-20mA input
❖ Below 0.25V for 1-5V inputs
❖ Not available for other inputs

Page 23 of 499
Sensor Break Responding Time:
❖ Within 1 seconds for TC, RTD and mV inputs
❖ 0.1 second for 4-20 mA and 1-5V inputs

Input Characteristics:

Type Range Accuracy at 25 ˚C Input Impedance

J -120 ~ 1000 ˚C (-184 ~ 1832 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
K -200 ~ 1370 ˚C (-328 ~ 2498 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
T -250 ~ 400˚C (-418 ~ 752˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
E -100 ~ 900 ˚C (-148 ~ 1652 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
B 0 ~ 1820 ˚C (32 ~ 3308 ˚F) ±2˚C (200 ~ 1820˚C) 3.12MΩ
R 0 ~ 1768 ˚C (32 ~ 3214 ˚F) ±2 ˚C 3.12MΩ
S 0 ~ 1768 ˚C (32 ~ 3214 ˚F) ±2 ˚C 3.12MΩ
N -250 ~ 1300 ˚C (-418 ~ 2372 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
L -200 ~ 900 ˚C (-328 ~ 1652 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
U -200 ~ 600˚C (-328 ~ 1112 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
P 0 ~ 1395 ˚C (32~2543 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
W5 or C 0 ~ 2315 ˚C (32 ~ 4199˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
W3 0 ~ 2315˚C (32 ~ 4199 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
LR -200 ~ 800 ˚C (-328 ~ 1472 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
A1 0 ~ 2500 ˚C (-32 ~ 4532 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
A2 0 ~ 1800 ˚C (-32 ~ 3272 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
A3 0 ~ 1800 ˚C (-32 ~ 3272 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
M -200 ~ 100 ˚C (-328 ~ 212 ˚F) ±1 ˚C 3.12MΩ
PT50 (α = 0.00385) -200 ~ 850 ˚C (-328 ~ 1562 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
PT100 (α = 0.00385) -200 ~ 850 ˚C (-328~ 1562 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
PT200 (α = 0.00385) -200 ~ 850 ˚C (-328 ~ 1562 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
PT500 (α = 0.00385) -200 ~ 850 ˚C (-328 ~ 1562 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
PT1000 (α = 0.00385) -200 ~ 350 ˚C (-328 ~ 662 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
PT50 (α = 0.00391) -200 ~ 850 ˚C (-328 ~ 1562 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
PT100 (α = 0.00391) -200 ~ 850 ˚C (-328 ~ 1562 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
JPT50 (α = 0.003916) -200 ~ 600 ˚C (-328 ~ 1112 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
JPT100 (α = 0.003916) -200 ~ 600 ˚C (-328 ~ 1112 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
JPT200 (α = 0.003916) -200 ~ 600 ˚C (-328 ~ 1112 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
JPT500 (α = 0.003916) -200 ~ 600 ˚C (-328 ~ 1112 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
JPT1000 (α = 0.003916) -200 ~350 ˚C (-328 ~ 662 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Cu50 (α = 0.00426) -50 ~ 200 ˚C (-58 ~392 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Cu100 (α = 0.00426) -50 ~ 200 ˚C (-58 ~392 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Cu50 (α = 0.00428) -180 ~ 200 ˚C (-292 ~392 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Cu100 (α = 0.00428) -180 ~ 200 ˚C (-292 ~392 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Ni100 (α = 0.00617) -60 ~ 180 ˚C (-76 ~356 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Ni200 (α = 0.00617) -60 ~ 180 ˚C (-76 ~356 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Ni500 (α = 0.00617) -60 ~ 180 ˚C (-76 ~356 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Ni1000 (α = 0.00617) -60 ~ 180 ˚C (-76 ~356 ˚F) ±0.4 ˚C 2.0KΩ
Cu10 (α = 0.00427) -200 ~ 260 ˚C (-328 ~500 ˚F) ±0.1 ˚C 2.0KΩ
±20mA -26 ~ 26mA ±0.05% 75Ω
±60mV -122 ~ 122mV ±0.05% 3.12MΩ

Page 24 of 499
 Type Range Accuracy at 25 ˚C Input Impedance
±200mV -243 ~ 243mV ±0.05% 3.12MΩ
±1V -1.58 ~ 1.58mV ±0.05% 3.12MΩ
±2V -3.16 ~ 3.16mV ±0.05% 3.12MΩ
±6V -6.32 ~ 6.32V ±0.05% 3.12MΩ
±20V -25.3 ~ 25.3V ±0.05% 3.12MΩ
±50V -50.6 ~ 50.6V ±0.05% 3.12MΩ
0.4 ~ 2V -3.16 ~ 3.16V ±0.05% 3.12MΩ
1 ~ 5V -6.32 ~ 6.32V ±0.05% 3.12MΩ

1.9.3 Digital Input Specifications (DI206 & RD233)

Channels:
DI206: 6 Channels per card,
RD233: 3 Channels per card
Logic Low: -5V minimum, 0.8V maximum
Logic High: 3.5V minimum, 24V maximum
External pull-down Resistance: 1KΩ maximum
External pull-up Resistance: 1.5MΩ minimum

1.9.4 Relay Output Specifications (RO206 & RD206)

Channels:
RO206: 6 Channels per card,
RD233: 3 Channels per card
Contact Form: N.O. & N.C. (Form C)
Relay Rating: 5A/240 VAC, life cycles 200,000 for resistive load

1.9.5 Analog Output Specifications (AO206)

Channels: 6 Channels per card
Output signal: 4-20mA, 0-20mA, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-10V
Resolution: 16 bits
Accuracy: ±0.05% of Span ±0.0025% /˚C
Load Resistance: 0-500Ω (current), 10KΩ minimum (voltage)
Output Regulation: 0.01% for full load change
Output Setting Time: 0.1 second (stable to 99.9%)
Isolation Breakdown Voltage: 1500VAC at 50/60Hz for 1 minute
Integral Linearity Error: ±0.005% of Span
Temperature Effect: ±0.0025% of Span /˚C
Note:
There are DIP switches available on the AO card to select the output type and the default setting
is SET to Voltage output. For Current (mA) Output, SET 1to 5 (ON) and 6 to 8 (OFF). For more details refer
to Chapter 5.1.4

1.9.6 PID Process Control card Specifications

1.9.6.1 Input1
Resolution: 18 bits
Sampling Rate: 5 times / second
Maximum Rating: -2 VDC minimum, 12 VDC maximum (1 minute for mA input)
Temperature Effect: 1.5uV/°C for all inputs except mA input, ±3.0uV/°C for mA input

Page 25 of 499
Sensor Lead Resistance Effect:
❖ Thermocouple: 0.2uV/Ω
❖ 3-wire RTD: 2.6°C/Ω of resistance difference of two leads
❖ 2-wire RTD: 2.6° C/Ω of resistance sum of two leads
Burn-out Current: 200nA
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR): 120dB
Normal Mode Rejection Ratio (NMRR): 55dB
Sensor Break Detection: Sensor Open for Thermocouple, RTD and mV inputs
Sensor short for RTD input
Below 1 mA for 4-20 mA input
Below 0.25V for 1 - 5 V input
Not available for other inputs.
Sensor Break Responding Time:
❖ Within 4 seconds for TC, RTD and mV inputs
❖ 0.1 second for 4-20 mA and 1 - 5 V inputs
Input 1 Characteristics:

Type Range Accuracy @ 25°C Input Impedance

J -120°C to 1000°C (-184°F to 1832°F) ±2°C 2.2 MΩ
K -200°C to 1370°C ( -328°F to 2498°F) ±2°C 2.2 MΩ
T -250°C to 400°C ( -418°F to 752°F) ±2°C 2.2 MΩ
E -100°C to 900°C ( -148°F to 1652°F) ±2°C 2.2 MΩ
B 0°C to 1800°C (32°F to 3272°F) ±2°C (200°C to 1800° C) 2.2 MΩ
R 0°C to 1767.8°C (32°F to 3214°F) ±2°C 2.2 MΩ
S 0°C to 1767.8°C (32°F to 3214°F) ±2°C 2.2 MΩ
N -250°C to 1300°C (-418°F to 2372°F) ±2°C 2.2 MΩ
L -200°C to 900°C (-328°F to 1652°F) ±2°C 2.2 MΩ
PT100(DIN) -210°C to 700°C (-346°F to 1292°F) ±0.4°C 1.3KΩ
PT100(JIS) -200°C to 600°C (-328°F to 1112°F) ±0.4°C 1.3Ω
mV -8mV to 70mV ±0.05% 2.2 MΩ
mA -3mA to 27mA ±0.05% 70.5Ω
V -1.3V to 11.5V ±0.05% 302KΩ

1.9.6.2 Input2
Resolution: 18 bits
Sampling Rate: 5 times / second
Maximum Rating: -2 VDC minimum, 12 VDC maximum (1 minute for mA input)
Temperature Effect: 1.5uV/°C for all inputs except mA input, ±3.0uV/°C for mA input
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR): 120dB
Normal Mode Rejection Ratio (NMRR): 55dB
Sensor Break Detection:
❖ Below 1 mA for 4-20 mA input
❖ Below 0.25V for 1 - 5 V input
❖ Not available for other inputs
Sensor Break Responding Time: 0.5 Seconds

Page 26 of 499
Input 2 Characteristics:
Type Range Accuracy @ 25°C Input Impedance
CT94-1 0.0 to 50.0 A ±2% of Reading ±0.2A 302KΩ
mA -3mA to 27mA ±0.05% 70.5Ω+(0.8V/Input Current)
V -1.3V to 11.5V ±0.05% 302KΩ

1.9.6.3 Input3 (Event Input)

Logic Low: -10V minimum, 0.8V maximum
Logic high: 2V minimum, 10V maximum
External pull-down Resistance: 400 KΩ maximum
External pull-up Resistance: 1.5 MΩ minimum
Functions:
Select second setpoint and/or PID, reset alarm 1 and/or alarm 2, Disable output 1 and/or output 2,
Remote lockout.

1.9.6.4 Output1/Output2
1. Relay Rating:
2A/240 VAC, life cycles 200,000 for Resistive load
2. Pulsed Voltage:
Source Voltage 5V, current limiting resistance 66Ω
3. Linear Output:
Resolution: 15 bits
Output Regulation: 0.01 % for full load change
Output Settling Time: 0.1 sec. (stable to 99.9 %)
Isolation Breakdown Voltage: 1000 VAC
Temperature Effect: ±0.0025 % of SPAN /°C
Linear Output Characteristics:

Type Zero Tolerance Span Tolerance Load Capacity

4 to 20mA 3.8-4 mA 20-21 mA 500 Ω max
0 to 20mA 0 mA 20-21 mA 500 Ω max
0 to 5V 0V 5 -5.25 V 10KΩ min
1 to 5V 0.95 to 1V 5 -5.25 V 10KΩ min
0 to 10V 0V 10 - 10.5 V 10KΩ min

4. Triac (SSR) Output:

Rating: 1A / 240 VAC
Inrush Current: 20A for 1 cycle
Min. Load Current: 50 mA RMS
Max. Off-state Leakage: 3 mA RMS
Max. On-state Voltage: 1.5 V RMS
Insulation Resistance: 1000 MΩ minimum at 500 VDC
Dielectric Strength: 2500 VAC for 1 minute
SSR Output Characteristics:

Page 27 of 499
 Maximum
Ripple Isolation
Type Tolerance Output
Voltage Barrier
Current
20V ±0.5 V 25 mA 0.2 Vp-p 500 VAC
12V ±0.3 V 40 mA 0.1 Vp-p 500 VAC
5V ±0.15 V 80 mA 0.05 Vp-p 500 VAC

1.9.6.5 Alarm 1/ Alarm 2

Alarm 1 Relay: Form C, Max. Rating 2A/240VAC, life cycles 200,000 for resistive load
Alarm 2 Relay: Form C, Max. Rating 2A/240VAC, life cycles 200,000 for resistive load
Alarm Mode: Normal, Latching, Hold, Latching / Hold
Dwell Timer: 0 - 6553.5 minutes
Alarm Functions:
Dwell timer, Deviation High / Low Alarm, Deviation Band High / Low Alarm, PV1 High /
Low Alarm, PV2 High / Low Alarm, PV1 or PV2 High / Low Alarm, PV1-PV2 High / Low
Alarm, Loop Break Alarm, Sensor Break Alarm

1.9.6.6 Control Mode

Output 1: Reverse (heating) or direct (cooling) action
Output 2: PID cooling control, cooling P band 1~255% of PB
ON-OFF: 0.1 - 100.0(°F) hysteresis control (P band = 0)
P or PD: 0 - 100.0 % offset adjustment
PID:
Fuzzy logic modified Proportional band 0.1 ~ 900.0°F,
Integral time: 0 - 1000 Seconds,
Derivative time 0 - 360.0 seconds
Cycle Time: 0.1 - 100.0 seconds
Manual Control: Heat (MV1) and Cool (MV2)
Auto-tuning: (MV2) Cold start and warm start
Self-tuning: Select None and YES
Failure Mode: Auto-transfer to manual mode while sensor break or A-D converter damage
Sleep Mode: Enable or Disable
Ramping Control: 0 - 900.0°F/minute or 0 - 900.0°F/hour ramp rate
Power Limit: 0 - 100 % output 1 and output 2
Pump / Pressure Control: Sophisticated functions provided
Remote Setpoint: Programmable range for voltage or current input
Differential Control: Control PV1-PV2 at setpoint

1.9.6.7 Profiler
Number of Profiles: 50
Number of Segments per Profile: 32
Note: Total Segments are limited to 1000 Segments

1.9.6.8 Digital Filter

Function: First Order
Time Constant: 0, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 seconds programmable

Page 28 of 499
1.9.7 COMM Module (IF232 and IF485) Specifications
Interface: RS-232 (IF232-one unit) or RS-485 or RS-422 (IF485- up to 247 units)
Protocol: Modbus Protocol RTU mode
Address: 1-247
Baud Rate: 9.6 ~ 115.2 Kbits/sec.
Data Length: 7 or 8 bits
Parity Bit: None, Even or Odd
Stop Bit: 1 or 2 bits

1.9.8 Standard Ethernet Communication

Protocol: Modbus TCP/IP, 10/100 Base T
Ports: AUI (Attachment Unit Interface) and RJ-45, Auto- detect capability

1.9.9 Real-time Clock

Item Description
Make Seiko Instruments
Model MS621-fl11e
Rating 3V,4mAH
Typical Life Time 10 Years
Buffer Period 6 Months
Type Rechargeable
Accuracy Maximum ± 2Seconds/Day

1.9.9.1 Real-time Clock accuracy vs Temperature inside of the housing

Temperature Inside Housing Typical Error / Month
10°C ~ 40 °C 18 Seconds
0°C or 50 °C 52 Seconds
-10°C or 60°C 107 Seconds

1.9.10 Environmental & Physical Specifications

Operating Temperature: 0 ~ 50 ˚C
Storage Temperature: -30 ~ 70 ˚C
Humidity: 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Maximum relative humidity 90% is for ambient temperature up to 38˚C decreasing linearly to
50% relative humidity at 50˚C
Altitude: 2000 M maximum
Insulation Resistance: 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric Strength: 2300VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between power terminal and earth
Vibration Resistance: 10-55 Hz, 10m/ s² for 2 hours
Shock Resistance: 30m/ s² (3g) for operation, 20g for transportation
Operation Position: no inclined restriction
Dimensions: Panel Mount style: PR10/PR20:144(W) x 144(H) x 193mm (D)
PR30:288(W) x 288(H) x 194mm (D)
Standard Panel Cut-out: PR10/PR20:137 x 137mm
PR30:281 x 281mm

Page 29 of 499
1.9.11 Approval Standards
Safety:
UL61010C-1, CSA C22.2 No. 24-93
CE: EN61010-1 (IEC1010-1) over voltage category II, Pollution degree 2
Protective Class:
IP 65 front panel for indoor use
IP 20 housing and terminals
EMC:
Emission: EN61326-1 (EN55022 class A, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)
Immunity: EN61326-1 (EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-3, EN61000-4-4,
EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN61000-4-8, EN61000-4-11)

Page 30 of 499
2. Installation and wiring
Sometimes dangerous voltages capable of causing death are present in this instrument. Before doing
the installation or any troubleshooting procedures, the power to the equipment must be switched off and
isolated. Units suspected of being faulty must be disconnected and removed to a properly equipped
workshop for testing and repair. Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by a
qualified maintenance person only.
To minimize the possibility of fire or shock hazards, do not expose this instrument to rain or excessive
moisture.
Do not use this instrument in areas under hazardous conditions such as excessive shock, vibration,
dirt, moisture, corrosive gases or oil. The ambient temperature of the area should not exceed the maximum
rating specified in the specification
Remove stains from this equipment using a soft, dry cloth. Do not use harsh chemicals, volatile
solvents such as thinner or strong detergents to clean the equipment in order to avoid deformation.
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.

2.1 Unpacking
Upon receipt of the shipment, remove the recorder from the carton and inspect the unit for
shipping damage. If any damage is found, contact your local representative immediately. Note the model
number and serial number for future reference when corresponding with our service centre. The serial
number (S/N) is labelled on the box and the housing of the recorder.
The recorder is designed for indoor use only and is not intended for use in any hazardous area.
It should be kept away from shock, vibration, and electromagnetic fields (such as variable frequency drives),
motors and transformers. It is intended to operate under the following environmental conditions.

Environmental Parameter Specification

Operating Temperature 0°C to 50 °C
Humidity 20% to 90% RH(Non-condensing)
Altitude 2000 M Maximum
Pollution Degree Level II IEC1010-1(EN61010-1)
Power 90 ~ 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 11-36VDC

Page 31 of 499
2.2 Dimensions
2.2.1 Panel mounting style

2.2.1.1 PR10

2-1 PR10 Front Side

2-2 PR10 Right Side

Page 32 of 499
 2-3 PR10 Panel Cut-out Dimensions

2.2.1.2 PR20

2-4 PR20 Front Side

Page 33 of 499
 2-5 PR20 Right Side

2-6 PR20 Panel Cut-out Dimensions

Page 34 of 499
2.2.1.3 PR30

2-7 PR30 Front Side

2-8 PR30 Right Side

Page 35 of 499
 2-9 PR30 Cut-out Dimensions

Note:

❖ Do not over tighten mounting clamp screws that could result in distortion of the case.
❖ There is no mounting angle restriction.
❖ The mounting torque used for 4 sides of the housing should be 2.0 kgf-cm and not more than 2.5
Kgf-cm

2.2.2 Portable styles

Page 36 of 499
2.2.2.1 Bottom Side View of PR20 & PR10

2-10 PR10 & PR20 Portable Type Bottom Side View

2.2.2.2 Front Side View of PR20 & PR10

2-11 PR10 & PR20 Portable Type Front Side View

Page 37 of 499
2.2.2.3 Bottom Side View of PR30

2-12 PR30 Portable Type Bottom Side View

2.2.2.4 Front Side View of PR30

2-13 PR30 Portable Type Front Side View

Page 38 of 499
2.2.2.5 Bottom Stand Clips

2-14 Portable Type Bottom Stand Clips

2.2.2.6 Top Holding Handle

2-15 Portable Type Top Holding Handle

2.3 Input and Output Configuration

The Input and Output cards need to be inserted to the rear slots or removed from the rear slots
at the Power OFF condition. Failure to do so may cause damage to the module or device or both. The
Device will automatically detect the cards at Power ON, once it is inserted into the rear slots.

2.3.1 Analog Input Card (AI206 & AI203)

AI206 and AI203 are analog input cards with 3 and 6 channels respectively. Each card includes
universal inputs of TC (J, K, T, E, B, R, S, N, L, U, P, W5, W3, LR, A1, A2, A3, and M), RTD, mV, mA, V.
The accepted input types and sensor range for analog input are listed in Chapter 1.9. Plug the AI card into
the rear slot then power on. The recorder will automatically detect the card and display the specific input
type and its location in a specific slot in System Information mode while doing the configuration.
The configuration Menu can be reached by pressing Menu and then pressing more and then
pressing Config key. It will display a tree-type configuration layout for easy user configuration. By using
Up/Down Key and Enter Key, AI configuration window can be reached. In this window, the user can
configure the AI parameters. The user can select the desired input type and other parameters for analog
input in this window.

Page 39 of 499
2.3.2 Relay Output card (RO206)
The relay output card RO206 includes 6 relays rated 5 Amp/240 VAC each. Plug the card into a
rear slot and power on the recorder. The recorder will automatically detect the card and display the output
type and its location in a specific slot in System Info mode while doing the configuration.
The configuration Menu can be reached by pressing Menu and then pressing more and then
pressing Config key. It will display a tree-type configuration layout for easy user configuration. By using
Up/Down Key and Enter Key, DO configuration window can be reached. In this window, the user can
configure the DO parameters. The user can select the desired output type and other parameters for Relay
output in this window. The item "Reverse" is to reverse the output status.

Page 40 of 499
2.3.3 Digital Input card (DI206)
This card includes 6 channels of event inputs. As above, plug the card into rear slot and power
on the recorder. The recorder will automatically detect it, and then display the input type and its location in a
specific slot in System Information mode while doing the configuration.
The configuration Menu can be reached by pressing Menu and then pressing more and then
pressing Config key. It will display a tree-type configuration layout for easy user configuration. By using
Up/Down Key and Enter Key, DI configuration window can be reached. In this window, the user can
configure the DI parameters. The user can select the desired input type and other parameters for digital
input in this window. The item "Type" is for the user to decide if this channel will have a logic level or Pulse
Counter input. If you select Pulse Counter, the item "Frequency" will appear for you to select input
frequency (100Hz). The item "Events" can be added to do further control.

2.3.4 Combination Digital Input and Output card (RD233)

This card includes 3 relays rated 5 Amp/240VAC each and 3 Channels of Digital Inputs. As
above, plug the card into rear slot and power on the recorder. The recorder will automatically detect it, and
then display the input type and the output type on its location in a specific slot in System Information mode
while doing the configuration. The first 3 channels are for relays (Terminal 1 to 9) and the last 3 channels
are for Digital inputs (Terminals 10 to 18). The setup is similar to relay output card and digital input card.

Page 41 of 499
2.3.5 Analog output cards (AO206)
These cards are 6-channel analog output cards. They are used to retransmit process values to
other devices like meters, controllers, etc. The configuration Menu can be reached by pressing Menu and
then pressing more and then pressing Config key. It will display a tree-type configuration layout for easy
user configuration. By using Up/Down Key and Enter Key, AO configuration window can be reached. In this
window, the user can configure the AO parameters. The user can select the desired output type and other
parameters for analog output in this window.
Note: There is a dip switch on the AO206 card to select the current or voltage output for each
channel.

2.3.6 PID Process Control Module (PC201)

This is a single loop PID Control Module which consists of Universal Input. The Module output
can be configured by using the Configuration Menu. The configuration Menu can be reached by pressing
Menu and then pressing more and then pressing Config key. It will display a tree-type configuration layout
for easy user configuration. By using Up/Down Key and Enter Key, PID Controller and Profile configuration
window can be reached. In this window, the user can configure the Controller parameters and profiles of
PID Control Module. The user can select the desired output type and other parameters for analog output in
this window.

Page 42 of 499
Note:
❖ The IO Modules should not be removed or Inserted to the device when the power is ON. This
should be carried out in the Power OFF Condition only.
❖ For removing the IO Modules, First, remove the metal screws then remove the plastic screws, after
that press the lock on the top and bottom of the Card and pull to remove it. Failing to do so will
damage the IO Card. Please follow the Recorder user manual for more information.
❖ The Maximum Torque for the metal screw is 3Kg-cm (2.6in-lb) and the Maximum Torque for the
plastic screw is 0.8Kgf-cm (.7in-lb).
❖ Calibration should be carried out by a qualified Engineer with qualified equipment only.
❖ Thermocouple inputs require 1-hour initial warm-up time during initial setup.
❖ For some industries who prefer circular chart displays, PR30 can offer this Unique feature and set
the display speed for each page/circle in 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, 8, 12 hours, 1, 2 days, or 1, 2, 4
weeks.

2.4 Wiring
2.4.1 Wiring Precautions
Care must be taken to ensure that the maximum voltage rating specified on the label is not exceeded.
For the panel-mount version, it is recommended that near an external fuse or an external switch rated
at 2A/250 VAC should be used.
Beware not to over tighten the terminals screws. The torque should not exceed 0.4 N-m (3.6 Lb-in or
4.0 Kg F-cm).
With the exception of the thermocouple wires, all wires should be stranded copper conductor with the
maximum gauge of 18 AWG.
Connect a grounding conductor with 1.6mm diameter minimum to provide protective grounding prior to
turning on the equipment.

Page 43 of 499
2.4.2 Analog Input Wiring

2.4.2.1 AI206 wiring

2.4.2.2 AI203 Wiring

Page 44 of 499
2.4.3 Relay Output Wiring

2.4.3.1 RO206

2.4.4 Digital Input Wiring

2.4.4.1 DI206

Page 45 of 499
2.4.5 Combination Relay Output and Digital Input Wiring

2.4.5.1 RD233

2.4.6 Analog Output Wiring

2.4.6.1 AO206

Page 46 of 499
2.4.7 PID Process Control Card Wiring

2.4.7.1 PC201

2.4.8 RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485 wiring

2.4.8.1 RS232 Wiring

Page 47 of 499
2.4.8.2 RS422 Wiring
RS232 to RS422 Converter

2.4.8.3 RS485 Wiring RS232 to RS485 Converter

2.5 External Memory Card

There are two types of external storage for the User to use in the recorder. One is the SD card
and the other is USB memory. There are two slots for inserting USB memory, one in the front and other on
the rear side of the recorder. If the bigger capacity USB memory is required, the user may buy it locally.
The SD card slot is on the front side. Please see the below figures for more information.

Page 48 of 499
Note

❖ The maximum capacity of external memory supported by the recorder is 32GB. The external memory must be
formatted to FAT or FAT32.
❖ To read measured data and events on a USB memory and SD card memory, it is necessary to install either the
free basic software or the Extensive Data Acquisition software on PC first.

Page 49 of 499
3. BASIC FUNCTIONS OF RECORDERS
3.1 Configuration
The configuration of the recorder follows a tree type layout. This makes it easy for the users to
go through the different submenus easily and do not miss any configuration.

3.2 Firmware
The PR series recorder has 4 different versions of firmware for the user to select as per the
application requirement.
1. Standard Firmware
2. Plus 1 Firmware
3. Plus 2 Firmware
4. Plus 3 Firmware

3.2.1 Standard Firmware

The standard version of firmware has Input and output configuration, Math functions (Counter,
Totalizer), PID Controller function with PID Process control card. This firmware does not include External
channels, Custom Edited Display, Batch, or FDA 21 CFR part11 functions.

3.2.2 Plus 1 Firmware

The plus 1 firmware has the external channel, Batch, FDA 21CFR Part 11 functions along with
the functions available in standard version firmware. This firmware does not include custom display function.

3.2.3 Plus 2 Firmware

The plus 2 firmware version has custom display function similar to HMI along with the functions
available in standard version firmware. This firmware does not include external channel, Batch, FDA 21CFR
part11 functions.

3.2.4 Plus 3 Firmware

The plus 3 firmware has all the functions of standard, plus1, plus 2 version firmware.

Page 50 of 499
3.3 Pulse input through Digital input
The recorder will support pulse input up to 100Hz via a digital input. The digital input can be
configured as a pulse counter to count the no of pulses.

3.4 PID control with Ramp & Soak Profile function

The recorder has the option to use PID control function by using the PC201 PID process control
card. The PID Control Module includes Ramp & Dwell function. It is useful to control the process with
varying setpoint from time to time. There are 50 different Profiles can be configured with 32
Segments/Profile with the limit of 1000 Segments totally.

3.5 On-Field Calibration

The Device allows the user to do on-field calibration for the device. No need to send the device
to the factory for Calibration.
Note: The calibration must be carried out by a skilled person with proper instruments.

3.6 Communication with Third-Party Interfaces

The Recorder has the flexibility to communicate with Third-party Interfaces via protocols such as
Modbus TCP/IP or Modbus RTU as either a Modbus Master or Modbus Slave. The detailed configuration
and related information are available in Chapter 5 Configuration, and Section 5.9.

3.7 Web Server

The Recorder real time trend and Digital data can be viewed in any place in the world if the
recorder have Web Server connectivity. For this, the Recorder should be connected to the Internet with a
fixed IP address provided by the Internet Service provider.

3.8 Email
Important system events and alarms can be sent as an email. The detailed configuration and
related information are available in Chapter 5, Configuration, and Section 5.9.5.

Page 51 of 499
3.9 Handwriting Messages on Historical Trend Screens
Handwriting Messages on Historical trend screen is a useful feature for the user to highlight
important events. The User can write handwritten messages using a stylus on Historical Trend screens.
This is shown in the below picture.

3.10 Custom Display Screen

In plus 2 and plus 3 versions of the firmware, the recorder allows the user to download the
custom screens linked with Analog and Digital Tags from the custom display editor software Panel Studio.
The custom display screens are called custom page in the recorder. The software used to create custom
screen called a custom screen editor (Panel studio).

3.11 Log Speed Flexibility

The recorder has various log speed flexibility for the user to select as per their requirement. The
available log speeds are 100ms/Dot, 1 Sec/Dot, 2 Sec/Dot, 5 Sec/Dot, 10 Sec/Dot, 15 Sec/Dot, 20 Sec/Dot,
30 Sec/ Dot, 1 Min/Dot, 2 Min/Dot, 5 Min/Dot, 10 Min/Dot, 15 Min / Dot, 1 Hour/Dot, 2 Hour/Dot. The User
has a lot of flexibility in logging speeds to select as per the application requirement.

Page 52 of 499
3.12 System Clock Synchronization via Internet
The Recorder System clock can be synchronized via the internet and Summer Saving Time can
be defined. The detailed configuration and related information are available in Chapter 5, Configuration, and
Section 5.8.

3.13 Increased Security

The security mode can be configured as normal or CFR-21. For normal, there is only one
password can be defined for configuration. For CFR-21, there are 9 levels of password with 30 users can be
defined for different functions. The detailed configuration and related information are available in Chapter 5,
Configuration, and Section5.11.

3.14 Auto Output to Printer

The Historical data can be directly printed automatically by a printer or can be saved as a PDF
file using a PDF printer. The detailed configuration and related information are available in Chapter 5,
Configuration, and Section 5.13.

3.15 External Channels

Besides onboard AI and DI inputs, the recorder can accept inputs through Modbus
communication. The PR10, PR20, and PR30 can have a maximum of up to 24, 48 and 96 channels
respectively. The detailed configuration and related information are available in Chapter 5, Configuration,
and Section 5.9.

3.16 Batch
Using this function, the recorded data can be stored in batches. This makes it easy for the user
to analyse the historical data.

3.17 FDA 21 CFR PART 11

This feature is meant to comply with U.S. Food and Drug Administration with a human health
concern. When this feature is enabled, the recorded data cannot be manipulated.

3.18 Circular Chart

PR30 has a unique feature to display the trend in circular chart mode. The recorder has various
log speed flexibility for the user to select as per their requirement. The available log speeds are 100ms/Dot,
1 Sec/Dot, 2 Sec/Dot, 5 Sec/Dot, 10 Sec/Dot, 15 Sec/Dot, 20 Sec/Dot, 30 Sec/ Dot, 1 Min/Dot, 2 Min/Dot,
5 Min/Dot, 10 Min/Dot, 15 Min / Dot, 10 Min/Page, 30 Min/Page, 1 Hour/Page, 2 Hour/Page, 4 Hour/Page,
8 Hour/Page, 12 Hour/Page, 1 Day/Page, 2 Day/Page, 1 Week/Page, 2 Week/Page, 4 Week/Page,
1 Hour/Dot, 2 Hour/Dot. The User has a lot of flexibility in logging speeds to select as per the application
requirement.

Page 53 of 499
3.19 Multilingual Languages
The recorder provides multiple language options for the user to select as per their convenience.
The available languages are Brazil Portuguese, Chinese (Simplified, Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch,
English, French, German, Greek, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish,
Swedish, Thai, Turkish. Other Languages are negotiable.

3.20 USB Barcode Reader, Keyboard and Mouse Connectivity

The recorder supports the data entry through USB Keyboard, Mouse and Barcode reader for the
configuration.

Page 54 of 499
4. GETTING STARTED
The recorder has a TFT touch screen display capable of complex graphical representation,
internal memory and SD card slot or USB drive slot for data storage. The unit is easily programmable, and
the average user will probably never need to use most of the features or functions available in the recorder.
This chapter will give the user a brief system overview and guide the first-time user in a simplified setup
which will enable you to begin recording with the least amount of effort.

4.1 Screen Navigation

The recorder has a TFT touch screen which shows graphics. The screen also acts as a touch
keypad. The user has only to lightly touch the screen area to operate. If the Beep volume is enabled then
the unit will provide a short audible beep, each time the screen is touched. The default display of the
recorder which shows after power-on is as below.

The screen is divided into two distinct areas such as Title Bar, across the top of the screen and
the Graphics Area below the Title bar.

4.1.1 Title Bar

The Status Bar consists of Menu key , Page Type, Page Name, Alarm Status, Internal
memory status, External memory status, Date and Time.

Menu key Page Type Page Name Alarm Status Internal and Memory Status Date and Time

Page 55 of 499
4.1.1.1 Menu key
The menu key will allow the user to access the menus available in the recorder. When the user
presses the menu key , the available menus are displayed.

4.1.1.1.1 Real-Time
Real-time menu will allow the user to access the real-time display of the configured display
pages, Overview display, PID Control card display page and custom screen display page.

Page 56 of 499
4.1.1.1.2 Mode
Mode Menu will allow the user to change the graphical display mode. The available display
modes are Trend, Bar Graph, Digital, Mix Mode, Individual Mode and Circular Mode (only for PR30).

4.1.1.1.3 Alarm
Alarm menu will allow the user to access the real-time alarm page. In this page, the user can
view the real-time alarms and acknowledge the alarms.

Page 57 of 499
 The user can acknowledge the alarm by pressing the ACK key. The user can navigate

the alarm display by using the scroll keys . The user can go back to the
Home screen by pressing the Home key. The user can access other menus by pressing the menu
key.

4.1.1.1.4 Status
The status menu will show the status of DI, DO, AO, Totalizer, Counter.

Page 58 of 499
 By using the DI, DO, AO, Counter, Totalizer tabs the individual status can be viewed in the

respective tabs. The selected tab can be changed by using the left and right scroll keys .
The user goes back to the home screen by pressing the Home key. The up-down scroll keys
are used to scroll down the pages in individual tabs. The user can access other menus by
pressing the menu key.

4.1.1.1.5 History
History menu will allow the user to access the historical data of the display pages. The user can
select the required historical display page by pressing the required page key in the history menu.

Page 59 of 499
 The historical display page will allow the user to navigate the historical data and do the
handwritten remarks on the display page. The user can do the navigation on the screen using the four scroll
keys . The user can increase or decrease the zoom rate by using the two

softkeys . The handwritten messages within the data can be searched by using
key. The zoom rate can be selected by using the softkey . The data at a particular time can be

Page 60 of 499
searched by the softkey . The location of the displayed data can be switched between internal

memory and external memory by using the softkey . The user goes back to the home screen by
pressing the Home key. The user can access other menus by pressing the menu key.

4.1.1.1.5.1 Handwriting Messages on Historical Trend Screens

Handwriting Messages on Historical trend screen is a useful feature for the user to highlight
important events. The User can write handwritten messages using a stylus on Historical Trend screens.
If the user wants to write a message, then they can press the pen key in the screen
below.

Then using the stylus, the user can write any message in Historical Trend Pages as shown
below.

Page 61 of 499
 If the user wants to change the width of the written message, he/she can choose the width key
to change the width of the pen.

If the user wants to change the colour of the pen, he/she can change it by using the key
to change the colour of the pen.

If the user wants to erase part of a message, he/she can do this by using the key to
erase part of the message.

Page 62 of 499
 If the user wants to undo part of a message, he/she can do this by using the key to undo
the last part of the message.

If the user wants to delete the written message, he/she can this do by using the key to
delete the written message.

Page 63 of 499
 If the user wants to save the written message, he/she can do this by using the key to
save the written message.

By using the key, the user can exit the page without saving the data.

Note: The handwriting messages are saved once can’t be modified or deleted.

Page 64 of 499
4.1.1.1.6 Event
Event menu will allow the user to access the historical events and reports. By using the Event
and Report tabs the event list and report list can be viewed in the respective page. The selected tab can be
changed by using the left and right scroll keys . The user goes back to the home screen by
pressing the Home/key. The up-down scroll keys are used to scroll down the pages in
individual tabs. The keys are used to navigate rows and columns. The user can access
other menus by pressing the menu key.

The Event power can be navigated by using the scroll keys . The
stored location of displayed historical events can be switched between internal memory and SD card by

using the softkey .

Page 65 of 499
 The Report list can be navigated up and down by using keys. The report of
previous and next day, week, month depends on the selection of mode can be navigated by using

keys. The mode can be switched between List, Daily, Weekly, Monthly by using key.

4.1.1.1.7 More
More menu will allow the users to access more menus for the operation. The more consists of
the below menus.
1. Dump
2. Clear
3. Operate
4. Config
5. Stop
6. Logout
7. Batch
8. Shutdown

Page 66 of 499
4.1.1.1.7.1 Dump
Dump the historical data from internal memory to external memory such as SD Card or USB
Disk. The user can select the data to be dumped to external memory. The recorder will allow the user to

select the period to be dumped after pressing the key. The available period option to be selected
will differ for normal mode and batch mode.

Page 67 of 499
 Dump Option-Batch Mode

Dump Option- Normal Mode

4.1.1.1.7.2 Clear
Clear all the historical data and event list stored in the memory. The user can select the data to
be cleared. The recorder will allow the user to select the period to be cleared after pressing the key.
The available option period to be selected will differ for normal mode and batch mode.

Page 68 of 499
 Clear Option- Normal Mode

Clear Option-Batch Mode

4.1.1.1.7.3 Operate
Manually operate the jobs from the available jobs directly without any events. The details of
all the jobs are explained in section 5.3.

Page 69 of 499
4.1.1.1.7.4 Config
This will allow the user to access the configuration page. The configuration page configuration is
explained in Chapter 5.

4.1.1.1.7.5 Stop
Stop the batch and logging. The Title bar will show pause when the logging is stopped.

Logging Paused

4.1.1.1.7.6 Logout
Logout the user.

4.1.1.1.7.7 Batch
The user can configure the batch related information. The information can be configured
are Batch name, Lot no, Batch comments. There are 10 comments are available for the user to configure.

Page 70 of 499
The comments can be navigated by using keys. The Batch name and lot no can’t be edited
during the batch is running.

4.1.1.1.7.8 Shutdown
Shutdown the recorder.

Page 71 of 499
5. CONFIGURATION
This section will explain the procedure to configure the recorder. Press (Menu), then
More and then Config softkey to enter Configuration mode. A tree type layout appears with a provision to
configure Channel, Tools, Message, Display, Instrument, Security, Auto-Output, Demo, and System
Information. In addition, the Save, Load, Default and Home soft buttons also appear.

There are four softkeys are available in the configuration page for the menu navigation. They are
as below.

Page 72 of 499
 Enter key Up directional key Down directional key Home key
Various options are available to enter into configuration page menus.
Option-1: Select the required menu by using up & down directional keys, then press “Enter” key
Option-2: Select the required menu directly with a touch, then press “Enter” key
Option-3: Select the required menu by pressing the menu two times quickly, it is the same as a double click
from a mouse
There are four softkeys are available to save, load, to load the default settings and move to the
home screen. They are below.
Save
Save configuration from the recorder to a USB disk or an SD Card.
Load
Load configuration from a USB Disk or SD Card to the recorder.

Default
Load the factory default settings to the configuration menu parameters.
Home
Returns the display back to the home page.

Note: After changing the configuration of any parameter in config menu, the user has to press back
and then press Home key to save the configuration. If the recorder was powered off before this
operation, the configuration will not be saved.

5.1 Channel
This section will explain the configuration of different types of channels. They are as below.
1. Analog Input (AI)
2. Digital Input (DI)
3. Math
4. Analog Output (AO)
5. Digital Output (DO)
6. External device channels.

5.1.1 Analog Input

After entering the Configuration menu, in “Channel”, select “AI”, then press the “Enter” key to
get into Analog Input Channel configuration menu. It displays the Analog input AI1 as the first analog input
channel configuration page. Press directional navigation keys at the bottom to select other
channels. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to select the column. After

completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display.
All configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 73 of 499
Copy: copy the channel configuration from one channel to another channel.
Paste: Paste the copied configuration to the channel.
Press Copy key in the source channel and press paste key in the destination channel.

5.1.1.1.1 Name
Enables the user to define the name for each channel with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new channel
name.

5.1.1.2 Desc
The description of a specific channel on the recorder.

5.1.1.3 Type
Option available to enable or disable the channel

5.1.1.4 Filter
It is to reduce the noise of the input signal before logging. The filter can be set from 1 second to
16 seconds. It is a soft filter available to reduce the fast variation of analog inputs. There are two types of
filters available for the users to select. They are moving average and difference.

5.1.1.4.1 Moving Average

This will log an average of the values sampled in the configured Buffer Time.
For example, if the filter value is set as 5 sec for AI1, it means all the samples collected in the
last 5 sec shall be averaged, and the averaged value is available to record as per Log method.

Page 74 of 499
5.1.1.4.2 Difference
This will log the data only there is at least a difference between the current data and the last
logged data for a period. The difference will be defined by the allowance and the period is defined by
holding time.

For example, the allowance is set for 100 and the holding time is set for 100 msec. If the current
value is 1000 and the last value is 890 when you check the difference is 110. Since this difference is greater
than 100 it is with that value more than the holding time 100 msec, this value will be recorded. If the
difference of current and last recorded value is greater than “difference value” but does not stay for the
duration of holding time this value will not be recorded. So, the holding time will define the duration of the
noise filter.

Page 75 of 499
5.1.1.5 Log

5.1.1.5.1 Data Type

The data type for logging is 2 bytes.
2-byte range: -32767 to +32767

5.1.1.5.2 Trigger
Two options are available for the user to select.
1. Disable: Select disable while the recording of a specific channel is not required at this time
2. Enable: Select enable while the recording of a specific channel is required at this time

5.1.1.5.3 Method
This is the method of logging measured data. Select the column Method and press Enter. Then
choose the required Log method from the available methods Instant, Average, Minimum or Maximum of
data.

5.1.1.5.3.1 Instant
Logging the last measured data at the logging interval

5.1.1.5.3.2 Average
Logging the averaged of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.1.5.3.3 Minimum
Logging the minimum of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.1.5.3.4 Maximum
Logging the maximum of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.1.5.4 Speed
It is the logging speed (recording speed) of measured data. The available log speeds are as
below.
1. 100 msec/dot
2. 1 Sec/dot
3. 2 Sec/dot
4. 5 Sec/dot
5. 10 Sec/dot
6. 15 Sec/dot
7. 20 Sec/dot
8. 30 Sec/dot
9. 1 min/dot
10. 2 min/dot
11. 5 min/dot
12. 15 min/dot
13. 1 hour/dot
14. 2 hour/dot

Page 76 of 499
5.1.1.6 Sensor

5.1.1.6.1 Type
Select the input type of the sensor for the channel.

5.1.1.6.2 Unit
The engineering unit of input.

Page 77 of 499
5.1.1.6.3 Range
Select the range for the input based on Sensor type

5.1.1.6.4 Scale
Appears only for linear input type. The user can scale the input to the engineering unit as per the
application requirement.

5.1.1.7 Offset
It is to offset the input value to correct the sensor error.

5.1.1.8 Gain
It is a multiplier to correct the sensor error.
The correct value = (the process value x gain) + offset

5.1.1.9 Modbus
The scaling of the channel value in Modbus communication.

5.1.1.10 Events
Events are frequently used for Alarm purposes. The events can be used to operate digital
outputs (DO), Timer, Totalizer, Counter or Report. There is a maximum of five events can be added to each
analog input.
Press “Add” to add new event and Press “Remove” to remove selected event

5.1.1.10.1 Type
There are various types of events are available for the user to select for job or alarm purpose.
They are listed as below.

5.1.1.10.1.1 H
It is a high event. When the process value is higher than the high limit, then the alarm or job
associated with this event is actuated.

5.1.1.10.1.2 L
It is a low event. When the process value is lower than the low limit, then the alarm or job
associated with this event is actuated.

5.1.1.10.1.3 HH
It is a high high event. When the process value is higher than the high high limit, then the alarm
or job associated with this event is actuated. This is another limit higher than the high limit for double
warning.

5.1.1.10.1.4 LL
It is a low low event. When the process value is lower than the low low limit, then the alarm or
job associated with this event is actuated. This is another limit lower than the low limit for double warning.

Page 78 of 499
5.1.1.10.1.5 Dev+
It is the deviation+ event. This event will be triggered by the positive deviation of the process
value. The job or alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value higher than the setpoint
from the previous process value.

For example,
Setpoint =10
At 10.00.01 Hrs, Tag1=40
At 10.00.02 Hrs, Tag1 = 51
Then, job or alarm is activated

5.1.1.10.1.6 Dev-
It is a deviation- event. This event will be triggered by the negative deviation of the process value. The job or
alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value lower than the setpoint from the previous
process value.

For example,
Setpoint =10
At 10.00.01 Hrs, Tag1=40
At 10.00.02 Hrs, Tag1 = 29
Then, job or alarm is activated.

5.1.1.10.1.7 Error
It is an error event. This event will be activated when there is an error on the input of the
channel.

5.1.1.10.2 Setpoint
Setpoint for the event.

5.1.1.10.2.1 Hysteresis
To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, Hysteresis value can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint.

5.1.1.10.2.2 Holding time

To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, the holding time can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint. In the process sometimes SP is reached but it will go down immediately, this might
due to process instability. To avoid this kind of nuisance situations, the holding time can be used to see that
PV stays at above that SP more than the holding time and then only activate the action for that event. The
range of holding time can be set from 1 min to 60 min.

5.1.1.10.3 Log

The event can be logged as an alarm or event. They can be selected from the available options.
They are as below.

5.1.1.10.3.1 Log Alarm

Log the event as Alarm.

Page 79 of 499
5.1.1.10.3.2 Log Alarm (Auto Ack)
Log the event as alarms and acknowledge automatically

5.1.1.10.3.3 Log Event

Log as event

5.1.1.10.4 Job1 & Job2

The job is called as a task to be performed when the event is activated. There are two jobs Job1
and Job2 can be added to perform in any event.
A typical example is to trigger an alarm buzzer in the event of high temperature. Each channel
can accept five different types of events (or alarms) and each event can create two jobs. Please note that a
job under Event is different from a job performed by Operate key. The job is actuated by an event, and the
Operate is actuated by manual control, no event necessary.

Note: Please refer to the section Jobs for full details about various jobs available
Note: Number of analog inputs shown on the AI screen depends on a number of Analog input cards
inserted in the paperless recorder.

Example:
If the temperature is increased to more than 120 OC, logs alarm and switches on digital output 1
only after 1-minute holding time defined in the setting. When the temperature is decreased to less than 80
OC, logs the alarm and switches off the digital output1 only after 1-minute holding time defined in the setting.

The setting of events for the analog input in the channel configuration is as follows,

5.1.2 Digital Input

After entering the Configuration menu, in the Channel, select DI then Press the “Enter” softkey
to get into the Digital Input Channel configuration menu. It displays the Digital input DI1 as the first digital
input channel configuration page. Press directional navigation keys at the bottom to select

other channels. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to select the column. After

completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display.
All configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 80 of 499
Copy: copy the channel configuration from one channel to another channel.
Paste: Paste the copied configuration to the channel.
Press Copy key in the source channel and press paste key in the destination channel.

5.1.2.1.1 Name
Enables the user to define the name for each channel with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new channel
name.

5.1.2.2 Desc
The description of a specific channel on the recorder.

5.1.2.3 Type
Type of Digital input. The digital input can be configured as Logic Level and pulse counter. To
select the type, press the Type and then select the required type.

5.1.2.3.1 Logic Level

This selection activates digital logic, which is either one or zero with a low frequency which is
less than 1Hz, such as an external relay.

5.1.2.3.2 Pulse Counter

This selection will allow the digital input to read the high-speed pulse inputs up to 100 Hz. This is
useful to get the flow rate from pulse output from flow meters.

Page 81 of 499
5.1.2.4 Events
A maximum of 2 events is supported for every digital Input channel. A maximum of two jobs can
be configured for each event.

*Note: Events will not appear if Logic Level selected as Pulse Counter

Press “Add” to add new event and Press “Remove” to remove selected event

5.1.2.4.1 Type
Select the event type Low L or High H

5.1.2.4.1.1 Holding time

To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, the holding time can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint. In the process sometimes SP is reached but it will go down immediately, this might
due to process instability. To avoid this kind of nuisance situations, the holding time can be used to see that
the DI stays at high or low more than the holding time and then only activate the action for that event. The
range of holding time can be set from 1 min to 60 min.

5.1.2.4.2 Job1, Job2

The job is called as a task to be performed when the event is activated. There are two jobs Job1
and Job2 can be added to perform in any event.
To configure a Job, select Job1, then press the Enter key. It will show a list of all the available
jobs. Select the required Job.

Page 82 of 499
Note: Number of digital inputs shown one the DI screen depends on the number of Digital input cards
inserted in the paperless recorder.

Example:
After pressing a “Start” switch, latch ON Digital Ouput1, after pressing a “Pause” switch, latch Off
Digital Output1.
Start Timer, Stop Timer, Reset Totalizer, Reset Counter, Reset MaxMinAve values of all the
channels etc...
It is possible to display Digital input status via the status bar on any display page in the
paperless recorder. If the digital input is not enabled then it shows as “Low”. If the digital input is enabled
then it shows like “High”. To configure status bar, refer section Display

Digital Input status can also be monitored from the (Menu). Press “Status” and then select “DI”, it
will show the Digital Input Status as follows.

Page 83 of 499
5.1.3 Math Channel
The Math channel is used to do mathematical operations. The Math channel can be configured
as Math or counter or Totalizer. The maximum no of math channel in different PR recorders as below.
PR Recorder PR10 PR20 PR30
Maximum Math Channels 15 40 60

After entering the Configuration menu, in the Channel, select Math then Press the “Enter”
softkey to get into Math Channel configuration menu. It displays the Math channel Math1 as the first math
channel configuration page. Press directional navigation keys at the bottom to select other

channels. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to select the column. After

completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display.
All configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 84 of 499
Copy: copy the channel configuration from one channel to another channel.
Paste: Paste the copied configuration to the channel.
Press Copy key in the source channel and press paste key in the destination channel.

5.1.3.1.1 Name
Enables the user to define the name for each channel with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new channel
name.

5.1.3.2 Desc
The description of a specific channel on the recorder.

5.1.3.3 Type
The type of math channel. The math channel can be configured as Math, Counter and Totalizer.
The options available in type for the user to select are Disable, Math, Counter and Totalizer. The
configuration menu will differ depends on the selection of Type.

5.1.3.3.1 Disable
Disable the math channel.

Page 85 of 499
5.1.3.3.2 Math
Configure the channel as Math channel.

Page 86 of 499
5.1.3.4 Log

5.1.3.4.1 Data Type

The data type for logging is 2 byte or 4 bytes
2-byte range: -32767 to +32767
4-byte range: -3.4E+38 to +3.4E +38

5.1.3.4.2 Trigger
Two options are available for the user to select.
3. Disable: Select disable while the recording of a specific channel is not required at this time
4. Enable: Select enable while the recording of a specific channel is required at this time

5.1.3.4.3 Method
This is the method of logging measured data. Select the column Method and press Enter. Then
choose the required Log method from the available methods Instant, Average, Minimum or Maximum of
data.

5.1.3.4.3.1 Instant
Logging the last measured data at the logging interval

5.1.3.4.3.2 Average
Logging the averaged of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.3.4.3.3 Minimum
Logging the minimum of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.3.4.3.4 Maximum
Logging the maximum of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.3.4.4 Speed
It is the logging speed (recording speed) of measured data. The available log speeds are as
below.
1. 100 msec/dot
2. 1 Sec/dot
3. 2 Sec/dot
4. 5 Sec/dot
5. 10 Sec/dot
6. 15 Sec/dot
7. 20 Sec/dot
8. 30 Sec/dot
9. 1 min/dot
10. 2 min/dot
11. 5 min/dot
12. 15 min/dot
13. 1 hour/dot
14. 2 hour/dot

Page 87 of 499
5.1.3.5 Expression
This will appear only for the channel type as Math. Math channel expression can be configured
on this menu. Once the user enters the expression menu the pop-up window will show the option for the
user to configure the expression. The pop-up window consists of Source, Operator and keyboard.

The Source consists of all available Analog inputs, Digital Inputs, Math inputs, external channels.
The Operator consists of available mathematical expressions. Use Source, Operator and keyboard to define
the Math equation.

5.1.3.5.1 Available Math Expressions

The available math expression for the user to configure the math expressions is as below.
Expressions Mathematics Functions
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
SIN(x) sin(x)
COS(x) cos(x)
EXP(x) ex
SQRT(x) Square root of x
LN(x) loge(x)
LOG(x) log10(x)
ABS(x) Absolute of x
POW (x, y) xy
ROUND(x) The closest integral number to x
HI (x, y) The bigger value between x and y
Lo (x, y) The smaller value between x and y
INV(x) 1/x
TG(x) tan(x)

Page 88 of 499
 Expressions Mathematics Functions
CTG(x) 1/tan(x)
ASIN(x) Sin-1(x)
ACOS(x) Cos-1(x)
ATG(x) Tan-1(x)
x%y Remainder of x/y
x^y xy

5.1.3.6 Scale
The scale is used to do scale the math channel value.

5.1.3.6.1 Unit
The user can define the engineering unit for the channel as per the application requirement.

5.1.3.6.2 Transformation
This is mainly used to scale the non-linear process input value. The available options for the
user in the transformation menu are disabled, value and math channel.

5.1.3.6.2.1 Disable
The transformation function is disable

5.1.3.6.2.2 Value
The transformation table will transform the value of the expression to the same math
channel.

5.1.3.6.2.3 Math Channel

The transformation table will transform the value of the expression to another math
channel.

5.1.3.6.2.3.1 Accept a value out of range

This will allow the user to restrict the maximum value to be displayed as per the value
configured in the transformation table.

5.1.3.6.2.3.2 Table
The transformation table can be configured with this menu. The user can configure the table with
a maximum of 64 rows with corresponding input and output values.

Page 89 of 499
Add
Press “Add” softkey to add a new row into the Transformation table

Delete
Press “Delete” softkey to delete an existing row from the Transformation table
Copy
Press to copy an existing row in the Transformation table to create a duplicate entry

Mode
Press to toggle between Input and Output entries in the Transformation table

Up & Down
To navigate among rows in the Transformation table
Enter
To change the value of the selected rows.

5.1.3.6.3 Counter
Configure the channel as Counter

Page 90 of 499
5.1.3.6.3.1 Counter
The counter is used to configure the counter.

5.1.3.6.3.1.1 Unit
Defines the unit of counter

5.1.3.6.3.1.2 Preset
Defines the pre-set value for the counter.

5.1.3.6.4 Totalizer
Configure the channel as a totalizer

5.1.3.6.4.1 Totalizer as Normal Totalizer

Configure the totalizer as normal totalizer for general totalizing applications.

5.1.3.6.4.1.1 Input
Input type for the Totalizer. Select Analog Input or DI Pulse counter.

Page 91 of 499
5.1.3.6.4.1.2 Source
Select the source for the Totalizer from Analog input/Math/Counter/Totalizer/DI Pulse
counter

5.1.3.6.4.2 Totalizer for F0 calculation application

Configure the Totalizer as F0 for F0 calculation application. F0 expression used to calculate
F0 value will be displayed for the user reference.

5.1.3.6.4.2.1 Source
The input source T for calculation of F0.

5.1.3.6.4.2.2 Ref.Temp
The reference temperature Tr for F0 calculation. Generally, steam pasteurization temperature Tr
assumed as 121.0°C.`

5.1.3.6.4.2.3 Z
The Temperature unit of logarithmic sterilization capability change Z for F0 calculation.
Generally, Z assumed as 10°C

5.1.3.6.4.2.4 Time
The time interval Δt for F0 calculation.

Page 92 of 499
5.1.3.6.4.3 Action
Disables or enables the Totalizer

5.1.3.6.4.4 Decimal
Defines the decimal point for the Totalizer

5.1.3.6.4.5 Period
Select the period for the totalizer. The available options are Seconds, Minutes, Hours and Days

5.1.3.6.4.6 Unit
Defines the unit of the totalizer

5.1.3.6.4.7 Preset
Defines the pre-set value for the Totalizer.

5.1.3.6.4.8 Low Cut

Defines the Low-Cut value for the Totalizer. For example, if 0.0 is set as Low cut, then, if source
channel AI1 is less than 0.0, the Totalizer value will not go to negative.

5.1.3.7 Modbus
The scaling of the channel value in Modbus communication.

Page 93 of 499
5.1.3.8 Events
Events are frequently used for Alarm purposes. The events can be used to operate digital
outputs (DO), Timer, Totalizer, Counter or Report. There is a maximum of five events can be added to each
analog input.
Press “Add” to add new event and Press “Remove” to remove selected event

5.1.3.8.1 Type
There are various types of events are available for the user to select for job or alarm purpose.
They are listed as below.

5.1.3.8.1.1 H
It is a high event. When the process value is higher than the high limit, then the alarm or job
associated with this event is actuated.

5.1.3.8.1.2 L
It is a low event. When the process value is lower than the low limit, then the alarm or job
associated with this event is actuated.

5.1.3.8.1.3 HH
It is a high high event. When the process value is higher than the high high limit, then the alarm
or job associated with this event is actuated. This is another limit higher than the high limit for double
warning.

5.1.3.8.1.4 LL
It is a low low event. When the process value is lower than the low low limit, then the alarm or
job associated with this event is actuated. This is another limit lower than the low limit for double warning.

5.1.3.8.1.5 Dev+
It is a deviation+ event. This event will be triggered by the positive deviation of the process
value. The job or alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value higher than setpoint
from the previous process value.

5.1.3.8.1.6 Dev-
It is a deviation- event. This event will be triggered by the negative deviation of the process
value. The job or alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value lower than setpoint
from the previous process value.

5.1.3.8.1.7 Error
It is an error event. This event will be activated when there is an error on the input of the
channel.

5.1.3.8.2 Setpoint
Setpoint for the event.

Page 94 of 499
5.1.3.8.2.1 Hysteresis
To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, Hysteresis value can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint.

5.1.3.8.2.2 Holding time

To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, the holding time can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint. In the process sometimes SP is reached but it will go down immediately, this might
due to process instability. To avoid this kind of nuisance situations, the holding time can be used to see that
PV stays at above that SP more than the holding time and then only activate the action for that event. The
range of holding time can be set from 1 min to 60 min.

5.1.3.8.3 Log
The event can be logged as an alarm or event. They can be selected from the available options.
They are as below.

5.1.3.8.3.1 Log Alarm

Log the event as Alarm.

5.1.3.8.3.2 Log Alarm (Auto Ack)

Log the event as alarms and acknowledge automatically

5.1.3.8.3.3 Log Event

Log as event

5.1.3.8.4 Job1 & Job2

The job is called as a task to be performed when the event is activated. There are two jobs Job1
and Job2 can be added to perform in any event.
A typical example is to trigger an alarm buzzer in the event of high temperature. Each channel
can accept five different types of events (or alarms) and each event can create two jobs. Please note that a
job under Event is different from a job performed by Operate key. The job is actuated by an event, and the
Operate is actuated by manual control, no event necessary.

Note: Please refer to the section Jobs for full details about various jobs available

5.1.3.9 Examples for Math Channel Application

5.1.3.9.1 Example 1 with Transformation Table

A chemical tank has a non-linear shape. The level is 0 to 1400 CMS. The Recorder should
display 0 to 170 Tons as per the following table

Page 95 of 499
5.1.3.9.2 Example 2 with Transformation Table
The input of 0 to 20mA for pressure 0 to 150 PSIG is required to display as per the below table.

The below steps are required to follow.

1. Configure the AI Channel as per the input configuration.

Page 96 of 499
 2. Configure one math channel with the required conversion using the transformation table.

3. Configure the Expression with the input channel

4. Add the Transformation table type as values
5. Create the transformation table with the known values.

6. Now the Math channel will show the value as per the table.

5.1.3.9.3 Relative Humidity Application

The relative humidity can be calculated using Math Channel application. For this, we need two
analog inputs with RTD input to measure dry bulb temperature and wet bulb temperature. For this example,
the recorder has two analog inputs with RTD input in AI1 to measure dry bulb temperature and AI2 to
measure wet bulb temperature. The below are steps to be followed to calculate the relative humidity.
The relative humidity can be calculated by using the below formulae.
𝐸𝑤 − (0.66875 ∗ (1 + 0.00115 ∗ 𝑇𝑤) ∗ (𝑇𝑑 − 𝑇𝑤))
𝑅𝐻 = ( ) ∗ 100
𝐸𝑑
The formulae can be split into 3 different parts for easier understanding.
1. Calculate Ed with dry-bulb (Td) and wet-bulb (Tw) temperatures using the following equation.
17.502∗𝑇𝑑
𝐸𝑑 = 6.112 ∗ 𝑒 (240.97+𝑇𝑑)
2. Calculate Ew with dry-bulb (Td) and wet-bulb (Tw) temperatures using the following equation.
17.502∗𝑇𝑤
( )
𝐸𝑤 = 6.112 ∗ 𝑒 240.97+𝑇𝑤

Page 97 of 499
 In the above equations, the temperatures units are °C.
3. Calculate Relative Humidity (RH) using the following equation
𝐸𝑤 − (0.66875 ∗ (1 + 0.00115 ∗ 𝑇𝑤) ∗ (𝑇𝑑 − 𝑇𝑤))
𝑅𝐻 = ( ) ∗ 100
𝐸𝑑
The units of relative humidity are in %
Example:
Assume that dry-bulb temperature (Td) = 20°C and wet-bulb temperature (Tw) = 15°C.
17.502∗20
𝐸𝑑 = 6.112 ∗ 𝑒 (240.97+20)
350.04
𝐸𝑑 = 6.112 ∗ 𝑒 260.97)
(
(1.3413)
𝐸𝑑 = 6.112 ∗ 𝑒
𝐸𝑑 = 6.112 ∗ 3.8240
𝐸𝑑 = 23.372
17.502∗15
𝐸𝑤 = 6.112 ∗ 𝑒 (240.97+15)
262.53
𝐸𝑤 = 6.112 ∗ 𝑒 (255.97)
𝐸𝑤 = 6.112 ∗ 𝑒 (1.0256)
𝐸𝑤 = 6.112 ∗ 2.7888
𝐸𝑤 = 17.045

17.045 − 0.66875 ∗ (1 + 0.00115 ∗ 15) ∗ (20 − 15)

𝑅𝐻 = ( ) ∗ 100
23.372
17.045 − 0.66875 ∗ (1.01725) ∗ (5)
𝑅𝐻 = ( ) ∗ 100
23.372
17.045 − 3.4014
𝑅𝐻 = ( ) ∗ 100
23.372
13.6436
𝑅𝐻 = ( ) ∗ 100
23.372
𝑅𝐻 = 58.376%
3 Math channels are required to calculate one RH.
Td = AI1, analog input for dry bulb temperature (PT100)
Tw =AI2, analog input for wet bulb temperature (PT100)

Math1 = Ed = 6.112*EXP((17.502*AI1)/(240.97+AI1))
Math2 = Ew= 6.112*EXP((17.502*AI2)/(240.97+AI2))
Math3=RH= (Math2-(0.66875*(1+0.00115*AI2) *(AI1-AI2))/Math1) *100

Page 98 of 499
Page 99 of 499
Now Math3 will display Relative humidity in %
Math channels are virtual channels. They contain measured values based on equations. These
values can be recorded similar to physically connected Analog inputs and display as digital values, trends,
bar graphs etc.

5.1.3.9.4 Counter Example

The user requires the number of occurrences of an event in a day. The pressure switch in DI1
goes logic high is considered as an event in this application. The Pressure switch is connected in DI1. The
High signal indicates the high pressure.

Page 100 of 499

 The counter value will be logged in the report and reset to start the count of the next day. The
Historical report can be viewed in the Event mode Report tab with the selection of Daily mode.

5.1.3.9.5 Totalizer Example

Water flow rate is in M3/Sec. The user needs to know about total water discharged and daily
reports

Page 101 of 499

 The Totalizer value will be logged in the report and reset to start the totalizer of the next day. The
Historical report can be viewed in the Event mode Report tab with the selection of Daily mode. The Weekly
and monthly report can also be viewed by changing the mode.

5.1.4 Analog Output

The Analog Output card dip switches need to be set for the required output type. The default
setting set to Voltage Output. For Current Output Set Dip Switches 1 to 5 to ON and 6 to 8 to OFF. The
below figure shows the Dip Switches setting on the AO Card.

Page 102 of 499

 After entering the Configuration menu, in the Channel, select AO then Press the “Enter” softkey
to get into AO Channel configuration menu. It displays the AO channel AO1 as the first AO channel
configuration page. Press directional navigation keys at the bottom to select other

channels. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to select the column. After

completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display.
All configurations will be saved automatically.

Copy: copy the channel configuration from one channel to another channel.
Paste: Paste the copied configuration to the channel.
Press Copy key in the source channel and press paste key in the destination channel.

Page 103 of 499

5.1.4.1 Desc
The description of a specific channel on the recorder.

5.1.4.2 Type
The type of analog output channel. The analog output channel can be configured as Voltage or
Current. The output menu will differ depends on the selection of Type.

5.1.4.3 Output
Select the required output. The available options are Disable, 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA for
current output and Disable, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V and 0 to 10V for Voltage output

5.1.4.4 Expression
The expression required for retransmission. Once the user enters the expression menu the pop-
up window will show the option for the user to configure the expression. The pop-up window consists of
Source, Operator and keyboard.

The Source consists of all available Analog inputs, Digital Inputs, Math inputs, external channels.
The Operator consists of available mathematical expressions. Use Source, Operator and keyboard to define
the Math equation.

5.1.4.4.1 Available Math Expressions

The available math expression for the user to configure the math expressions is as below.

Expressions Mathematics Functions

+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication

Page 104 of 499

 Expressions Mathematics Functions
/ Division
SIN(x) sin(x)
COS(x) cos(x)
EXP(x) ex
SQRT(x) Square root of x
LN(x) loge(x)
LOG(x) log10(x)
ABS(x) Absolute of x
POW (x, y) xy
ROUND(x) The closest integral number to x
HI (x, y) The bigger value between x and y
Lo (x, y) The smaller value between x and y
INV(x) 1/x
TG(x) tan(x)
CTG(x) 1/tan(x)
ASIN(x) Sin-1(x)
ACOS(x) Cos-1(x)
ATG(x) Tan-1(x)
x%y Remainder of x/y
x^y xy
The analog output expression should follow the below syntax for the expression.
𝑀𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑝𝑢𝑡 + [(𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑝𝑢𝑡 − 𝑀𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑝𝑢𝑡 ) ∗ (𝐼𝑛𝑝𝑢𝑡
− 𝐼𝑛𝑝𝑢𝑡 𝐿𝑜𝑤 𝑆𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑒)]/(𝐼𝑛𝑝𝑢𝑡 𝐻𝑖𝑔ℎ 𝑆𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑒 − 𝐼𝑛𝑝𝑢𝑡 𝐿𝑜𝑤 𝑆𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑒)
For example, AO1 is required to retransmit current output 4 to 20mA corresponds to AI1
scaled with -120°C to 1000°C should have the expression as below.
4+ (20-4) *(AI1-(-120)) / (1000-(-120))

5.1.4.5 Modbus
The scaling of the channel value in Modbus communication.

5.1.5 Digital Output

After entering the Configuration menu, in the Channel, select DO then Press the “Enter” softkey
to get into DO Channel configuration menu. It displays the DO channel DO1 as the first DO channel
configuration page. Press directional navigation keys at the bottom to select other

channels. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to select the column. After

completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display.
All configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 105 of 499

Copy: copy the channel configuration from one channel to another channel.
Paste: Paste the copied configuration to the channel.
Press Copy key in the source channel and press paste key in the destination channel.

5.1.5.1 Desc
The description of a specific channel on the recorder.

5.1.5.2 Reverse
The Reverse option is Enable or Disable. If it is enabled then the output state of DO will be
reversed.
For example, when reverse is disabled, the relay output is Normally Open (NO). If the
application requires that the output should be Normally Closed (NC) relay at Recorder, then enable
“Reverse” for the selected Digital Output. The Relay output will be normally closed.

5.1.6 External
The external channel is used to read the data from external devices with Modbus
communication. In this, the recorder will act as a Master and read the data from Modbus slaves. The data
will be logged and displayed by using External channels. The no of available External channels will be
varied depends on the recorder model. The available External channel on the different recorder models as
below.
PR Recorder PR10 PR20 PR30
No of External Channels 24 48 96

After entering the Configuration menu, in the Channel, select External then Press the “Enter”
softkey to get into the External Channel configuration menu. It displays the External channel External 1 as
the first External channel configuration page. Press directional navigation keys at the

bottom to select other channels. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to select the

column. After completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to
the main display. All configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 106 of 499

Copy: copy the channel configuration from one channel to another channel.
Paste: Paste the copied configuration to the channel.
Press Copy key in the source channel and press paste key in the destination channel.

5.1.6.1 Name
Enables the user to define the name for each channel with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new channel
name.

5.1.6.2 Desc
The description of a specific channel on the recorder.

5.1.6.3 Type
Option available to enable or disable the channel

5.1.6.4 Log

5.1.6.4.1 Data Type

The data type for logging is 2 bytes.
2-byte range: -32767 to +32767

5.1.6.4.2 Trigger
Two options are available for the user to select.
1. Disable: Select disable while the recording of a specific channel is not required at this time
2. Enable: Select enable while the recording of a specific channel is required at this time

Page 107 of 499

5.1.6.4.3 Method
This is the method of logging measured data. Select the column Method and press Enter. Then
choose the required Log method from the available methods Instant, Average, Minimum or Maximum of
data.

5.1.6.4.3.1 Instant
Logging the last measured data at the logging interval

5.1.6.4.3.2 Average
Logging the averaged of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.6.4.3.3 Minimum
Logging the minimum of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.6.4.3.4 Maximum
Logging the maximum of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.1.6.4.4 Speed
It is the logging speed (recording speed) of measured data. The available log speeds are as
below.
1. 100 msec/dot
2. 1 Sec/dot
3. 2 Sec/dot
4. 5 Sec/dot
5. 10 Sec/dot
6. 15 Sec/dot
7. 20 Sec/dot
8. 30 Sec/dot
9. 1 min/dot
10. 2 min/dot
11. 5 min/dot
12. 15 min/dot
13. 1 hour/dot
14. 2 hour/dot

5.1.6.5 Modbus Register Value Conversion

5.1.6.5.1 Data Type

The data type for logging is 2 byte or 4 bytes
2-byte range: 0 to 65535
4-byte range: 0 to 4294967295

5.1.6.5.2 Modbus Register Value Range (M)

The user can configure the Modbus data range low (ML) and high (MH) according to the device
connected.

5.1.6.5.3 Actual Value Range (M)

The user can configure the Engineering unit, Actual value range low (AL) and Actual value range
high (AH) as per the device.

Page 108 of 499

5.1.6.6 Modbus
The scaling of the channel value in Modbus communication.

5.1.6.7 Events
Events are frequently used for Alarm purposes. The events can be used to operate digital
outputs (DO), Timer, Totalizer, Counter or Report. There is a maximum of five events can be added to each
analog input.
Press “Add” to add new event and Press “Remove” to remove selected event

5.1.6.7.1 Type
There are various types of events are available for the user to select for job or alarm purpose.
They are listed as below.

5.1.6.7.1.1 H
It is a high event. When the process value is higher than the high limit, then the alarm or job
associated with this event is actuated.

5.1.6.7.1.2 L
It is a low event. When the process value is lower than the low limit, then the alarm or job
associated with this event is actuated.

5.1.6.7.1.3 HH
It is a high high event. When the process value is higher than the high high limit, then the alarm
or job associated with this event is actuated. This is another limit higher than the high limit for double
warning.

5.1.6.7.1.4 LL
It is a low low event. When the process value is lower than the low low limit, then the alarm or
job associated with this event is actuated. This is another limit lower than the low limit for double warning.

5.1.6.7.1.5 Dev+
It is a deviation+ event. This event will be triggered by the positive deviation of the process
value. The job or alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value higher than setpoint
from the previous process value.
For example,
Setpoint =10
At 10.00.01 Hrs, Tag1=40
At 10.00.02 Hrs, Tag1 = 51 Then, job or alarm is activated

5.1.6.7.1.6 Dev-
It is a deviation- event. This event will be triggered by the negative deviation of the process
value. The job or alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value lower than setpoint
from the previous process value.

Page 109 of 499

For example,
Setpoint =10
At 10.00.01 Hrs, Tag1=40
At 10.00.02 Hrs, Tag1 = 29 Then, job or alarm is activated.

5.1.6.7.1.7 Error
It is an error event. This event will be activated when there is an error on the input of the
channel.

5.1.6.7.2 Setpoint
Setpoint for the event.

5.1.6.7.2.1 Hysteresis
To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, Hysteresis value can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint.

5.1.6.7.2.2 Holding time

To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, the holding time can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint. In the process sometimes SP is reached but it will go down immediately, this might
due to process instability. To avoid this kind of nuisance situations, the holding time can be used to see that
PV stays at above that SP more than the holding time and then only activate the action for that event. The
range of holding time can be set from 1 min to 60 min.

5.1.6.7.3 Log

The event can be logged as an alarm or event. They can be selected from the available options.
They are as below.

5.1.6.7.3.1 Log Alarm

Log the event as Alarm.

5.1.6.7.3.2 Log Alarm (Auto Ack)

Log the event as alarms and acknowledge automatically

5.1.6.7.3.3 Log Event

Log as event

5.1.6.7.4 Job1 & Job2

The job is called as a task to be performed when the event is activated. There are two jobs Job1
and Job2 can be added to perform in any event.
A typical example is to trigger an alarm buzzer in the event of high temperature. Each channel
can accept five different types of events (or alarms) and each event can create two jobs. Please note that a
job under Event is different from a job performed by Operate key. The job is actuated by an event, and the
Operate is actuated by manual control, no event necessary.

Note: Please refer to the section Jobs for full details about various jobs available and section
communication for more details about External Channel.

Page 110 of 499

5.2 Controller
This will allow the user to configure the PID process control card. The maximum no of PID
Process control cards will vary depends on the recorder model as described below
PR Recorder PR10 PR20 PR30
No of PID Process control card 4 4 8

After entering the Configuration menu, in the Channel, select Controller then Press the “Enter”
softkey to get into Controller Channel configuration menu. It displays the Controller channel C1 as the first
Controller channel configuration page. Press directional navigation keys at the bottom to

select other channels. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to select the column.

After completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main
display. All configurations will be saved automatically
.

5.2.1 Name
Enables the user to define the name for each channel with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new channel
name.

5.2.2 Parameter
This will allow the user to configure the PID Control function on the Process Control Card. Press

Parameter and then press Enter Softkey to access the parameter configuration table. In the
Configuration table, the user can edit the parameters of the Process Control Card as per their requirement
by selecting the desired parameter using the UP-DOWN keys and then press the Enter
Softkey . The Enter Softkey will be disabled for the restricted parameters.

Page 111 of 499

5.2.2.1 Parameter Configuration
The below table will explain the available parameters and their functions.
Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Low: SP1L 100.0°C
SP1 Setpoint 1 PV
High: SP1H (212.0°F)
Low: 0
TIME Dwell Time 0.0 Minute
High: 6553.5
Range of A1SP same as
If A1FN=
the range of
PV1.H, PV1.L IN1 100.0°C
A1SP Alarm 1 Setpoint *E1
PV2.H, PV2.L IN2 (212.0°F)
P1.2 H, P1.2 L, D1.2 H,
IN1, IN2
D1.2 L

Page 112 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Low: -200.0°C
Alarm 1 Deviation (-360.0°F) 10.0°C
A1DV *E1
Value High: 200.0°C (18.0°F)
(360.0°F)
Range of A1SP same as
If A1FN=
the range of
PV1.H, PV1.L IN1 100.0°C
A2SP Alarm 2 Setpoint *E2
PV2.H, PV2.L IN2 (212.0°F)
P1.2 H, P1.2 L, D1.2 H,
IN1, IN2
D1.2 L
Low: -200.0°C
Alarm 2 Deviation (-360.0°F) 10.0°C
A2DV *E2
Value High: 200.0°C (18.0°F)
(360.0°F)
Low: 0°C
(0°F)
RAMP Ramp Rate 0.0 *E3
High: 500.0°C
(900.0°F)
Offset Value for P Low: 0
OFST 25.0 %
control High: 100.0
Low: -200.0°C
PV1 Shift (offset) (-360.0°F)
SHIF 0.0 PV1
Value High: 200.0°C
(360.0°F)
Low: 0°C
Proportional Band 1 (0°F) 10.0°C
PB1 PV
Value High: 500.0°C (18.0°F)
(900.0°F)
Integral Time 1 Low: 0
TI1 100 Sec
Value High: 1000
Derivative Time 1 Low: 0
TD1 25.0 Sec
Value High: 360.0
Cooling Low: 1
CPB Proportional Band High: 255 100 % of PB
Value
Heating-Cooling Low: -36.0
DB 0 % of PB
Dead Band High: 36.0
If PVMD= Range of SP2 same as the range of
PV1 IN1 37.8°C
SP2 Setpoint 2 PV
PV2 IN2 (100.0°F)
P1-2, P2-1 IN1, IN2
Low: 0°C
Proportional Band 2 (0°F) 10.0°C
PB2 PV
Value High: 500.0°C (18.0°F
(900.0°F)
Integral Time 2 Low: 0
TI2 100 Sec
Value High: 1000

Page 113 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Derivative Time 2 Low: 0
TD2 25.0 Sec
Value High: 360.0
Output1 ON-OFF Low: 0.1
O1HY 0.1 PV
Control Hysteresis High: 55.6°C (100.0°F)
Hysteresis Control Low: 0.1
A1HY 0.1 *E1
of Alarm1 High: 10.0°C (18.0°F)
Hysteresis Control Low: 0.1
A2HY 0.1 *E2
of Alarm2 High: 10.0°C (18.0°F)
Output 1 Power Low: 0
PL1 100 %
Limit High: 100
Output 2 Power Low: 0
PL2 100 %
Limit High: 100
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 J_TC J Type Thermocouple
1 K_TC K Type Thermocouple
2 T_TC T Type Thermocouple
3 E_TC T Type Thermocouple
4 B_TC B Type Thermocouple
5 R_TC R Type Thermocouple
6 S_TC S Type Thermocouple
7 N_TC N Type Thermocouple
8 L_TC L Type Thermocouple
PT 100 Ohms DIN
9 PT.DN
Curve
IN1 Sensor Type PT100 Ohms JIS
IN1 10 PT.JS 1 (0)
Selection Curve
4-20mA Linear
11 4-20
Current Input
0-20mA Linear
12 0-20
Current Input
0-1V Linear Voltage
13 0-1V
Input
0-5V Linear Voltage
14 0-5V
Input
1-5V Linear Voltage
15 1-5V
Input
0-10V Linear Voltage
16 0-10
Input
Special defined
17 SPEC
sensor Curve
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Degree Celsius
0 °C
Unit
IN1U IN1 Unit Selection 0 (1)
Degree Fahrenheit
1 °F
Unit

2 PU Process Unit

Page 114 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NO-DP No Decimal Digit
IN1 Decimal Point
DP1 1 1-DP One Decimal Digit 1
Selection 2 2-DP Two Decimal Digits
Three Decimal
3 3-DP
Digits
IN1 Low Scale Low: -19999
IN1L 0 *E5
Value High: 45536
IN1 High Scale Low: -19999
IN1H 1000 *E5
Value High: 45536
Low: -19999
SP1 Low Scale 0.0°C
SP1L High: 45536 PV
Value (32.0°F)

SP1 High Scale Low: -19999 1000.0°C

SP1H High: 45536 PV
Value (1832.0°F)
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NONE IN2 No Function
Current Transformer
1 CT
Input
4-20mA Linear
2 4-20
Current Input
0-20mA Linear
IN2 Signal Type 3 0-20
IN2 Current Input 1
Selection 0-1V Linear Voltage
4 0-1V
Input
0-5V Linear Voltage
5 0-5V
Input
1-5V Linear Voltage
6 1-5V
Input
0-10V Linear Voltage
7 0-10
Input
Parameter
Display Symbol Description
Value

0 °C Degree Celsius Unit

IN2U IN2 Unit Selection 2
Degree Fahrenheit
1 °F
Unit

2 PU Process Unit

Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NO-DP No Decimal Digit
IN2 Decimal Point
DP2 1 1-DP One Decimal Digit 1
Selection 2 2-DP Two Decimal Digits
Three Decimal
3 3-DP
Digits
Low: -19999
IN2L IN2 Low Scale 0 *E6
High: 45536
Value

Page 115 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
IN2 High Scale Low: -19999
IN2H 1000 *E6
Value High: 45536
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NONE Event Input No Function
SP2 Activated to replace
1 SP2
SP1
PB2, TI2, TD2 Activated to
2 PID2
replace PB1, TI1, TD1
SP2, PB2, TI2, TD2
Event Input 3 SP.P2 Activated to replace SP1,
EIFN PB1, TI1, TD1 1
Function
4 RS.A1 Reset Alarm 1 Output
5 RS.A2 Reset Alarm2 Output
Reset Alarm1 & Alarm2
6 R.A1.2
Output
7 D.O1 Disable Output1
8 D.O2 Disable Output2
9 D.O1.2 Disable Output1 &Output 2
10 LOCK Lock All Parameters
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Reverse
OUT1 Output 1 Function 0 REVR
(Heating)Control Action 0
Direct (Cooling) Control
1 DIRT
Action
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 RELY Relay Output
Solid State Relay
1 SSRD
Drive Output
Solid State Relay
2 SSR
Output
Output 1 Signal
O1TY 3 4-20
4-20mA Current 0
Type Module
0-20mA Current
4 0-20
Module
5 0-1V 0-1V Voltage Module
6 0-5V 0-5V Voltage Module
7 1-5V 1-5V Voltage Module
8 0-10 0-10V Voltage Module
Output 1 Cycle Low: 0.1
CYC1 18.0 Sec
Time High: 100.0
Select BPLS (Bumpless transfer) or 0.0 ~
100.0
Output 1 Failure
O1FT % to continue output 1 control function as the BPLS %
Transfer Mode
unit
fails, power starts or manual mode starts.

Page 116 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NONE No function
OUT2 Output 2 Function 0
1 COOL PID Cooling Action
DC Power supply
3 DCPS
module installed
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 RELY Relay Output
Solid State Relay
1 SSRD
Drive Output
Solid State Relay
2 SSR
Output
Output 2 Signal
O2TY 3 4-20
4-20mA Current 0
Type Module
0-20mA Current
4 0-20
Module
5 0-1V 0-1V Voltage Module
6 0-5V 0-5V Voltage Module
7 1-5V 1-5V Voltage Module
8 0-10 0-10V Voltage Module
Output 2 Cycle Low: 0.1
CYC2 18.0 Sec
Time High: 100.0
Select BPLS (Bumpless transfer) or 0.0 ~
Output 2 Failure 100.0 % to continue output 1 control function
O2FT BPLS %
Transfer Mode as the unit fails, power starts or manual mode
starts.

Page 117 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NONE No alarm function
1 TIMR Dwell timer action
2 DE.HI Deviation high alarm
3 DE.LO Deviation low alarm
Deviation band out of
4 DB.HI
band alarm
Deviation band in band
5 DB.LO
alarm
IN1 process value high
6 PV1.H
alarm
IN1 process value low
7 PV1.L
alarm
IN2 process value high
A1FN Alarm 1 Function 8 PV2.H
alarm
2
IN2 process value low
9 PV2.L
alarm
IN1 or IN2 process
10 P1.2.H
value high alarm
IN1 or IN2 process
11 P1.2.L
value low alarm
IN1 IN2 difference
12 D1.2.H process value high
alarm
IN1 IN2 difference
13 D1.2.L
process value low alarm
14 LB Loop break alarm
Sensor break or A-D
15 SEN.B
fails
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NORM Normal alarm action
Alarm 1 Operation
A1MD Latching alarm 0
Mode 1 LTCH
action
2 HOLD Hold alarm action
Latching & Hold
3 LT.HO
action
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Alarm Output OFF as
Alarm 1 Failure 0 OFF
unit Fails 1
A1FT
Transfer Mode
Alarm Output ON as
1 ON
unit Fails

Page 118 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NONE No alarm function
1 TIMR Dwell timer action
2 DE.HI Deviation high alarm
3 DE.LO Deviation low alarm
Deviation band out of
4 DB.HI
band alarm
Deviation band in band
5 DB.LO
alarm
IN1 process value high
6 PV1.H
alarm
IN1 process value low
7 PV1.L
alarm
IN2 process value high
A2FN Alarm 2 Function 8 PV2.H
alarm
2
IN2 process value low
9 PV2.L
alarm
IN1 or IN2 process
10 P1.2.H
value high alarm
IN1 or IN2 process
11 P1.2.L
value low alarm
IN1 IN2 difference
12 D1.2.H process value high
alarm
IN1 IN2 difference
13 D1.2.L
process value low alarm
14 LB Loop break alarm
Sensor break or A-D
15 SEN.B
fails
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 NORM Normal alarm action
Alarm 2 Operation Latching alarm
A2MD 1 LTCH
action 0
Mode
2 HOLD Hold alarm action
Latching & Hold
3 LT.HO
action
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Alarm 2 Failure Alarm Output OFF as
A2FT 0 OFF
unit Fails 1
Transfer Mode
Alarm Output ON as
1 ON
unit Fails
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Self-Tune Function Auto tuning (Self Tune)
SELF 0 NONE
Function disabled 0
Selection
Auto tuning (Self Tune)
1 YES
Function Enabled

Page 119 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Sleep mode Sleep Mode Function
SLEP 0 NONE
disabled 0
Function Selection
Sleep Mode Function
1 YES
Enabled
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Use PV1 as Process
0 PV1
Value
Use PV2 as Process
1 PV2
Value
PVMD PV Mode Selection Use PV1-PV2
0
2 P1-2 Difference as Process
Value
Use PV2-PV1
3 P2-1 Difference as Process
Value
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Format of Setpoint Setpoint2 (SP2) is an
SP2F 0 ACTU
Actual Value
0
2 Value
Setpoint2 (SP2) is a
1 DEVI
Deviation Value
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
0 second time
0 0
constant
0.2 second time
1 0.2
constant
0.5 second time
2 0.5
constant
1 second time
3 1
Filter Damping constant
2 seconds time
FILT Time Constant of 4 2
constant
2
PV 5 seconds time
5 5
constant
10 seconds time
6 10
constant
20 seconds time
7 20
constant
30 seconds time
8 30
constant
60 seconds time
9 60
constant

Page 120 of 499

Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Use SP1 or SP2
0 SP1.2 (depends on EIFN) as
setpoint
Use minute ramp rate as
1 MIN.R
setpoint
Setpoint Mode
SPMD 2 HR.R
Use hour ramp rate as 0
Selection setpoint
Use IN1 process value
3 PV1
as setpoint
Use IN2 process value
4 PV2
as setpoint
Selected for pump
5 PUMP
control
Historical Error Low: 0
ERR1 0
Record 1 High: 65535
Historical Error Low: 0
ERR2 0
Record 2 High: 65535
OUT1 Bumpless Low: 0.00
BPL1 %
Transfer Value High: 100.00
OUT2 Bumpless Low: 0.00
BPL2 %
Transfer Value High: 100.00
Parameter Display
Description
Value Symbol
Default File Perform Default Setting
FILE 0 0
by using °C File
Selection
Perform Default Setting
1 1
by using °F File
Current Process Low: -19999
PV PV
Value High: 45536
Current setpoint Low: -19999
SV PV
Value High: 45536
Current Output 1 Low: -0.00
MV1 %
Value High: 100.00
Current Output 2 Low: -0.00
MV2 %
Value High: 100.00
Contains Refer Note B33
Conditional Code
ALM of parameters
Resolution and
Current Alarm
Status
Current Deviation Low: -12600
DV PV
(PV-SV) Value High: 12600
Low: -19999
PV1 IN1 Process Value *E5
High: 45536
Low: -19999
PV2 IN2 Process Value *E6
High: 45536

Page 121 of 499

 Parameter Parameter Range*B Default Unit*E
Notation Description Value
Current Low: 0
PB Proportional Band High: 500.0°C PV
Value (900.0°F)
Current Integral Low: 0
TI Time High: 4000 Sec
Value
Current Derivative Low: 0
TD Time High: 1440 Sec
Value
EROR Current Error Code Refer Note B34
Parameter
Product
Program Value
BTC-4300 controller & PID Process
Identification 4.XX
Control card of PR
Code
Contains
PROG
Program
Number and
Version
Number
Parameter Value Description
X.0 Perform normal mode
X.1 Enter calibration mode
Contains X.2 Enter auto-tuning mode
Lockout X.3 Enter failure mode
MODE Status code X.4 Enter manual mode
and Current X.5 Enter sleep mode
system mode 0.X Unlock condition
1.X SP1, SEL1 SEL5 are unlocked
2.X Lock all parameters except SP1
3.X All parameters are locked
Cold Junction Low: -40.0°C
CJCT Compensatio High: 90.0°C °C
n
Temperature
Current Process Low: -16383
PVR Rate High: 16383 PV/min
Value
Maximum Process Low: -16383
PVRH PV/min
Rate Value High: 16383
Minimum Process Low: -16383
PVRL PV/min
Rate Value High: 16383
Current Target Low: -19999
SPC Value of High: 45536 PV
setpoint

Notes
*B: The ranges of some parameters are dependent on the input types. The range of IN1 and IN2 for various
input type is shown in the following table

Page 122 of 499

 Input Type Range Low Rang High
J_T/C -120°C(-184°F) 1000°C(1832°F)
K_T/C -200°C(-328°F) 1370°C(2498°F)
T_T/C -250°C(-418°F) 400°C(752°F)
E_T/C -100°C(-148°F) 900°C(1652°F)
B_T/C 0°C(32°F) 1820°C(3308°F)
R_T/C 0°C(32°F) 1767.8°C(3214°F)
S_T/C 0°C(32°F) 1767.8°C(3214°F)
N_T/C -250°C(-418°F) 1300°C(2372°F)
L_T/C -200°C(-328°F) 900°C(1652°F)
PT100_DN -210°C(-346°F) 700°C(1292°F)
PT100_JS -210°C(-346°F) 600°C(1112°F)
CT 0 Amps 90 Amps
Linear (mA or Voltage) -19999 45536
5-1 PID Process Control Card Input Types

*B33: Description of Alarm Value

MSB LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
=BIN2K
If BIN2= 8~18, then
BIN2K=00
If BIN2=1, then BIN2K=01 =ALMK
If BIN2=19, 21, 22, 23 then =00: No Alarm
BIN2K=10 activated
Otherwise, BIN2K=11 =01: Alarm 1
activated
=10: Alarm 2
activated
=BIN1K
If BIN1<11, then BIN1K=00 =11: Alarm 1 &
If 11≤ BIN1<17, then alarm 2 activated
BIN1K=01
Otherwise, BIN1K=10
=A1FNK
If A1FN = 8, 9 then
=DP2K=DP2 A1FNK = 0
Otherwise A1FNK = 1

=DP1K=DP1

=0 =A2FNK
If A2FN = 8, 9 then
A2FNK = 0
=BPVMDK Otherwise A2FNK = 1
If BPVMD=1 then
BPVMDK=0
Otherwise BPVMDK=1 =AOFNK
If AOFN = 0, 2, 3 then
AOFNK = 00
If AOFN = 1 then
AOFNK = 01
If AOFN = 4, 7 then
AOFNK = 10
If AOFN = 5, 6 then
AOFNK =11
Page 123 of 499
*B34: Error Messages

Error Display
Error Description Corrective Action
Code Symbol
Illegal setup values used: PV1 is used Check and correct setup values of PVMD
1 Er 01 for both PVMD and SPMD that is and SPMD, PV and SV can't use the same
meaningless for control. value for normal control
Illegal setup values used: PV2 is used
2 Er 02 for both PVMD and SPMD that is Same as error code1
meaningless for control
Illegal setup values used: P1-2 or P2-1 Check and correct setup values of PVMD
is used for PVMD while PV1 or PV2 is and SPMD.
3 Er 03 used for SPMD. Dependent values are The difference between PV1 and PV2 can't
used for PV and SV will produce the be used for PV while PV1 or PV2
incorrect result of control is used for SV
Check and correct setup values of OUT2,
Illegal setup values used: COOL is PB1, PB2, TI1, TI2 and OUT1. IF OUT2 is
used for OUT2, but DIRT (cooling required for cooling control, the control
4 Er 04 action) is already used for OUT1 or should use PID mode (PB = 0, TI = 0) and
PID mode is not used for OUT1 (that is OUT1 should use reverse mode (heating
PB1 or PB2 =0, and TI1 or TI2 =0) action), otherwise, don't use OUT2 for
cooling control
Illegal setup values used: unequal
Check and correct setup values of IN1U
IN1U and IN2U or unequal DP1 and
, IN2U, DP1, DP2, PVMD, SPMD, A1FN or
DP2 while P1-2 or P2-1 is used for
5 Er 05 A2FN. Same unit and decimal point
PVMD or, PV1 or PV2 is used for
Should be used if both PV1 and PV2 are
SPMD or, P1.2.H, P1.2.L, D1.2.H or
used for PV, SV, alarm1 or alarm 2.
D1.2.L is used for A1FN or A2FN.
Check and correct setup values of OUT2
Illegal setup values used: OUT2 select
6 Er 06 and A2FN. OUT2 will not perform alarm
=AL2 but A2FN select NONE
function if A2FN select NONE.
Illegal setup values used: Dwell timer Check and correct setup values of A1FN
7 Er 07 (TIMR) is selected for both A1FN and and A2FN. Dwell timer can only be properly
A2FN. used for single alarm output.
1.Correct the communication software to
meet the protocol requirements
Communication error: receive an error
2. Add a terminating resistor to the multi-
due to parity error, framing error,
drop link (RS-485) to minimize the noise.
9 Er 09 overrun error, receive buffer full error,
3. Use twisted-pair wire for RS-485 interface
frame check-sum error or receive
connection to minimize the noise.
disturbed
4. Check the polarity of RS-485 interface
connection.
Communication error: bad function Correct the communication software to meet
10 Er 10
code the protocol requirements.
Communication error: register address Don't issue an over-range address of the
11 Er 11
out of range register to the slave.
Communication error: access a non- Don't issue a non- existent parameter to the
12 Er 12
existent parameter slave.

Page 124 of 499

Error Display
Error Description Corrective Action
Code Symbol
Communication error: attempt to write Don't write read-only data or protected data
14 Er 14
a read-only data to the slave.
Communication error: write a value Don't write an over-range data to the slave
15 Er 15
which is out of range to a register register.
Computing error: Illegal (abnormal)
17 Er 17 Software bug. Return to factory for repair.
floating-point data
Computing error: Arithmetic result
18 Er 18 Software bug. Return to factory for repair.
overflow or underflow
Don't use an equal value for AOLO and
19 Er 19 Computing error: divided by zero
AOHI.
Computing error: Illegal BCD data
20 Er 20 Software bug. Return to factory for repair.
entry
Timing error: A to D conversion data A to D converter doesn't work properly.
21 Er 21
error due to overrun Return to factory for repair.
Timing error: check-sum error received 1. Correct the multi-chip communication
22 Er 22 during multi-chip communication software to meet the protocol requirement.
procedure 2. Return to factory for repair.
Timing error: wrong function code 1. Correct the multi-chip communication
23 Er 23 received during multi-chip software to meet the protocol requirement.
communication procedure 2. Return to factory for Repair.
1. The PID values obtained after the auto-
tuning procedure are out of range. Retry
auto-tuning.
2. Don’t change setpoint value during the
26 AtEr Fail to perform
auto-tuning procedure.
the auto-tuning function
3. Don’t change Event input state during the
auto-tuning procedure.
4. Use manual tuning Instead of auto-tuning.
Incorrect calibration procedure or 1. Pay more attention to the calibration
27 CAER tolerance of analog component too big procedures.
to meet the specified accuracy 2. Return to factory for repair.
1. Check and correct the wiring and
Memory comparison error, the different
grounding problems to minimize the system
28 CAPE value detected in the EEPROM and
noise.
mapped RAM
2. Return to factory for repair.
29 EEPE EEPROM can't be written correctly Return to factory for repair.
Cold junction compensation device(s)
32 CJER Return to factory for repair.
malfunction
Key switch shorted or related PCB
33 YYER Return to factory for repair.
circuit shorted
1. Check if the input 2 sensor used is
accordant with IN2 type selection.
34 LLL2 Input 2 (IN2) signal too low 2. Check the connection polarity of input 2
sensor.
3. Replace input 2 sensor.

Page 125 of 499

 Error Display
Error Description Corrective Action
Code Symbol
1. Check if the input 2 sensor used is
35 HHH2 Input 2 (IN2) signal too high accordant with IN2 type selection.
2. Replace input 2 sensor.
1. Check if the input 1 sensor used is
accordant with IN1 type selection.
36 LLL1 Input 1 (IN1) signal too low 2. Check the connection polarity of input 1
sensor.
3. Replace input 1 sensor.
1. Check if the input 1 sensor used is
37 HHH1 Input 1 (IN1) signal too high accordant with IN1 type selection.
2. Replace input 1 Sensor.
Input 2 (IN2) sensor break, or input 2
current below 1 mA if 4-20 mA is
38 SB2E Replace input 2 sensor.
selected, or input2 voltage below
0.25V if 1 - 5V is selected
Input 1 (IN1) sensor break, or input 1
current below 1 mA if 4-20 mA is
39 SB1E Replace input 1 sensor.
selected, or input1 voltage below
0.25V if 1 - 5V is selected
A to D converter or related
40 ADER Return to factory for repair.
component(s) malfunction
5-2 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
*C: The Parameters are pre-set with the default values specified in the table.
*E: The unit PV means that the unit of the parameter is the same as the unit of PV (process value). The unit
of PV is determined by PVMD, IN1, IN2, IN1U, and IN2U.

*E1: Unit determination for A1SP, A1DV and A1HY

If A1FN= Range of A1SP same as the range of
DE.HI,DE.LO,DB.HI,DB.LO PV
PV1.H, PV1.L PV1
PV2.H,PV.L PV2
P1.2.H, P1.2.L, D1.2.H, D1.2. L PV1, PV2
5-3 Unit Determination for A1SP, A1DV, A1HY
*E2: Unit determination for A2SP, A2DV and A2HY
If A2FN= Range of A2SP same as the range of
DE.HI,DE.LO,DB.HI,DB.LO PV
PV1.H, PV1.L PV1
PV2.H, PV.L PV2
P1.2.H, P1.2.L, D1.2.H, D1.2.L PV1, PV2
5-4 Unit Determination for A2SP, A2DV, A2HY
*E3: Unit determination for Ramp
If SPMD= Unit
MIN.R PV/Minute
HR.R PV/Hour
5-5 Ramp Unit

Page 126 of 499

*E4: Unit determination for AOLO and AOHI
If AOFN= Same Unit as Unit of
PV1 PV1
PV2 PV2
P1-2, P2-1 PV1, PV2
SV PV
MV1, MV2 %
5-6 Unit Determination of AOLO & AOHI
*E5: Unit is the same as the unit of PV1 (IN1)
*E6: Unit is the same as the unit of PV2 (IN2)

5.2.2.1.1 Default
This will allow the user to load the default values of the Process Control Card Parameters

5.2.3 Channel
The Channel will allow the user to configure the channels to be logged in the recorder from PID
process control card. Press Channel and then press Enter Softkey to access the Channel parameter of
Process Control Card.

After entering the Configuration menu, in the Channel, select Controller then Press the Enter
softkey to get into Controller Channel configuration menu. After entering particular controller configuration
menu then selects channel then press Enter to enter into the controller channel configuration menu. It
displays the Controller C1 channel C1-1(C1_PV) as the first Controller channel configuration page. Press
directional navigation keys at the bottom to select other channels. Press directional keys

on the right-hand side to select the column. After completing Configuration, press

softkey, then press softkey and then press softkey to return to the main display. All
configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 127 of 499

 There are five channels available for every PID Process control card for logging. They are listed
as below.
1. C1_PV – Process Value
2. C1_SV- Set Value
3. C1_ALM - Alarm
4. C1_EROR - Error
5. C1_ProfileERROR – Profile Error
Similar to C1 PID Process control card C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8 PID process control card
parameters also available depends on the recorder model no and their connection on the recorder

5.2.3.1 Name
Enables the user to define the name for each channel with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new channel
name.

5.2.3.2 Desc
The description of a specific channel on the recorder.

5.2.3.3 Type
Option available to enable or disable the channel

5.2.3.4 Source
There are five parameters from each PID process control cards are available as source logging.
They are listed as below
1. PV – Process Value
2. SV- Set Value
3. ALM - Alarm
4. EROR - Error
5. ProfileERROR – Profile Error
The first channel of every PID Process control card will always show PV as the source. Similar to this SV,
ALM, EROR and ProfileERROR are available as source in second, third, fourth and fifth channels of every
PID Process control card. The source can’t be changed by the user. The user can only enable or disable the
channel from the logging. These parameters can be logged to the recorder by enabling those channels in
the type. By using the Key to switch between Channels.

5.2.3.5 Log

5.2.3.5.1 Data Type

The data type for logging is 2 bytes.
2-byte range: -32767 to +32767

5.2.3.5.2 Trigger
Two options are available for the user to select.
1. Disable: Select disable while the recording of a specific channel is not required at this time
2. Enable: Select enable while the recording of a specific channel is required at this time

Page 128 of 499

5.2.3.5.3 Method
This is the method of logging measured data. Select the column Method and press Enter. Then
choose the required Log method from the available methods Instant, Average, Minimum or Maximum of
data.

5.2.3.5.3.1 Instant
Logging the last measured data at the logging interval

5.2.3.5.3.2 Average
Logging the averaged of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.2.3.5.3.3 Minimum
Logging the minimum of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.2.3.5.3.4 Maximum
Logging the maximum of sampled measured data at the logging interval

5.2.3.5.4 Speed
It is the logging speed (recording speed) of measured data. The available log speeds are as
below.
1. 100 msec/dot
2. 1 Sec/dot
3. 2 Sec/dot
4. 5 Sec/dot
5. 10 Sec/dot
6. 15 Sec/dot
7. 20 Sec/dot
8. 30 Sec/dot
9. 1 min/dot
10. 2 min/dot
11. 5 min/dot
12. 15 min/dot
13. 1 hour/dot
14. 2 hour/dot

5.2.3.6 Modbus
The scaling of the channel value in Modbus communication.

5.2.3.7 Events
Events are frequently used for Alarm purposes. The events can be used to operate digital
outputs (DO), Timer, Totalizer, Counter or Report. There is a maximum of five events can be added to each
analog input.
Press “Add” to add new event and Press “Remove” to remove selected event

Page 129 of 499

5.2.3.7.1 Type
There are various types of events are available for the user to select for job or alarm purpose.
They are listed as below.

5.2.3.7.1.1 H
It is a high event. When the process value is higher than the high limit, then the alarm or job
associated with this event is actuated.

5.2.3.7.1.2 L
It is a low event. When the process value is lower than the low limit, then the alarm or job
associated with this event is actuated.

5.2.3.7.1.3 HH
It is a high high event. When the process value is higher than the high high limit, then the alarm
or job associated with this event is actuated. This is another limit higher than the high limit for double
warning.

5.2.3.7.1.4 LL
It is a low low event. When the process value is lower than the low low limit, then the alarm or
job associated with this event is actuated. This is another limit lower than the low limit for double warning.

5.2.3.7.1.5 Dev+
It is a deviation+ event. This event will be triggered by the positive deviation of the process
value. The job or alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value higher than setpoint
from the previous process value.

For example,
Setpoint =10
At 10.00.01 Hrs, Tag1=40
At 10.00.02 Hrs, Tag1 = 51
Then, job or alarm is activated

5.2.3.7.1.6 Dev-
It is a deviation- event. This event will be triggered by the negative deviation of the process value. The job or
alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value lower than the setpoint from the previous
process value.
For example,
Setpoint =10
At 10.00.01 Hrs, Tag1=40
At 10.00.02 Hrs, Tag1 = 29
Then, job or alarm is activated.

Page 130 of 499

5.2.3.7.1.7 Error
It is an error event. This event will be activated when there is an error on the input of the
channel.

5.2.3.7.2 Setpoint
Setpoint for the event.

5.2.3.7.2.1 Hysteresis
To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, Hysteresis value can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint.

5.2.3.7.2.2 Holding time

To avoid the alarm or event been activated too often, the holding time can be defined for the
event trigger setpoint. In the process sometimes SP is reached but it will go down immediately, this might
due to process instability. To avoid this kind of nuisance situations, the holding time can be used to see that
PV stays at above that SP more than the holding time and then only activate the action for that event. The
range of holding time can be set from 1 min to 60 min.

5.2.3.7.3 Log
The event can be logged as an alarm or event. They can be selected from the available options.
They are as below.

5.2.3.7.3.1 Log Alarm

Log the event as Alarm.

5.2.3.7.3.2 Log Alarm (Auto Ack)

Log the event as alarms and acknowledge automatically

5.2.3.7.3.3 Log Event

Log as event

5.2.3.7.4 Job1 & Job2

The job is called as a task to be performed when the event is activated. There are two jobs Job1
and Job2 can be added to perform in any event.
A typical example is to trigger an alarm buzzer in the event of high temperature. Each channel
can accept five different types of events (or alarms) and each event can create two jobs. Please note that a
job under Event is different from a job performed by Operate key. The job is actuated by an event, and the
Operate is actuated by manual control, no event necessary.
Note: Please refer to the section Jobs for full details about various jobs available
Note: Number of controller channels shown on the controller screen depends on the number of PID
process control cards inserted in the paperless recorder.

5.2.4 Configuration of Process Control Card

5.2.4.1 Heat Only ON-OFF Control

Select REVR for OUT1, Set PB1 to 0, SP1 is used to adjust setpoint value, O1HY is used to
adjust the dead band for ON-OFF control, and TIME is used to adjust the dwell timer (enabled by selecting
TIMR for A1FN or A2FN). The output 1 hysteresis (O1HY) is enabled in case of PB1 = 0. The heat only on-
off control function is shown in the following diagram.

Page 131 of 499

 The ON-OFF control may introduce excessive process oscillation even if Hysteresis is minimized
to the smallest. If ON-OFF control is set (i.e. PB1 = 0), TI1, TD1, CYC1, OFST, CPB and PL1 will be hidden
and have no function to the system. The manual mode, auto-tuning, self-tuning and Bumpless transfer will
be disabled too.
Select REVR for OUT1, set TI1 to 0, SP1 is used to adjust setpoint value; TIME is used to adjust
the dwell timer (enabled by selecting TIMR for A1FN or A2FN). OFST has been enabled in case of TI1 = 0
is used to adjust the controlled offset (manual reset). Adjust CYC1 according to the output 1 type (O1TY).
Generally, CYC1= 0.5 ~ 2 sec for SSRD and SSR, CYC1=10 ~ 20 sec for relay output. CYC1 is ignored if
the linear output is selected for O1TY. If PB1 is not equal to 0.
OFST is measured by % with range 0 - 100.0 %. In the steady-state (i.e. process has been
stabilized) if the process value is lower than the setpoint a definite value, say 5 C, while 20 C is used for
PB1, that is lower 25 %, then increase OFST 25 % and vice versa. After adjusting the OFST value, the
process value will be varied and eventually, coincide with the setpoint.
Using the P control (TI1 set to 0), the auto-tuning and self-tuning are disabled. Manual reset
(adjust OFST) is not practical because the load may change from time to time and often need to adjust
OFST repeatedly. PID control can avoid this situation. Selecting REVR for OUT1, SP1 is used to adjust
setpoint value.
TIME is used to adjust the dwell timer (enabled by selecting TIMR for A1FN or A2FN). PB1 and
TI1 should not be zero. Adjust CYC1 according to the output 1 type (O1TY). Generally, CYC1 = 0.5 ~ 2 sec
for SSRD and SSR, CYC1 = 10 ~ 20 sec for relay output. CYC1 is ignored if the linear output is selected for
O1TY.
In most cases, the self-tuning can be used to substitute the auto-tuning. See If self-tuning is not
used (select NONE for SELF), then use auto-tuning for the new process, or set PB1, TI1 and TD1 with
historical values. If the control result is still unsatisfactory, then use manual tuning to improve the control.
This Process Control Card contains a very clever PID and Fuzzy algorithm to achieve a very small
overshoot and very quick response to the process if it is properly tuned.

5.2.4.2 Cool Only ON-OFF Control

ON-OFF control, P (PD) control and PID control can be used for cool control. Set OUT1 to DIRT
(direct action). The other functions for cool only ON-OFF control, cool only P(PD) control and cool only PID
control are same as Heat only ON-OFF Control except that the output variable (and action) for the cool
control is inverse to the heat control, such as the following diagram shows:

Page 132 of 499

5.2.4.3 Heat Cool Control
The Heat-Cool Control can use one of 6 combinations of control modes. Setups of Parameters
for each control mode are shown in the following table.

Note
The ON-OFF control may result in excessive overshoot and undershoot problems in the
process. The P (or PD) control will result in a deviation process value from the setpoint. It is recommended
to use PID control for the Heat-Cool control to produce a stable and zero offset process value.
Other Setup Required
O1TY, CYC1, O2TY, CYC2, A2SP, A2DV, O1TY & O2TY are set in accordance with the types
of OUT1 & OUT2 installed. CYC1 & CYC2 are selected according to the output 1 type (O1TY) & output 2
type (O2TY). Generally, selects 0.5 ~ 2 sec. for CYC1, if SSRD or SSR is used for O1TY; 10 ~ 20 sec. if the
relay is used for O1TY, and CYC1 is ignored if the linear output is used. A similar condition is applied for
CYC2 selection.
Examples
Heat PID+Cool ON-OFF: Set OUT1= REVR, A1FN or A2FN= PV1.H, A1FN or A2MD=NORM,
A1HY or A2HY=0.1, PB1=0, TI1=0, TD1=0, and set appropriate values for O1TY and CYC1.
Heat PID+Cool PID: set OUT1=REVR, OUT2=COOL, CPB=100, DB=-4.0, PB1=0, TI1=0,
TD1=0, and set appropriate values for O1TY, CYC1, O2TY, and CYC2.

Page 133 of 499

CPB Programming
The cooling proportional band is measured by % of PB with range 1~255. Initially set 100% for
CPB and examine the cooling effect. If cooling action should be enhanced then decrease CPB. If cooling
action is too strong then increase CPB. The value of CPB is related to PB and its value remains unchanged
throughout the self-tuning and auto-tuning procedures.
Adjustment of CPB is related to the cooling media used. For air is used as cooling media, adjust
CPB at 100(%). For oil is used as cooling media, adjust CPB at 125(%). For water is used as cooling media,
adjust CPB at 250(%)
DB Programming
Adjustment of DB is dependent on the system requirements. If the more positive value of DB
(greater dead band) is used, an unwanted cooling action can be avoided but an excessive overshoot over
the setpoint will occur. If the more negative value of DB (greater overlap) is used, an excessive overshoot
over the setpoint can be minimized but an unwanted cooling action will occur. It is adjustable in the range -
36.0% to 36.0 % of PB1 (or PB2 if PB2 is selected). A negative DB value shows an overlap area over which
both outputs are active. A positive DB value shows a dead band area over which neither output is active

5.2.4.4 Heater Break Alarm

A current transformer CT94-1 should be installed to detect the heater current if a heater break
alarm is required. The CT signal is sent to input 2, and the PV2 will indicate the heater current is 0.1 Amp.
Resolution. The range of the current transformer is 0 to 50.0 Amps.
Example
A furnace uses two 2KW heaters connected in parallel to warm up the process. The line voltage
is 220V and the rating current for each heater is 9.09A. If we want to detect anyone heater break, set
A1SP=13.0A, A1HY=0.1 A1FN=PV2.L, A1MD=NORM, then

5.2.4.5 Loop Break Alarm

A1FN selects LB if alarm 1 is required to act as a loop break alarm. Similarly, if alarm 2 is
required to act as a loop break alarm, then set OUT2 with=AL2 and A1FN with LB. TIME, A1SP, A1DV and
A1HY are hidden if alarm 1 is configured as a loop break alarm. Similarly, TIME, A2SP, A2DV and A2HY
are hidden if alarm 2 is configured as a loop break alarm.
One of 4 kinds of alarm modes can be selected for alarm 1 and alarm 2. These are Normal
alarm, latching alarm, holding alarm and Latching/Holding alarm. However, the Holding mode and
latching/Holding mode are not recommended to be chosen for loop break alarm since loop break alarm will
not perform holding function even if it is set with holding or latching/holding mode.
Loop Break Conditions are detected during a time interval of 2TI1 (double of integral time, but
120 seconds maximum). Hence the loop break alarm doesn't respond quickly as it occurs. If the process
value doesn't increase (or decrease) while the control variable MV1 has reached to it's a maximum (or
minimum) value within the detecting time interval, a loop break alarm (if configured) will be actuated.
Loop Break Alarm (if configured) occurs when any of the following condition happens
1 Input sensor is disconnected (or broken).
2 Input sensor is shorted.

Page 134 of 499

 3 Input sensor is defective.
4 Input sensor is installed outside (isolated from) the process.
5 Controller fails (A-D converter damaged).
6 Heater (or generally, chillers, valve, pump, motor etc.) breaks or fails or uninstalled
7 Switching device (used to drive heater) is open or shorted.

5.2.4.6 Sensor Break Alarm

Alarm 1 or alarm 2 can be configured as sensor break alarm by selecting SENB for A1FN or
A2FN. The sensor break alarm is activated as soon as the failure mode occurs. Note that A-D failure also
creates a sensor break alarm. TIME, A1SP, A1DV, and A1HY are hidden if alarm 1 is configured as a
sensor break alarm. Similarly, TIME, A2SP, A2DV and A2HY are hidden if alarm 2 is configured as a sensor
break alarm.
One of 4 kinds of alarm modes can be selected for sensor break alarm. These are Normal
alarm, latching alarm, holding alarm and Latching/Holding alarm. However, the Holding alarm and
Latching/Holding alarm are not recommended to be chosen for sensor break alarm since sensor break
alarm will not perform holding function even if it is set with holding or latching/holding mode.

5.2.4.7 Failure Transfer

The controller will enter failure mode as one of the following conditions occurs.
1 SB1E Error occurs (due to the input 1 sensor break or input 1 current below 1mA, if 4-
20mA is selected or input 1 voltage below 0.25V if 1-5 V is selected) if PV1, P1-2 or P2-
1 is selected for PVMD or PV1 is selected for SPMD.
2 SB2E Error occurs (due to the input 2 sensor break or input 2 current below 1mA, if 4-
20 mA is selected or input 2 voltage below 0.25V if 1-5 V is selected) if PV2, P1-2 or P2-
1 is selected for PVMD or PV2 is selected for SPMD.
3 ADER error occurs due to the A-D converter of the controller fails.
Output 1 and output 2 will perform the failure transfer function as one of the following conditions occurs.
1 During power starts (within 2.5 seconds).
2 The controller enters the failure mode.
3 The controller enters the manual mode.
4 The controller enters the calibration mode.

Output 1 Failure Transfer, if activated, will perform

1 If output 1 is configured as proportional control (PB1≠0), and BPLS selected for O1FT,
then output 1 will perform Bumpless transfer. Thereafter the previous averaging value of
MV1 will be used for controlling output 1.
2 If output 1 is configured as proportional control (PB1 ≠ 0), and a value of 0 to 100.0 %
is set for O1FT, then output 1 will perform failure transfer. Thereafter the value of O1FT
will be used for controlling output 1.
3 If output 1 is configured as ON-OFF control (PB1 = 0), then output 1 will be driven OFF
if O1FN selects REVR and be driven ON if O1FN selects DIRT.
4 If output 1 is configured as ON-OFF control (PB1=0), then output 1 will be driven OFF if
O1FN selects REVR and be driven ON if O1FN selects DIRT.
Output 2 Failure Transfer, if activated, will perform
1 If OUT2 selects COOL, and BPLS is selected for O1FT, then output 2 will perform
Bumpless transfer. Thereafter the previous averaging value of MV2 will be used for
controlling output 2.
2 If OUT2 selects COOL, and a value of 0 to 100.0 % is set for O2FT, then output 2 will

Page 135 of 499

 perform failure transfer. Thereafter the value of O2FT will be used for controlling output
2.
Alarm 1 Failure Transfer is activated as the controller enters failure mode. Thereafter the alarm 1 will
transfer to the ON or OFF state pre-set by A1FT.
Exception
If Loop Break (LB) alarm or sensor Break (SENB) alarm is configured for A1FN, the alarm 1 will
be switched to ON state independent of the setting of A1FT. If Dwell Timer (TIMR) is configured for A1FN,
the alarm 1 will not perform failure transfer.
Alarm 2 Failure Transfer is activated as the controller enters failure mode. Thereafter the alarm 2 will
transfer to the ON or OFF state pre-set by A2FT. Alarm 2 Failure Transfer is activated as the controller
enters failure mode.
Exception
If Loop Break (LB) alarm or sensor Break (SENB) alarm is configured for A2FN, the alarm 2 will
be switched to ON state independent of the setting of A2FT. If Dwell Timer (TIMR) is configured for A2FN,
the alarm 2 will not perform failure transfer.

5.2.4.8 Bumpless Transfer

The Bumpless transfer function is available for output 1 and output 2 (provided that OUT2 is
configured as COOL). Bumpless Transfer is enabled by selecting BPLS for O1FT and/or O2FT and
activated as one of the following cases occurs.
1 Power starts (within 2.5 seconds).
2 The controller enters the failure mode.
3 The controller enters the manual mode.
4 The controller enters the calibration mode.
As the Bumpless transfer is activated, the controller will transfer to open-loop control and uses
the previous averaging value of MV1 and MV2 to continue control.

5.2.4.8.1 Without Bumpless Transfer

Since the hardware and software need time to be initialized, the control is abnormal as the
power is recovered and results in a large disturbance to the process. During the sensor breaks, the process
loses power.

5.2.4.8.2 With Bumpless Transfer

After Bumpless transfer is configured with the correct control variables applied, the disturbance
is small when the power is recovered. During the sensor breaks, the controller continues to control by using
its previous value. If the load doesn't change, the process will remain stable. Thereafter, once the load
changes, the process may run away. Therefore, the user should not rely on a Bumpless transfer for a longer
time. For the fail-safe reason, an additional alarm should be used to announce the operator when the
system fails. For, a Sensor Break Alarm, if configured, will switch to failure state and announces the
operator to use manual control or take a proper security action when the system enters failure mode.

Page 136 of 499

Warning: After the system fails, never depend on Bumpless transfer for a long time; otherwise it
might cause a problem to the system to run away.

5.2.4.9 PV1 Shift

In certain applications, it is desirable to shift the controller display value from its actual value.
This can be easily accomplished by using the PV1 shift function. Press the “scroll " key to the parameter
SHIF in card parameter. The value you adjust here, either positive or negative, will be added to the actual
value. The SHIF function will alter PV1 only.
Here is an example. A process is equipped with a heater, a sensor and a subject to be warmed
up. Due to the design and position of the components in the system, the sensor could not be placed any
closer to the part. Thermal gradient (different temperature) is common and necessary to an extent in any
thermal system for heat to be transferred from one point to another. If the difference between the sensor
and the subject is 35 C, and the desired temperature at the subject to be heated is 200 C, the controlling
value or the temperature at the sensor should be 235 C. You should input -35 C as to subtract 35 C from
the actual process display. This, in turn, will cause the controller to energize the load and bring the process
display up to the setpoint value

5.2.4.10 SP1 Range

SP1L (SP1 low limit value) and SP1H (SP1 high limit value) in the setup menu is used to confine
the adjustment range of SP1.
Example: A freezer is working in its normal temperature range -10°C to -15°C. In order to avoid an
abnormal setpoint, SP1L and SP1H are set with the following values: SP1L = -15°C SP1H = -10°C
Now SP1 can only be adjusted within the range from -10 C to -15 C.

Page 137 of 499

5.2.4.11 Dwell Timer
Alarm 1 or alarm 2 can be configured as dwell timer by selecting TIMR for A1FN or A2FN, but
not both, otherwise, Error will appear. As the dwell timer is configured, the parameter TIME is used for dwell
time adjustment. The dwell time is measured in minute ranging from 0 to 6553.5 minutes. Once the process
reaches the setpoint the dwell timer starts to count from zero until time out. The timer relay will remain
unchanged until time out. The dwell timer operation is shown in the following diagram.

If alarm 1 is configured as dwell timer, A1SP, A1DV, A1HY and A1MD are hidden. The same
case is for alarm 2.
Example
Set A1FN=TIMR or A2FN=TIMR but not both. Adjust TIME in minutes. A1MD (if A1FN=TIMR) or
A2MD (if A2FN=TIMR) is ignored in this case.

5.2.4.12 Process Alarms

A process alarm sets an absolute trigger level (or temperature). When the process (could be
PV1, PV 2 or PV1-PV2) exceeds that absolute trigger level an alarm occurs. A process alarm is
independent of setpoint. Adjust A1FN (Alarm 1 function) in the setup menu. One of 8 functions can be
selected for process alarm. These are PV1.H, PV1.L, PV2.H, PV2.L, P1.2.H, P1.2.L, D1.2.H, and D1.2.L.
When the PV1.H or PV1.L is selected the alarm examines the PV1 value. When the PV2.H or
PV2.L is selected the alarm examines the PV2 value. When the P1.2.H or P1.2.L is selected the alarm
occurs if the PV1 or PV2 value exceeds the trigger level. When the D1.2.H or D1.2.L is selected the alarm
occurs if the PV1-PV2 (difference) value exceeds the trigger level. The trigger level is determined by A1SP
(Alarm 1 setpoint) and A1HY (Alarm 1 hysteresis value) in the configuration for alarm 1. The hysteresis
value is introduced to avoid interference action of alarm in a noisy environment. Normally A1HY can be set
with a minimum (0.1) value. A1DV and/or A2DV are hidden if alarm 1 and/or alarm 2 are set with process
alarm.

5.2.4.12.1 Alarm Modes

One of 4 kinds of alarm modes can be selected for alarm 1 and alarm 2. These are Normal
alarm, latching alarm, holding alarm and Latching/Holding alarm.

5.2.4.12.1.1 Normal Alarm: A1MD = NORM

When a normal alarm is selected, the alarm output is de-energized in the non-alarm condition
and energized in an alarm condition.

5.2.4.12.1.2 Latching Alarm: A1MD = LTCH

If a latching alarm is selected, once the alarm output is energized, it will remain unchanged even
if the alarm condition is cleared. The latching alarms are disabled when the power is shut off or if event input
is applied with proper selection of EIFN.

Page 138 of 499

5.2.4.12.1.3 Holding Alarm: A1MD = HOLD
A holding alarm prevents an alarm from power-up. The alarm is enabled only when the process
reaches the setpoint value (maybe SP1 or SP2). Afterwards, the alarm performs the same function as a
normal alarm.

5.2.4.12.1.4 Latching / Holding Alarm: A1MD = LT. HO

A latching/holding alarm performs both holding and latching function.

5-1 Normal Process Alarm

5-2 Latching Process Alarm

Page 139 of 499

 5-3 Holding Process Alarms

5-4 Latching/Holding Process Alarm

Although the above descriptions are based on alarm 1, the same conditions can be applied to alarm 2.

5.2.4.12.2 Alarm Types

5.2.4.12.2.1 Deviation Alarm

A deviation alarm alerts the user when the process deviates too far from the setpoint. The user
can enter a positive or negative deviation value (A1DV, A2DV) for alarm 1 and alarm 2. A hysteresis value
(A1HY or A2HY) can be selected to avoid interference problem of alarm in a noisy environment. Normally,
A1HY and A2HY can be set with a minimum (0.1) value. Trigger levels of alarm are moving with the
setpoint.
For alarm 1, Trigger levels=SP1+A1DV 1/2 A1HY.
For alarm 2, Trigger levels=SP1+A2DV 1/2 A2HY.
A1SP and/or A2SP are hidden if alarm 1 and/or alarm 2 are set with deviation alarm. One of 4
kinds of alarm modes can be selected for alarm 1 and alarm 2. These are Normal alarm, latching alarm,
holding alarm and Latching/Holding alarm.

Page 140 of 499

 5-5 Normal Deviation Alarm

5-6 Latching Deviation Alarm

5-7 Holding Deviation Alarm

5-8 Latching/Holding Deviation Alarm

5.2.4.12.2.2 Deviation Band Alarm

A deviation band alarm pre-sets two reference levels relative to the setpoint. Two types of
deviation band alarm can be configured for alarm 1 and alarm 2. These are deviation band high alarm
(A1FN or A2FN select DB.HI) and deviation band low alarm (A1FN or A2FN select DB.LO). A1SP and
A1HY are hidden if alarm 1 is selected with deviation band alarm. Similarly, A2SP and A2HY are hidden if

Page 141 of 499

alarm 2 is selected with deviation band alarm. Trigger levels of deviation band alarm are moving with the
setpoint.
For alarm 1, trigger levels=SP1± A1DV.
For alarm 2, trigger levels=SP1 ±A2DV.
One of 4 kinds of alarm modes can be selected for alarm 1 and alarm 2. These are Normal
alarm, latching alarm, holding alarm and Latching/Holding alarm.

5-9 Normal Deviation Band Alarm

5-10 Latching Deviation Band Alarm

5-11 Holding Deviation Band Alarm

5-12 .Latching/Holding Deviation Band Alarm

Page 142 of 499

5.2.4.13 Event Input
The Event input accepts a digital type signal. Three types of signals can be connected to event
input. These are Relay or switch contacts Open collector pull low TTL logic level. One of the ten available
functions can be chosen by using (EIFN) contained in the setup menu.
1 NONE: Event input No function. If chosen, the event input function is disabled. The
controller will use PB1, TI1 and TD1 for PID control and SP1 (or other values
determined by SPMD) for the setpoint.
2 SP2: If chosen, the SP2 will replace the role of SP1 for control. SP2: If chosen, the SP2
will replace the role of SP1 for control.
3 PID2: If chosen, the second PID set PB2, TI2 and TD2 will be used to replace PB1, TI1
and TD1 for control.
4 SP.P2: If chosen, the SP2, PB2, TI2 and TD2 will replace SP1, PB1, TI1 and TD1 for
control
Note: If the second PID set is chosen during Auto-tuning and/or Self-tuning procedures,
the new PID values will be stored in PB2, TI2 and TD2.
5 RS.A1: Reset Alarm 1 as the event input is activated. However, if the alarm 1 condition
is still existent, the alarm 1 will be retriggered again while the event input is released.
6 RS.A2: Reset Alarm 2 as the event input is activated. However, if alarm 2 conditions are
still existent, the alarm 2 will be retriggered again while the event input is released.
7 R.A1.2: Reset both Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 as the event input is activated. However, if the
alarm 1 and/or alarm 2 are still existent, the alarm 1 and/or alarm 2 will be triggered
again while the event input is released.
Note: The RS.A1, RS.A2 and R.A1.2 are particularly suitable to be used for a Latching
and/or Latching/Holding alarms.
8 D.O1: Disable Output 1 as the event input is activated. The output 1 control variable
MV1 is cleared to zero.
9 D.O2: Disable Output 2 as the event input is activated. The output 2 control variables
MV2 is cleared to zero.
10 D.O1.2: Disable both Output 1 and Output 2 by clearing MV1 and MV2 values as soon
as the event input is activated.
Note: When any of D.O1, D.O2 or D.O1.2 is selected for EIFN, the output 1 and/or
output 2 will revert to their normal conditions as soon as the event input is released.
11 LOCK: All parameters are locked to prevent from being changed.
12 SP2F Function: Define the format of SP2 value. If SP2F in the setup menu is selected
with ACTU, the event input function will use SP2 value for its second setpoint. If SP2F is
selected with DEVI, the SP1 value will be added to SP2. The sum of SP1 and SP2
(SP1+SP2) will be used by the event input function for the second setpoint value. In
certain applications, it is desirable to move second setpoint value with respect to
setpoint 1 value. The DEVI function for SP2 provides a convenient way in this case.

5.2.4.14 Second Setpoint

In certain applications, it is desirable to change the setpoint automatically without the need to
adjust the setpoint. You can apply a signal to event input terminals. The signal applied to event input may
come from a Timer, a PLC, and an Alarm Relay, a Manual switch or other devices. Select SP2 for EIFN
which is contained in the setup menu. This is available only with the case that SP1.2, MIN.R or HR.R is
used for SPMD, where MIN.R and HR.R are used for the ramping function.
Application 1: A process is required to be heated at a higher temperature as soon as its pressure exceeds
a certain limit. Set SPMD=SP1.2, EIFN=SP2 (or SP. P2 if the second PID is required for the higher
temperature too). The pressure gauge is switched ON as it senses a higher pressure. Connect the output

Page 143 of 499

contacts of the pressure gauge to the event input. SP1 is set with normal temperature and SP2 is set with a
higher temperature. Choose ACTU for SP2F.
Application 2: An oven is required to be heated at 300°C from 8.00 AM to 6.00 PM After 6.00 PM it is
desirable to be maintained at 80°C. Use a programmable 24 hours cycle timer for this purpose. The timer
output is used to control event input. Set SPMD=SP1.2, and EIFN=SP2 (or SP. P2 if the second PID is
required to be used for the second setpoint). SP1 is set with 300°C and SP2 is set with 80°C. Choose
ACTU for SP2F. After 6.00 PM the timer output is closed. The event input function will select SP2 (=80°C)
to control the process.

5.2.4.15 Second PID Set

In certain applications, the process characteristics are strongly related to their process value.
The Process Control Card provides two sets of PID values. When the process is changed to a different
setpoint, the PID values can be switched to another set to achieve an optimum condition.
The optimal PID values for a process may vary with its process value and setpoint. Hence if a
process is used for a wide range of setpoint, dual PID values are necessary to optimize the control
performance. If the first PID set is selected (event input is not applied) during the auto-tuning procedure, the
PID values will be stored in PB1, TI1 and TD1. Similarly, if the second PID set is selected (event input is
applied while PID2 or SP. P2 is selected for EIFN) during auto-tuning, the PID values will be stored in PB2,
TI2 and TD2 as soon as auto-tuning is completed.
Application 1: Programmed by Setpoint
Choose SP. P2 for EIFN then both setpoint and PID values will be switched to another set
simultaneously. The signal applied to event input may come from a Timer, a PLC, and an Alarm Relay, a
Manual Switch or other devices.
Application 2: Programmed by Process Value
If the process value exceeds a certain limit, 500°C for example, it is desirable to use other PID
values to optimize the control performance. The user can use a process high alarm to detect the limit of the
process value. Choose PV1H for A1FN, A1MD selects NORM, adjust A1SP to be equal to 500° C, and
choose PID2 for EIFN. If the temperature is higher than 500°C, then alarm 1 is activated. The alarm 1
output is connected to event input; the PID values will change from PB1, TI1 and TD1 to PB2, TI2 and TD2.

5.2.4.16 Ramp & Dwell

5.2.4.16.1.1 Ramp
The ramping function is performed during power up as well as any time the setpoint is changed. Choose
MINR or HRR for SPMD, the unit will perform the ramping function. The ramp rate is programmed by using
RAMP which is available in user configuration of Process Control Card
Example without Dwell Timer
Select MINR for SPMD, IN1U selects °C, DP1 selects 1-DP, Set RAMP=10.0. SP1 is set to
200°C initially and changed to 100°C after 30 minutes since power-up. The starting temperature is 30° C.
After power up the process is running like the curve shown below

Note: When the ramp function is used, the lower display will show the current ramping value. However, it
will revert to show the setpoint value as soon as the up or down key is touched for adjustment. The ramping

Page 144 of 499

value is initiated to process value either power up or RAMP and /or setpoint is changed. Setting the RAMP
to zero means no ramp function at all.

5.2.4.16.2 Dwell
The dwell timer can be used separately or accompanied with a Ramp. If A1FN selects TIMR, the
alarm 1 will act like a dwell timer. Similarly, alarm 2 will act like a dwell timer if A2FN selects TIMR. The
timer is programmed by using TIME which is contained in the Configuration menu. The Timer starts to count
as soon as the process reaches its setpoint, and triggers an alarm as time out. Here is an example.

Example with Dwell Timer

Select TIMR for A1FN, IN1U selects F, DP1 selects NODP, Set TIME=30.0 SP1 is set to 400 F
initially and corrected to 200 F before the process reaches 200° F. As the process reaches setpoint (i.e.
200°F) the timer starts to count. The TIME value can still be corrected without disturbing the Timer before
time out. The TIME is changed to 40.0 after 28 minutes since the process reached its setpoint. The
behaviour of process value and alarm 1 are shown below. Once the timer output was energized it will
remain unchanged until power down or an event input programmed for resetting alarm is applied.

Note: The TIMR can't be chosen for both A1FN and A2FN simultaneously; otherwise an error code will
produce.

5.2.4.16.3 Ramp &Dwell

A Ramp can be accompanied with a dwell timer to control the process. Here is an example.
Example Ramp & Dwell Timer
Select HRR for SPMD, IN1U selects PU, DP1 select 2-DP, Set RAMP=60.00 A2FN selects
TIMR, Set TIME=20.0 as power is applied the process value starts from 0.00 and set SP1=30.00,
SP2=40.00. The timer output is used to control event input.

5.2.4.17 Remote Setpoint

SPMD selecting PV1 or PV2 will enable the Process Control Card to accept a remote setpoint
signal. If PV1 is selected for SPMD, the remote setpoint signal is sent to Input 1, and Input 2 is used for

Page 145 of 499

process signal input. If PV2 is selected for SPMD, the remote setpoint signal is sent to Input 2, and Input 1
is used for process signal. To achieve this, set the following parameters in the Configuration menu.

Case 1:
Use Input 2 to accept the remote setpoint
FUNC=FULL
IN2, IN2U, DP2, IN2L, IN2H, are set according to the remote signal.
PVMD=PV1
IN1, IN1U, DP1, are set according to the processed signal
IN1L, IN1H if available, are set according to the processed signal
SPMD= PV2

Case 2:
Use Input 1 to accept the remote setpoint
FUNC=FULL
IN1, IN1U, DP1, IN1L, IN1H, are set according to the remote signal.
PVMD=PV2
IN2, IN2U, DP2, are set according to the processed signal
IN2L, IN2H if available, are set according to the processed signal
SPMD= PV1
Note: If PV1 are chosen for both SPMD and PVMD, an Error Code will appear. If PV2 are chosen for both
SPMD and PVMD, an Error Code will appear. The user should not use these cases, otherwise, the Process
Control Card will not control properly.

5.2.4.18 Differential Control

In certain applications, it is desirable to control the second process such that its process value
always deviates from the first process with a constant value. To achieve this, set the following parameter in
the Setup menu.
FUNC=FULL
IN1, IN1L, IN1H are set according to input 1 signal
IN2, IN2L, IN2H are set according to input 2 signal
IN1U, DP1, IN2U, DP2, are set according to input 1 and input 2 signal
PVMD=P1-2 or P2-1
SPMD=SP1.2
The response of PV2 will be parallel to PV1 as shown in the following diagram

The PV display will indicate PV1-PV2 value if P1-2 is chosen for PVMD or PV2-PV1 value if P2-
1 is chosen for PVMD. If the user needs PV1 or PV2 to be displayed instead of PV, they can use the
Display Mode to select PV1 or PV2 to be viewed. If PVMD selects P1-2 or P2-1, while SPMD selects PV1 or
PV2, an Error Code will appear. In this case, the signals used for input 1 and input 2 should be the same
unit and same decimal point, that is, IN1U=IN2U, DP1=DP2, otherwise, Error Code will appear.

Page 146 of 499

5.2.4.19 Output Power Limit
In a certain system, the heater (or cooler) is over-designed such that the process is too heavily
heated or cooled. To avoid excessive overshoot and/or undershoot the user can use the Power Limit
function. Output 1 power limit PL1 is contained in Configuration. If output 2 is not used for cooling (that is
COOL is not selected for OUT2), then PL2 is hidden. If the controller is used for ON-OFF control, then both
PL1 and PL2 are hidden
Example:
OUT2=COOL, PB1=10.0°C, CPB=50, PL1=50, PL2=80 the output 1 and output 2 will act as
following curves

NOTE:
The adjusting ranges of MV1 (H) and MV2 (C) for manual control and/or failure transfer are not
limited by PL1 and PL2.

5.2.4.20 Digital Filter

In a certain application, the process value is too unstable to be read. To improve this
programmable low pass filter incorporated in this Process Control Card can be used. This is a first-order
filter with time constant specified by FILT parameter which is contained in the setup menu. The default value
of FILT is 0.5 sec. before shipping. Adjust FILT to change the time constant from 0 to 60 seconds. 0 second
represents no filter is applied to the input signal. The filter is characterized by the following diagram.

Note
The Filter is available only for PV1 and is performed for the displayed value only. The controller
is designed to use the unfiltered signal for control even if Filter is applied. A lagged (filtered) signal, if used
for control, may produce an unstable process.

Page 147 of 499

5.2.4.21 Auto-Tuning and Manual Tuning
The Auto-tuning and Manual tuning can be executed by pressing the mode key in the Process
control module real-time display page. Press and Press Real-Time and Press C1 to access the
Process Control module C1real time display page. In a similar way, the real-time pages of other process
control modules also can be accessed.
Press Mode and select Auto-tuning to perform auto-tuning for the process. During the Auto-
tuning process, the PV display will blink continuously.
Press Mode and select Manual control to perform manual tuning for the process. In this, the user
can control the process manually by adjusting the output value manually.
Press Back to exit auto-tuning or manual tuning when it is in progress.

Page 148 of 499

5.2.5 Profile
This will allow the user to configure the ramp and soak profiles for PID process control card. The
recorder can be configured with a maximum of 50 profiles with each 32 segments limited to 1000 segments
in total.
After entering the Configuration menu, select Profile then Press the “Enter” softkey to get into
Profile configuration menu. It displays the Profile Profile1 as the first Profile configuration page. Press
directional navigation keys at the bottom to select other profiles. Press directional keys

on the right-hand side to select the configuration menu column. After completing

Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display. All
configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 149 of 499

5.2.5.1 Ramp & Dwell
Many applications need to vary temperature or process value with time. Such applications need
a controller which varies a setpoint as a function of time. This Process Control Process Control Card can do
this. The setpoint is varied by using a setpoint profiler. The profile is stored as a series of “ramp” and “dwell
“segments, as shown below.

In each segment, you can define the state of up to 3 event outputs which can drive either relay,
logic or Triac outputs, depending on the modules installed. A profile is executed either once, repeated a set
number of times or repeated continuously. If repeated a set number of times, then the number of cycles
must be specified as part of the profile.
Below are the available types of segment

5.2.5.1.1 Ramp
Ramp to a new setpoint at a set rate or in a set time

5.2.5.1.2 Time to Target

Ramp to a segment with a Setpoint in a set time.

5.2.5.1.3 Dwell
Dwell for a set time

5.2.5.1.4 Go Back
Jump to a specified segment in the same profile

5.2.5.1.5 End
Make this segment the end of the profile
The below four kinds of combination is allowable for connecting segments.

Page 150 of 499

Ramp-Ramp
Ramp-Dwell
Dwell-Ramp
Dwell-Dwell

5.2.5.2 Name
Enable the user to define the name for each Profile with the maximum limit of 18 Characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys appears. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new Profile
name.

5.2.5.3 Segments
The user can add or Insert or Remove the segments of the Profile in this section. Press Add
and then press Enter Softkey to access the Segment Configuration window.

5.2.5.3.1 Type
Select the Segment type. The Available segment types are as below.
1 Ramp
2 Time to Target
3 Dwell
4 Go Back
5 End

5.2.5.3.1.1 Ramp Segment Parameters

Condition
The condition to be selected for the Ramp Segment to follow to reach the setpoint as Ramp and
Setpoint or Ramp and Time. The Ramp and Setpoint will change the setpoint to reach the Setpoint in that
segment in the Ramp Rate specified. The Ramp and Time will change the Setpoint based on the ramp rate
specified for the duration mentioned.
Rate
Ramp Rate of the segment to reach the setpoint. The Ramp Rate unit can be set for /Sec./Min,
/Hour. The Ramp Rate Value can be defined in value.

Page 151 of 499

Duration
Duration of the segment for the Ramp can be set in Hour: Minute: Second.
PID
The PID Values to be used for this RAMP is PID1 or PID2.
Hold Back
As the setpoint ramps up or down (or dwells), the measured value may lag behind or deviate
from the setpoint by an undesirable amount. "Holdback" is available to freeze the profile at its current state.
The action of Holdback is the same as a deviation alarm. It can be enabled or disabled. Holdback has three
parameters.
1 Holdback wait time
2 Holdback band
3 Holdback type
If the error from the setpoint exceeds the set holdback band (Band), then if the holdback feature
is enabled it will automatically freeze the profile at its current point. At the same time, the holdback timer
begins to count. When the value of holdback timer exceeds the value of holdback wait time (wait time), the
profiler will no longer be freeze and jump to its next segment, at the same time an error code HBER will be
displayed. If the error comes within the holdback band (Band), then the program will resume normal
running.
Hold Back Types
There are four different Holdback types. The choice of type is made by setting the Holdback
parameter when creating a profile with any one of the following
1 OFF-Disables Holdback - no action is taken.
2 Deviation Lo-Deviation Low Holdback holds the profile back when the process value
deviates below the setpoint by more than the holdback band (Band).
3 Deviation High-Deviation high holdback holds the profile back when the process value
deviates above the setpoint by more than the holdback band (Band).
4 Deviation Lo/High -Deviation Lo/High Holdback is a combination of the two. It holds the
profile back when the process value deviates either above or below the setpoint by
more than the holdback band (Band).
Hold Back Action
Holdback action is defined by the below parameters.
1 Wait Forever
2 Wait Time
If wait forever is enabled then the process will wait until the PV has come within Holdback
band (Band). If wait forever is disabled then the holdback action specified in Action after a timeout will
be finished after the time specified in wait time. The available holdback actions are Hold and Continue.
The hold will hold the segment and continue will move to the next segment.

5-13 Holdback on Dwell

Page 152 of 499

 5-14 Holdback on Positive Ramp

5-15 Holdback on Negative Ramp

5.2.5.3.1.2 Dwell Segment Parameters

Duration
Duration of the segment for the Dwell can be set in Hour: Minute: Second.
PID
The PID Values to be used for this Dwell is PID1 or PID2.

5.2.5.3.1.3 Go Back Segment Parameters

This segment will jump to the specified in the segment mentioned on the Segment for the no of
cycles mentioned in Cycle.

Page 153 of 499

5.2.5.3.1.4 End Segment Parameters

This is an End segment of the profile to End the profile with setpoint mentioned in Setpoint with
the PID values in the selection of PID1 or PID2 as per the selection.

5.2.5.3.1.5 Time to Target Segment Parameters

This is similar to the ramp segment with automatic calculation of ramp rate by the Process
Control Card with the reference of Setpoint and duration given by the user.
Setpoint
Setpoint to be reached in this segment. Of the segment
Duration
Duration of the segment to reach the setpoint
PID
The PID Values to be used for this RAMP is PID1 or PID2.
Holdback
Hold back actions to enable or not. Refer the details in Ramp segment section for the detailed
explanation.

5.2.5.4 Jobs
The job is called as a task to be performed when the event is activated. There are two jobs Start-
Job and End Job can be added to perform any event.
A typical example is to trigger an alarm buzzer in the event of high temperature.
Note: Please refer to the section Jobs for full details about various jobs available

5.2.5.4.1 Start/End Jobs

Start: Define the job to be done at the start of the Profile (Ramp &Dwell)
End: Define the job to be done at the End of the Profile (Ramp &Dwell)

Page 154 of 499

5.2.5.5 Start/Stop Profile (Ramp &Dwell)
The Profile can be started, Hold or stop from the Real-time display page of the process control
module. The Profile can be selected and run from the Run button on the display page. Press Run and
select the profile to be run then press ok to start the Profile.

Press Hold to hold the profile. Press Stop to stop the Profile.

The real-time display page will show the Profile and Segment no along with the remaining time
of that particular segment.

5.2.5.6 Oven Control with Zone Temperature Recording Application

An Oven is designed to dry the products with 6 zones. The Zone Temperature is controlled by a
single temperature controller. The temperatures of the different zones are recorded to ensure the operation

Page 155 of 499

of different zones. Generally, for this application one temperature controller and 6 channel recorder are
required. By using PR Series Recorder with PID Control card it can be achieved with one device.
The oven required to dry the products at 500°C for 1 hour. All the 6 zones temperature needs to be
recorded. For this dwell timer of PID Control card needs to be used to control the oven temperature and
Analog inputs of Recorder needs to be connected with Thermocouple inputs from all the zones. The system
configuration is as below.

To achieve this function set the following parameters in the PID Control setup menu and
configure the Recorder as per the recording requirements.
FUNC=BASC (Basic function)
IN1=K_TC IN1U= C
DP1=1_DP OUT1=REVR
O1TY=RELY CYC1=18.0
O1FT=BPLS A1FN=TIMR
A1FT=ON SELF=NONE

Page 156 of 499

5.3 Jobs
There are various types of jobs available in the recorder to activate by an event. The available
jobs are listed below.

5.3.1 No Action
Do nothing

5.3.2 Send Email

Send Email directly from Recorder

5.3.3 Pause
Stop logging data.

5.3.4 Start
Start logging data.

5.3.5 Sound Buzzer

Sound the buzzer. It stops once any key is pressed.

5.3.6 Dump Data

Dump the historical data from internal memory to external memory such as SD Card or USB
Disk. The user can select the data to be dumped to external memory.

5.3.7 Enable Fast Mode

Enables the fast mode logging of 100 msec for the specific channel irrespective of the channel
configuration

5.3.8 Disable Fast Mode

Disable the fast mode for the specific channel.

5.3.9 DO Latch On
Set digital output/relay on, and then select Target, let’s say from one of DO 1 to DO 6. The relay
is latched when it is activated.

Page 157 of 499

5.3.10 DO Latch Off
Set digital output/relay off, and then select Target, let’s say from one of DO 1 to DO 6. The relay
is un-latched when it is activated.

5.3.11 DO Process
Set digital output/relay on for process high or low, and then select the target, let’s say from 1 of
DO 1 to DO 6. The relay is not going to be latched when it is activated.

5.3.12 Enable Timer

Start the timer, and then select Target timers

5.3.13 Disable Timer

Stop the timer, and then select Target from Timers

5.3.14 Preset Totalizer

Set a pre-set value to the target Totalizer.

5.3.15 Reset Totalizer

Reset Totalizer to zero. Select a single Target Totalizer or All totalizers

5.3.16 Enable Totalizer

Starts the Totalizer. Select a single Target Totalizer or All totalizers

5.3.17 Disable Totalizer

Stops the Totalizer. Select a single Target Totalizer or All totalizers

5.3.18 Preset Counter

Set a pre-set value to the target counter.

5.3.19 Reset Counter

Resets the counter to zero. Select a single Target counter or all counters

5.3.20 Inc Counter

Increases the counter by 1. Select a Target counter or all counters

5.3.21 Dec Counter

Decrease the counter by 1. Select a Target counter or all counters

5.3.22 Log Report

Log a report for the selected channels. The options available to select for the report are
Counter, Totalizer, Analog inputs (Min/Max/Avg), Math (Min/Max/Avg), All Counters, All Totalizers, and All
Channels (Min/Max/Avg).

5.3.23 Reset MinMaxAve

Reset the minimum, maximum and average values of the previously sampled data. The
statistical data will calculate from the new sample of reports.

Page 158 of 499

5.3.24 Print Historical data
Prints the historical data. The period of data to be printed will follow the configuration in Auto
output menu.

5.3.25 Print Event List

Prints the historical event list. The period of data to be printed will follow the configuration in Auto
output menu.

5.3.26 Print Report List

Prints the historical data of log report data. The period of data to be printed will follow the
configuration in Auto output menu.

5.3.27 Print Snapshot

Prints the snapshot of the screen.

5.3.28 Output Historical Data

This will generate a historical data output in CSV format in external storage. It will also contain
event reports.

5.3.29 Copy Value and Paste Value

This is mainly used for retransmission of Analog inputs using external (communication) Analog
output channels. Since we have the limitation of Analog outputs on the Recorder. These external channels
can be used by using the copy value and paste value. This can be used by using an event or timer when job
1 is copy value, job2 will be paste value.

5.3.30 Select Controller

Select the PID Process controller card

5.3.31 Run Profile

Select the profile to run.

5.4 Display
This will allow the user to configure the real-time display pages on the recorder. The maximum
no of display pages and pens per display page will vary depends on the recorder model no.

PR10 PR20 PR30

Display pages 8 20 21
Pens/Page 6 6 10
After entering the Configuration menu, select “Display” then Press the “Enter” key to get into
the Display configuration menu. It displays the Display page Page1 as the first display page configuration
page. Press directional navigation keys at the bottom to select other pages. Press

directional keys on the right-hand side to select the menu column. After completing

Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display. All
configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 159 of 499

Copy: copy the configuration from one page to another page.
Paste: Paste the copied configuration to the page.
Press Copy key in the source page and press paste key in the destination page.

5.4.1 Name
Enables the user to define the name for each page with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new display
page name.

5.4.2 Mode
Defines the default mode of displaying data for the page. The available options are Trend, Bar,
Digital, Mix, Circular, Individual and Disable modes.
Note:
Circular Trend mode is available only in PR30.

5.4.3 Speed
This is the display speed. The available display speeds are as below.
1. 100 msec/dot
2. 1 Sec/dot
3. 2 Sec/dot
4. 5 Sec/dot
5. 10 Sec/dot
6. 15 Sec/dot
7. 20 Sec/dot
8. 30 Sec/dot
9. 1 min/dot
10. 2 min/dot
11. 5 min/dot
12. 15 min/dot

Page 160 of 499

 13. 10 min/page (Circular Mode only)
14. 30 min/page (Circular Mode only)
15. 1 hour/page (Circular Mode only)
16. 2 hour/page (Circular Mode only)
17. 4 hour/page (Circular Mode only)
18. 8 hour/page (Circular Mode only)
19. 12 hour/page (Circular Mode only)
20. 1 day/page (Circular Mode only)
21. 2 day/page (Circular Mode only)
22. 1 week/page (Circular Mode only)
23. 2 week/page (Circular Mode only)
24. 4 week/page (Circular Mode only)
25. 1 hour/dot
26. 2 hour/dot

5.4.4 Direction
Sets the trend direction to be horizontal or vertical.

5.4.5 Background
Sets the background colour of Trend to black or white

5.4.6 Print Enable

This will enable or disable the data of the configured pen on this page in print Historical data
and output historical data jobs.

5.4.7 Trend Graph Scale

The trend scale of the pens to be enabled or disabled on the display page.

Page 161 of 499

 5-16 Trend Scale

5-17 Circular Scale

5.4.8 Pen
This will configure the display pens of that display page and their properties.

5.4.8.1 Channel
Selects a specific channel for that pen from the analog input, Math, Counter, Totalizer,
External Channels. Select disable if a specific pen is not required to display any channels.

5.4.8.2 Color
Selects the colour for that pen.

5.4.8.3 Width
Selects the width of that pen. The available options are 1, 2, and 3.

5.4.8.4 Range Low

Defines the low scale for that pen on the display.

5.4.8.5 Range High

Defines the high scale for that pen on the display.

5.4.8.6 Reference points

This will draw two reference points on the display. This will be displayed only in individual mode,
in trend mode with only one pen per page and in circular mode with only one pen per page. The reference
points have two points 1&2 to configure when it is enabled. It will not be displayed when it is disabled.

Page 162 of 499

 5-18 Reference Points Display

5.4.8.7 Trend Graph scale position

The position of the trend scale from left to right of that pen in display page. The scale can be
disabled by selecting disable in the position.

Note
❖ To illustrate the difference between Display Hi, Display Lo, Scale Hi, and Scale Low, here is a typical
example, with input 0-10V, Scale Low=0.00, Scale Hi=100.00, to have better resolution and vision on
Bar graph, set the Display Lo=0.00 and Display Hi=50.00 so that the Bar displays from value 0.00 to
50.00.
❖ The decimal point is defined by Scale Hi and Scale Low, and not by Display Hi, or Display Lo.

5.4.8.8 Status Bar

To make it convenient when viewing the status of Digital Input, Digital Output, Math channel,
Totalizer, Counter and AO, the user may enable these items in the status bar. The Status bar is displayed at
the lower part of the display page. One status bar can be configured for each page. Each status bar
consists of 6 tags in PR10 and PR20 and 10 tags in PR30 for the user configuration.
Note
Status bar configuration is not shared in all the pages. You may define a different setup for
status bars in each page per your requirements.

Page 163 of 499

Page 164 of 499
5.5 Batch
This will allow the user to configure the batch configuration. This menu will be visible to the user
when the batch is enabled in instrument menu configuration. After entering the Configuration menu, select
“Batch” then Press the “Enter” key to get into the Batch configuration menu. It displays the Display page

Page1 as the first display page configuration page. Press directional keys on the right-hand

side to select the menu column. After completing Configuration, press softkey, then press

softkey to return to the main display. All configurations will be saved automatically.

5.5.1 Name
Enables the user to define the name for Batch with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new batch
name.

5.5.1.1 Lot Number

Define the starting Lot number of the batch.

5.5.1.1.1 Auto Increment

If this option is enabled then the lot number will be automatically incremented by one for the next
batch. If this option is disabled then there is a popup window will appear on the screen to enter the batch
details when starting the batch by using the start option in the menu.

Page 165 of 499

Page 166 of 499
5.5.2 Desc
The description of the batch for logging.

5.5.3 Example for Batch Application

The operator wants to start a batch every day at 8.00 am and stop the batch at 12.00 am.
Configuration
Timer1
Type: Daily
Action: Enable
Time – Hour: 8 Min: 0 Sec: 1
Job1: Start Job2: No Action
Timer2
Type: Daily
Action: Enable
Time – Hour: 12 Min: 0 Sec: 1
Job1: Pause Job2: No Action

5.5.4 How to view batch data in Recorder

1. Press on (Menu)-History-Page1
2. Press “Search”, select required Batch and press “Ok”
3. Batch details including lot number can be archived by pressing softkey “Batch”

Page 167 of 499

5.5.5 How to Dump Batch data to an external USB memory
1. Press on (Menu)-More then press on Dump

2. Select “All” or required lots and press “OK”

For example, Batch1-1, Batch 1-2, Batch1-3 are available
Initial 1 Lot means, Batch1-1
Initial 2 Lots means, Batch1-1 and Batch1-2
Initial 3 Lots means, Batch1-1, Batch1-2 and Batch1-3
Note
Provision not available to dump only a specific lot.
3. Press on “Yes” to dump data from internal memory to external SD Card or USB memory.

Page 168 of 499

 If there are 3 batches, let’s say Batch1-1, Batch1-2 and Batch1-3, then there are three different
folders in the external storage after completing of dump

Note
The data available in external memory is in a proprietary format to avoid any kind of tampering.
The PC software is required to view this data.

5.6 Start / Stop

This will allow the users to configure the jobs when the logging is started or stopped.

5.6.1 Start
Configure the job for the start action. This job will be activated when the logging is started.

5.6.2 Stop
Configure the job for the stop action. This job will be activated when the logging is paused or
stopped.

Page 169 of 499

5.7 Timer
This will allow the user to configure the timers on the recorder. The no of timers available on the
recorder will vary depends on the recorder model no. They are listed as below.

PR10 PR20 PR30

Timer 6 20 48

After entering the Configuration menu, select “Timer” then Press the “Enter” key to get into
Timer configuration menu. It displays Timer Timer1 as the first-timer to configure. Press directional

navigation keys at the bottom to select other timers. Press directional keys

on the right-hand side to select the menu column. After completing Configuration, press softkey,

then press softkey to return to the main display. All configurations will be saved automatically.
Copy: copy the configuration from one timer to another timer.
Paste: Paste the copied configuration to the timer.
Press Copy key in the source timer and press paste key in the destination timer.

The timers can be used to execute a job on a time basis. The timers can be categorized into
Countdown, Repeat Countdown, Daily, Weekly and Monthly.

5.7.1 Type
Select the type of Timer. The available options for the users are as below.
1. Countdown
2. Repeat Countdown
3. Daily
4. Weekly
5. Monthly

Page 170 of 499

5.7.1.1 Countdown
This timer will execute only once and activate the defined jobs after the defined time.

5.7.1.2 Repeat Countdown

This timer will execute in a loop continuously and activate the defined jobs in the defined interval
of time.

5.7.1.3 Daily
This timer will activate the defined jobs at a defined time every day.

5.7.1.4 Weekly
This timer will activate the defined jobs at a defined time every week.

5.7.1.5 Monthly
This timer will activate the defined jobs at a defined time every month.
Note
Countdown and Repeat countdown timers will not follow RTC clock time. They will start the timer
from 0 once they are activated. Daily, Weekly and Monthly timers will follow the RTC Clock time to execute
the jobs.

5.7.2 Action
Disables or enables the timer.

5.7.3 Job1, Job2

2 jobs can be configured for each timer.

5.7.4 Timer Example-1

Switch on the water pump every day at 8.00 am and switch off at 10.00 am. This application
requires a “Daily” timer which works with Real-Time Clock. Configuration settings are as follows.
Timer1
Type: Daily
Action: Enable
Time – Hour: 8 Min: 0 Sec: 0
Job1: DO Latch On, Target: DO1
Job2: No Action

Timer2
Type: Daily
Action: Enable
Time – Hour: 10 Min: 0 Sec: 0
Job1: DO Latch Off, Target: DO1
Job2: No Action

Page 171 of 499

5.7.5 Timer Example-2
Let’s say, when a digital input high event is triggered by high pressure, switch on a relay after a
10 seconds delay.
Digital Input1
Event1
Type: H
Job1: Enable Timer, Target: Timer1
Job2: No Action
Event2
Type: L
Job1: DO Latch Off, Target: DO1
Job2: No Action
Timer1
Type: Countdown, Action: Disable
Time – Hour: 0 Min: 0 Sec: 10
Job1: DO Latch On, Target: DO1
Job2: No Action

5.7.5.1 Timer Example-3

The user requires to get a daily report from the recorder about the minimum, maximum and
average values of the process every day. After production has finished, the user can press Menu, then
Event then selects Report and presses the Mode key to select the Daily mode. It will show the report on a
daily basis.
Timer1
Type: Daily
Action: Enable
Time – Hour: 17 Min: 01
Job1: Log Report Target: ALL CH MinMaxAve
Job2: Reset Min/Max/Ave Target: ALL CH
(Reset historical data in order to log new data for the next day.)

5.8 Clock
This will allow the user to configure the clock and related configuration including summer saving
time adjustment. After entering the Configuration menu, select Clock then Press the Enter key to get into
the Clock configuration menu. It displays the clock configuration menu to configure. Press directional keys

on the right-hand side to select the menu column. After completing Configuration, press
softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display. All configurations will be saved
automatically.

Page 172 of 499

5.8.1 Date Style
Selects the Date style format for the recorder. The available options are MM/dd/yy and
dd/MM/yy, yyyy/MM/dd.

5.8.2 Time Zone

Select the time zone for the recorder

5.8.3 Synchronize via Internet

This will allow the recorder to synchronize the clock time from a time server via an Internet
connection on the recorder. If this option is enabled then the recorder will connect with Time server every
day at the defined time to synchronize the clock.

5.8.4 Date / Time

This will allow the user to set the clock manually. After modifying the clock data press to
apply the modified time.

5.8.5 Summertime
In some countries of North America and Europe, clocks are adjusted forward one hour near the
start of spring and are adjusted backwards in autumn. This is commonly referred to as Daylight Savings
Time. Here it is referred to as Summer Time. The summertime can be enabled by selecting enable in the
Type and configuring From and To time.

5.9 Communication
This will allow the user to configure the communication-related parameters. After entering the
Configuration menu, select Communication then Press the Enter key to get into Communication
configuration menu. It displays the communication configuration menu to configure. Press directional keys

Page 173 of 499

 on the right-hand side to select the menu column. After completing Configuration, press

softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display. All configurations will be saved
automatically.

5.9.1 Ethernet
This will configure the Ethernet port configuration.
IP
Select the IP type as Static or DHCP as per the requirement. Select DHCP if the server on the
network automatically allocates the IP address for the recorder. Select STATIC to manually set a fixed
address for the recorder.
IP Address: Defines the IP address of the recorder on the network
Subnet Mask: Defines the Subnet Mask address on the network
Default Gateway: Defines the Gateway address.
DNS Server: This is required if the recorder needs to be connected to the Internet
Modbus Server: When Recorder is configured as Slave Recorder (Server in Modbus TCP) in
Modbus communication, the recorder needs to be configured with the port no.
Modbus TCP Port: Modbus TCP Port no. The default setting is 502 for Modbus TCP
Web Server: This will allow the user to enable or disable the webserver feature on the recorder.

5.9.2 Serial
This will configure the serial port of the recorder.
Protocol: Selects the Modbus protocol. The available options are Modbus RTU Master and
Modbus RTU Slave.
Address: Recorder Slave Address in the network
Baud rate: Selects the communication baud rate for communication. The available options are
9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Data format: Selects the communication data format for communication. The available options
are none, 8, 1 or Odd, 8, 1 or Even, 8, 1

Page 174 of 499

5.9.3 Modbus Server / Slave
This will allow the user to select the data type for the recorder communication when it acts as a
slave in Modbus RTU or server in Modbus TCP.
Type of Register Value: The user can select the data type as an Integer or Floating point.

5.9.4 Modbus Client/Master

This will allow the user to configure the external channel communication with the recorder.

5.9.4.1 Connections
Add the connections to the recorder. There is a maximum of 16 devices can be connected with
PR10 and PR20 and a maximum of 32 devices can be connected with PR30. To add a connection, select
connections and then press Enter key. It will show the connection menu parameters.
Name: Configure the connection name
Type: Select the connection type as Serial or Ethernet
Slave ID: Configure the Slave Id of the device to be connected.
IP: This is enabled only if Type = Ethernet. Configure the IP address of the slave.
Port: This is enabled only if Type = Ethernet. Configure the port no of the slave.

Page 175 of 499

5.9.4.2 Commands
This will allow the user to configure the Modbus register address from the slaves needs to be
map to an external channel. There is a maximum of 16 commands can be added in PR10 and PR20 and 32
commands can be added in PR30. To add a command, select commands and then press Enter key. It will
show the commands menu parameters.

Action: Enable or Disable the command

To Channel: Configure the first and last channel of the external channel to be mapped.
First: Enter first external channel details, Ex: Ext1
Last: Enter last external channel details, Ex: Ext24
From Device: Configure the slave device to be mapped,
Register: Configure the Modbus address of the slave
Type: Select the Register type as per slave. The available options are Input and
Holding Registers, Discrete Input and Output coil.

Start Address: Enter Start register address. For example, 400001 as 1

Data Type: Configure the data type as per slave configuration. This is available
for Input and Holding Registers only. The available data types are
as listed below.
Int16/Uint16/Int32_B/Int32_L, UInt32_B, UInt32_L, Float_B,
Float_L

Page 176 of 499

 Connection: Select the required connection where the slave is configured.

5.9.4.3 Sample Rate

Configure the sampling rate for communication.
Ethernet : Configure the Ethernet communication sampling rate from the available options
100 msec/dot, 1 sec/dot, 2 sec/Dot, 5 sec/dot, 10 sec/dot
Timeout : Timeout for Ethernet Communication. The default timeout is 100ms
Serial : Configure the Serial communication sampling rate from the available options
100 msec/dot, 1 sec/dot, 2 sec/Dot, 5 sec/dot, 10 sec/dot
Timeout : Timeout for Serial Communication. The default timeout is 100ms
Interval between two commands : Configure the interval between two commands in serial
communication. The default time is 10 msec.

5.9.5 Email
This will allow the user to enable or disable the email function on the recorder. Once the email
function is enabled then the recorder will show the required menus to configure the email server details. The
user has to configure the email server configuration as per the email server. The below picture shows the
sample configuration with an email account from Gmail to send the email.

The user can configure the starting time of a day to start sending an email. This time can be
configured in Send after a scheduled time. This will avoid unnecessary email alarms when the process is

Page 177 of 499

not running or during maintenance. There are 10 different email address can be configured to send the
emails. Every email action can select a particular sender or all the senders in the email job configuration.

The system events can be enabled or disabled to send email notification by enabling or disabling

the option System event send email function. Press Email Test key to test the email
configuration. If the configuration and the connection are successful then the recorder will send email to all
the sender in the configuration. If there is a problem in email delivery then it will give an error message as
below.

The email server should accept less secure app access. The below show the configuration of
the Gmail account accepts the less secure app access.

Page 178 of 499

5.9.6 Example for IO Modules as External Channels for Analog Input
Paperless recorder connected with IO modules with slave address 2 and 3 via RS485
communication. The communication parameters for the communication are as below.
❖ Baud Rate: 9600
❖ Parity: None
❖ Data Length: 8 Bit
❖ Stop Bit: 1
The below picture shows the system configuration.

IO Module
Slave Id=2

Paperless Recorder RS-485

IO Module
Slave Id=3

The below table shows the Modbus address mapping of IO Modules which needs to be mapped
to external channels of the recorder.

The recorder communication protocol must be set as Modbus Master to communicate with
external channels.

Page 179 of 499

Configure the communication parameters as per the slave (IO Module) configuration.

Page 180 of 499

Add connections and commands as per IO module configuration.

5-19 Connection for Slave ID 2

5-20 Connection for Slave ID 3

5-21 Mapping of IO Module and External Channel for Slave ID2

Page 181 of 499

 5-22 Mapping of IO Module and External Channel for Slave ID 3
After the mapping of the IO module with the external channel is successful then all mapped
external channel needs to be configured for displaying the data with proper scaling.

Configure display page to display External channel in display pages

Page 182 of 499

5.9.7 Example for IO module as External Channel for Relay Output
Paperless recorder connected with IO module with slave Id 2&3 for increasing the relay outputs.
The communication parameters for the communication as below
❖ Baud Rate: 9600
❖ Parity: None
❖ Data Length: 8 Bit
❖ Stop Bit: 1

The below picture shows the system configuration.

IO Module
Slave Id=2

Paperless Recorder RS-485

IO Module
Slave Id=3

The below table shows the Modbus address mapping of IO Modules which needs to be mapped
to external channels of the recorder.

The recorder communication protocol must be set as Modbus Master to communicate with
external channels.

Configure the communication parameters as per the slave (IO Module) configuration.

Page 183 of 499

Add connections and commands as per IO module configuration.

5-23 Connection for Slave ID 2

Page 184 of 499

 5-24 Connection for Slave ID 3

5-25 Mapping of IO Module and External Channel for Slave ID 2

5-26 Mapping of IO Module and External Channel for Slave ID 3

After the mapping of the IO module with the external channel is successful then all mapped
external channel can be used for relay output by using copy value and paste value job.
Configure Math1 with the expression as 0 and Math2 with the expression as 1. Then using copy
value Math1 or Math2 as job1 and paste value Ext1 as job 2 to use the external channel relay output.

Page 185 of 499

5-27 Configuring Math1 as 0

5-28 Configuring Math2 as 1

Page 186 of 499

 5-29 Configuring Ext1 for AI1 alarm

Similar way, other external channels also can be used for alarm and other operations.

5.9.8 Example for IO module as External Channel for Analog Output

Paperless recorder connected with IO module with slave Id 2 for increasing the analog outputs.
The communication parameters for the communication as below
❖ Baud Rate: 9600
❖ Parity: None
❖ Data Length: 8 Bit
❖ Stop Bit: 1

The below picture shows the system configuration.

IO Module
Paperless Recorder RS-485 Slave Id=2

The below table shows the Modbus address mapping of IO Module which needs to be mapped
to external channels of the recorder.

Page 187 of 499

 The recorder communication protocol must be set as Modbus Master to communicate with
external channels.

Configure the communication parameters as per the slave (IO Module) configuration.

Page 188 of 499

 Add connections and commands as per IO module configuration.

5-30 Connection for Slave ID 2

5-31 Mapping of IO Module and External Channel for Slave ID 2

After the mapping of the IO module with the external channel is successful then all mapped
external channel can be used for analog output by using copy value and paste value job.
Configure Math1 with the expression for analog output for retransmitting AI1. Then using copy
value Math1 as job1 and paste value Ext1 as job 2 in timer to retransmit the AI1 value to external channel.

Page 189 of 499

 5-32 Configuring Math1 as retransmission of AI1 Value

5-33 Configuring timer to retransmit AI1 value via Ext1

Similar way, other external channels also can be used for retransmitting other channels.

5.9.9 Example for Controller as External Channels

Paperless recorder connected with temperature controller with slave address 2 via RS485
communication. The communication parameters for the communication are as below.
❖ Baud Rate: 9600
❖ Parity: None
❖ Data Length: 8 Bit
❖ Stop Bit: 1

Page 190 of 499

 The below picture shows the system configuration.

Temperature Controller
Paperless Recorder RS-485
Slave Id=2

The below table shows the parameters needs to be mapped and logged from the temperature
controller to external channels of the recorder.

The recorder communication protocol must be set as Modbus Master to communicate with
external channels.

Configure the communication parameters as per the slave (controller) configuration.

Page 191 of 499

 Add connections and commands as per controller configuration.

5-34 Connection for Slave ID 2

5-35 Mapping of Controller with External Channels

After the mapping of the controller with the external channel is successful then all mapped
external channel needs to be configured for displaying the data with proper scaling.

Page 192 of 499

 Configure display page to display External channel in display pages

5.9.10 Example for SIO Module as External Channel via PC-E

Paperless recorder connected with SIO module with slave address 1 using RS485 to Ethernet
Converter PC-E connected with Ethernet communication.

Page 193 of 499

 PC-E
SIO IO Module
Paperless Recorder Ethernet Ethernet to RS485 RS-485
Slave Id=1
Converter

The communication parameters for the communication are as below.

SIO Module Configuration
Address: 1
Baud Rate: 9600
Parity: None
Data Length: 8
Stop Bit: 1
The below table shows the Modbus mapping of SIO series IO module.

PC-E Configuration

5-36 PC-E Ethernet Configuration

5-37 PC-E Mode Configuration

Page 194 of 499

 5-38 PC-E PS485 Configuration
The recorder communication protocol must be set as Modbus Master to communicate with external
channels

Configure the communication parameters as per the slave (PC-E and SIO) configuration. Add
connections and commands as per PC-E and SIO module configuration.

Page 195 of 499

Configure the sample rate for the communication.

Configure External channel parameters and scaling.

Page 196 of 499

 Configure display page to display External channel in display pages

5-39 Display Page for Ext1

5.9.11 Example for Recorder as Modbus Slave

In this example, the recorder will act as a Modbus slave with id 2 and 3 which will communicate
with Modbus Master on the PC via RS485 communication.

Paperless Recorder
Slave Id=2

PC with Modbus
Master RS-485

Paperless Recorder
Slave Id=3

Page 197 of 499

 5-40 PR as a Modbus Slave with ID 2

5-41 PR as a Modbus Slave with ID 3

5.10 Instrument
This will allow the user to configure the Instrument related parameters like Batch, Security mode.
After entering the Configuration menu, select Instrument then Press the Enter key to get into the
Instrument configuration menu. It displays the Instrument related configuration menu to configure. Press

directional keys on the right-hand side to select the menu column. After completing
Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display. All
configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 198 of 499

5.10.1 Name
This enables the user to define the name for the recorder with a maximum of 18 characters.
Select “Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear. Press “Shift” to select
special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after entering a new recorder
name.

5.10.2 Language
There are 20 different languages available for the user to select for the user interface. They are
English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese, Korean, French, German, Italian, Polish,
Spanish, Portuguese, Brazil Portuguese, Russian, Thai, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Swedish, and Turkish &
Greek.

5.10.3 Security
This will allow the user to select the security mode as Normal or CFR-21. Once the CFR-21
mode is enabled the related menus will be shown for the user to configure.

5.10.3.1 Logout
The automatic log out time for the device to log out when there is no user interface on the
device. This option is available only for CFR-21.

5.10.3.2 Password validity

The user can configure the validity of the password for a period. The available options are 30
days, 60 days, 90 days, 120 days, 150 days, 180 days and unlimited.

Page 199 of 499

5.10.4 Batch Control
The batch function can be enabled or disabled.
Note: It is necessary to restart the recorder after changing the batch control.

5.10.5 Volume
The buzzer volume of the recorder can be disabled or can be set from 1 to 10. The buzzer can
be disabled by configuring Volume as Disable.

5.10.6 Tool Bar

The drop-down menu of the menu key can be hidden automatically after a period of
inactivity. The inactivity timer can be configured by configuring 10Sec or 20Sec or 30Sec in Auto Hide. If
Auto Hide is configured with disable then the drop-down menu will not be hidden.

5.10.7 Scan Page

The configured displayed pages can be scrolled automatically after a period of idle time
configured in Idle Time with a constant interval configured in Scan Rate. The idle time can be configured
from 1 Min to 10 Min and Scan rate can be configured from 5 sec to 30 sec. The scrolling of pages can be
disabled by configuring Idle Time as Disable.

5.10.8 LCD
The LCD Brightness can be configured from level 0 to 6. Level 0 is the lowest brightness and
level 6 is for the highest possible brightness.
The lifetime of LCD can be increased by configuring screen saver to turn off the display after a
period of inactivity on the screen. During the screen saver mode, the data will be recorded continuously
without any loss. The LCD screen only is off at that time. The screen saver time can be configured from 1
Min to 60 Min. The screen saver can be disabled by configuring Disable in Screen saver.

5.10.9 Storage
The external storage type can be chosen from the available options SD Card or USB Disk. The
default setting for external storage set as SD card. The maximum size of the external memory supported is
32GB. The external storage must be formatted in FAT or FAT32 format.

5.10.10 Data Transfer

The data transfer option can be set as Dump and Clear or Transfer and Remain. Dump and
Clear will clear the data from internal memory after dumping. Transfer and remain will keep the data in
internal memory after dumping.

5.10.10.1 Show Message at the End

This will be enabling or be disabling the conformation message after dumping is finished.

Page 200 of 499

5.10.11 Custom Page
The user can enable or disable the custom page download via Ethernet from Panel Studio
Software by choosing Enable or Disable in Allow Download via Ethernet.

5.10.11.1 Power on
The user can set a custom page to display after power on. This set page will show after the
recorder after power on.

5.10.12 Setup Start-up Image

The user can add a start-up image like a logo to show during power on.

5.10.12.1 Procedure to Setup a Start-up Image

1. Copy the image to the main path of the SD Card or USB Disk
2. Insert the external storage to PR
3. Set the external storage to SD card or USB as per the connected storage
4. Select the image by using the setup start-up page option in the Instrument menu.

5. After completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to

return to the main display. All configurations will be saved automatically.
6. Now the recorder will start with the selected image.

Page 201 of 499

5.11 Security
5.11.1 Normal
If normal mode is selected in security mode in the instrument menu then the user can define a
common password with a maximum of 18 characters. Once the password has been configured then the
user needs to key in the password to access Config, Dump, Clear, Operate softkeys. These keys enable
the user to do configuration, dump data, clear data or manually operate the job. For easy access, the user
may leave the password field empty.
After entering the Configuration menu, select Password then Press the Enter key to get into the
password configuration menu.

5.11.2 CFR-21
If CFR-21 is selected in security mode in the instrument menu then the data recorded in the
instrument will comply with FDA 21 CFR Part11. The recorder also provides audit trial report through the
event list. There are 30 different user accounts can be configured with different level of authority. There are
9 different levels of security can be configured. In this level 9 considered as a higher-level authority and
level 1 consider as of lower authority level.

5.11.2.1 User Account

This will allow the user to configure the user account like user name, function permissions. After
entering the Configuration menu, select User Account then Press the Enter key to get into the user
account configuration menu. It displays user account user1 as the first user to configure. Press directional

navigation keys at the bottom to select other users. Press directional keys
on the right-hand side to select the menu column. After completing Configuration, press softkey,

then press softkey to return to the main display. All configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 202 of 499

5.11.2.1.1 User Name
This enables the user to define the user name for the user account with a maximum of 18
characters. Select “User Name”, then press “Enter”, softkey, a keyboard with several keys will appear.
Press “Shift” to select special characters. Press “Caps” to select capital letters. Press softkey “OK” after
entering a new recorder name.

5.11.2.1.2 Active
The user account can be enabled or disabled by choosing Enable or Disable in Active.

5.11.2.1.3 Permissions
There is a different access level can be configured for a different function. Each user can give
access or not by configuring the function enable or disable. The different functions can be given access for
different users as listed below.

1. Login from PC
2. Dump
3. Clear
4. Operate
5. Config
❖ Channel
❖ Clock
❖ Instrument
❖ User Account
6. Pause

Page 203 of 499

 7. Batch
8. Shutdown

5.11.2.1.4 Security Level

The security level of the user account can be defined from 1 to 9 where 9 is the highest level and
1 is the lowest level.
Note: It is necessary to restart the recorder after changing the security mode.

5.12 Demo
The Demo mode is a simulation mode used as a sales tool for demonstration purposes. It is set
to simulate AI analog inputs and Math functions. After entering the Configuration menu, select Demo then
Press the Enter key to select Enable or Disable the Demo. After completing Configuration, press
softkey to return to the main display. All configurations will be saved automatically. It is necessary to save
and restart the recorder after changing the demo menu option.

5.13 Auto-Output
This will allow the user to configure the auto output configuration for automatic output in output
historical data and print-related jobs. After entering the Configuration menu, select Auto-Output then Press

the Enter key to get into the Auto output configuration menu. Press directional keys on the
right-hand side to select the menu column. After completing Configuration, press softkey, then
press softkey to return to the main display. All configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 204 of 499

5.13.1 Setup Printer
This will allow the user to configure the printer. Select Setup Printer and press Enter soft key to access the
printer configuration menu.

Printer: Select the printer type. There are five types of printer drivers supported. They are
listed as below.
1. HP PCL Laser
2. Epson ESC/P
3. Adobe PDF file
4. HP PCL Inkjet
5. Epson ESC/POS
Port: Select the printer port as per the connection. Select Network Printer for the printers
connected in Ethernet port and select LPT1 for the printers connected in USB Port.
Color/Mono: Select the colour as per the printer configuration. The available options are
Monochrome, 4 color CMYK, 3 Color CMY.
Printer Path: Configure the network printer path as per the connection. The syntax for the
network printer path as given below.
❖ For Network Printer
\\IP address of printer: Port no
Example: 192.168.0.197:9100
❖ For Shard printer
\\PC Name\Printer Share name
Example: \\THILLAI-PC\HP
Paper: Select the paper size.
Orientation: Select the orientation as Portrait or Landscape.
Draft Mode: Select Draft mode for printing as draft mode.

5.13.2 Print Header

The user can Enable or Disable the headers in the printing. Generally, the recorder will print with
related information of the data in the header in all the pages. This header can be disabled by selecting
Disable in Print header.

5.13.3 Title
The title available on the print header can be configured in this option.

Page 205 of 499

5.13.4 Historical Data
The period and interval of historical data to be printed can be configured by selecting the period
and interval. Print Historical Data and Print Event List will follow the period configured in this menu.
Period: Select Last hours or Last days
Hours/Days: Select no. of hours or no. of days to be printed.
Interval: Select interval of data to be printed from 100 msec /1 Sec / 2 Sec / 5 Sec / 10 Sec / 15
Sec / 20 Sec / 30 Sec / 1 Min / 5 Min / 10 Min / 15 Min / 20 Min / 30 Min / 45 Min / 1 Hour / 2 Hour

5.13.5 Report Data

The mode of the report to be printed can be selected in this option. This print Report List will
follow the mode configured in this menu. In the Mode, select which kind of Reports are required. Available
options are List, Daily, Weekly and Monthly.

5.13.6 Output Files

The output files can be compressed by choosing to enable in compress menu.

5.13.7 USB Printer Configuration

The USB printers can be connected directly via front or rear USB port of the recorder. The
printer should support PCL4 or PCL5 or PCL6 or ESCP.
Note: Do not use USB printer supporting only PCL to print single line alarms, otherwise, pages will be
Wasted

Paperless Recorder USB USB Printer

5.13.8 Network Printer Configuration

The network printers or shared printers can be connected via Ethernet port of the recorder. The
printer should support PCL4 or PCL5 or PCL6 or ESCP.

Paperless Recorder Ethernet Network Printer

5-42 Network Printer Connection

Paperless
Ethernet PC USB or Ethernet Printer
Recorder

5-43 Shared Printer Connection

Page 206 of 499

5.13.9 Sample Configuration of Printer
Steps to be followed for printer configuration as below.
1. Select the Printer Driver

2. Select the Port. LPT1 for USB Printer and Network printer for Network Printer and Shared printer.

3. Set the Printer Path as per the connection.

❖ For USB Printer the path is not applicable.

❖ For Network Printer set the path as below format

\\IP address of printer: Port no
Example: 192.168.0.197:9100

Page 207 of 499

 ❖ For Shard printer set the path as below format
\\PC Name\Printer Share name
Example: \\THILLAI-PC\HP

4. Press and then press softkey to save the configurations. Now the recorder is
ready for printer connectivity.
5. Press Menu and Operate to select the print snapshot to test the printer function.

Page 208 of 499

 6. If the print job fails to print then the recorder will pop up an error message as below.

5.14 System Information

This will provide the system information for the user like system version, memory information,
MAC address, IP address, Connected IO cards in every slot. This page will allow the user to calibrate the
touch screen and upgrade the system firmware.
After entering the Configuration menu, select System Information then Press the Enter key to

get into System Information page. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to move

between the information. Press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main display.
All configurations will be saved automatically.

Page 209 of 499

 The System Information page contains softkey to access Touch Screen Calibration and
Firmware upgrade Menu.

5.14.1 Firmware Upgrade

The recorder firmware can be updated by using the Update core system option in the maintain
menu option. For doing the firmware upgrade follow the below steps.
1. Download the latest firmware from the supplier website.
2. Unzip the file and copy the file Recorder_PV210.Bin file to SD Card or USB Disk as per the
selection of External Storage in Instrument menu. The file must be copied to root path of the SD
Card or USB Disk. The SD Card or USB disk must be formatted to FAT or FAT 32 format.
3. Plug the SD Card or USB Disk to the recorder.
4. After entering the Configuration menu, select System Information then Press the Enter key to get
into System Information page. After Entering the System Information Menu Press menu press
key. The system will show the below options to select.

5. Select Update Core System to upgrade the firmware.

6. After the upgrade firmware process is finished the system required to be restarted and do the
screen calibration.
Note:
All the data and configuration stored on the recorder will be deleted during the firmware upgrade
procedure.
Do not power off the recorder until the upgrade process is finished. Failing to do so may damage
the recorder flash memory.

Page 210 of 499

5.14.2 Touch Screen Calibration

After entering the system information menu in the configuration menu press key. The
system will show the below options to select.

1. Select Touch Calibrate and press OK to do the screen calibration. The below screen will appear
to do the screen calibration.
.

2. A “+” symbol appears in the centre of the LCD screen. Carefully press using a stylus or finger on
the centre of the target.
3. Repeat this procedure as the target moves around the screen. Once the ‘+’ symbol disappears,
touch the screen to complete the screen calibration.
By pressing the ESC key from the USB keyboard connected to the recorder can exit the screen
calibration screen. The screen calibration is necessary to achieve proper operation on the screen.

Page 211 of 499

5.14.2.1 Batch Example-1
The operator wants to start a batch every day at 8.00 am and stop the batch at 12.00 am.
Configuration
Timer1
Type: Daily Action: Enable
Time – Hour: 8 Min: 0 Sec: 1
Job1: Start
Job2: No Action

Timer2
Type: Daily Action: Enable
Time – Hour: 12 Min: 0 Sec: 1
Job1: Pause
Job2: No Action

5.14.2.1.1 How to view batch data in Recorder

Press on (Menu)-History-Page1
Press “Search”, select required Batch and press “Ok”
Batch details including lot number can be archived by pressing softkey “Batch”

Page 212 of 499

5.14.2.1.2 How to Dump Batch data to an external USB memory
Press on (Menu)-More then press on Dump

Select “All” or required lots and press “OK”

For example, Batch1-1, Batch 1-2, Batch1-3 are available
Initial 1 Lot means, Batch1-1
Initial 2 Lots means, Batch1-1 and Batch1-2
Initial 3 Lots means, Batch1-1, Batch1-2 and Batch1-3

Note: Provision not available to dump the only specific lot.

Please refer Instrument->Data Transfer-> Transfer and Remain

Press on “Yes” to dump data from internal memory to external SD Card or USB memory.

Page 213 of 499

If you have 3 batches, let’s say Batch1-1, Batch1-2 and Batch1-3, then you can see three different folders in
the external USB memory card after completing of dump

Please note that the data available in USB memory is in a proprietary format to avoid any kind of tampering.
You will need PC software to view this data.

5.15 Calibrate
This function is used for calibrating Individual Analog channel. This can be protected by a
password. After entering the Configuration menu, select Calibrate then Press the Enter key to get into the

Calibration menu. Press directional keys on the right-hand side to select the menu column.

After completing Configuration, press softkey, then press softkey to return to the main
display. All configurations will be saved automatically.
The Calibration must be carried out by qualified personnel only with proper instruments. The
system will show the warning message as shown below when the user is accessing the calibration menu.

After Entering the calibration menu, the screen shows the below screen.

Page 214 of 499

Type: Choose Channel for calibrating Analog Input and Analog Output, Controller for calibrating PID
process control card input.
Channel: Select the Analog Input or Analog Output Channel from the list to calibrate.
Sensor: Select the input type and its range to be calibrated.
Calibration Password: Set Password to access the Calibration parameters.
Note
Channel #3 should be calibrated first in all types of Analog Input cards. An analog temperature
sensor is installed in channel # 3. When channel # 3 is calibrating, the cold junction voltage measured by
this temperature sensor will be loaded into a register. If channel # 3 is not calibrated, the default value of
cold junction voltage will be used for all channels. It does not matter what order you perform a calibration
after calibrating input 3, there is no need to follow a sequence, and anyone of T/C, RTD, mA or VDC can be
done independently.

Page 215 of 499

Channel: Select the AO channel to be calibrated
Type: Select the AO type to be calibrated as Voltage or Current.
Note: The AO Card Dip switch also needs to be set as per the type selection.
Calibration Password: Set Password to access the Calibration parameters.

Type: Choose Channel for calibrating Analog Input and Analog Output, Controller for calibrating PID
process control card input.
Controller: Select the PID process control card to be calibrated.
Input: Choose the input of the process control card to be calibrated.
Sensor Type: Choose the sensor type of the input to be calibrated.
Calibration Password: Set Password to access the Calibration parameters.

Page 216 of 499

5.15.1 Calibrate an AI with 0-5V
After Entering the Calibration menu, select the channel, input type and range then press
calibrate key.

The system will prompt for a user conformation to do the calibration of the channel.

Press Yes to do the Calibration on No to exit. The system will inform the user to input the low-
value input to the channel.

After input 0V, select ok, the user can see the below screen.

Page 217 of 499

 After successful calibration lower AD calibration the system will request the user to input higher
range input to the input channel.

After input 5V, press ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of upper AD calibration, the system will show the calibration
completed message.

Press Back key to exit the calibration Menu. The system will prompt the user to save the new
calibration or not. Select Yes to apply the new calibration to the channel and No to exit without saving the
calibration data.

Page 218 of 499

5.15.2 Calibrate an AI with K type Thermocouple
After Entering the Calibration menu, select the channel, input type and range then press
calibrate key.

The system will prompt for a user conformation to do the calibration of the channel.

Press Yes to do the Calibration on No to exit. The system will inform the user to input the low-
value input to the channel.

Page 219 of 499

 After input 0mV, select ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration lower AD calibration the system will request the user to input higher
range input to the input channel.

After input 60mV, press ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of upper AD calibration, the system will show the calibration
completed message.

Page 220 of 499

 Press Back key to exit the calibration Menu. The system will prompt the user to save the new
calibration or not. Select Yes to apply the new calibration to the channel and No to exit without saving the
calibration data.

5.15.3 Calibrate an AI with Pt100 RTD

After Entering the Calibration menu, select the channel, input type and range then press
calibrate key.

Page 221 of 499

 The system will prompt for a user conformation to do the calibration of the channel.

Press Yes to do the Calibration on No to exit. The system will inform the user to input the low-
value input to the channel.

After input 100Ω, select ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration lower RTD calibration the system will request the user to input higher
range input to the input channel.

After input 300Ω, press ok, the user can see the below screen.

Page 222 of 499

 After successful calibration upper RTD calibration, the system will show the calibration
completed message.

Press Back key to exit the calibration Menu. The system will prompt the user to save the new
calibration or not. Select Yes to apply the new calibration to the channel and No to exit without saving the
calibration data.

Page 223 of 499

5.15.4 Calibrate an AO with 4 to 20 mA
After Entering the Calibration menu, select the channel, output type then press calibrate key.

The system will prompt for a user conformation to do the calibration of the channel.

Press Yes to do the Calibration on No to exit.

Connect a Current measuring meter before starting calibration.

Page 224 of 499

 The system will inform the user to input the low-value input to the channel.

Input the value shown on the meter

After inputting the value, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of the lower input value, the system will request the user to input
higher input to the channel.

Page 225 of 499

 Input the value shown on the meter.

After input the value press ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of upper-value calibration, the system will request the user to input
offset input to the channel.

Input the value shown on the meter

Page 226 of 499

 After input the value press ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of offset value calibration, the system will show the calibration
completed message.

Press Back key to exit the calibration Menu. The system will prompt the user to save the new
calibration or not. Select Yes to apply the new calibration to the channel and No to exit without saving the
calibration data.

Page 227 of 499

5.15.5 Calibrate an AO with 0 to 10 V
After Entering the Calibration menu, select the channel, output type then press calibrate key.

The system will prompt for a user conformation to do the calibration of the channel.

Press Yes to do the Calibration on No to exit.

Connect a Voltage measuring meter before starting calibration.

The system will inform the user to input the low-value input to the channel.

Page 228 of 499

 Input the value shown on the meter

After inputting the value, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of the lower input value, the system will request the user to input
higher input to the channel.

Input the value shown on the meter.

Page 229 of 499

 After input the value press ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of upper-value calibration, the system will request the user to input
offset input to the channel.

Input the value shown on the meter

Page 230 of 499

 After input the value press ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of offset value calibration, the system will show the calibration
completed message.

Press Back key to exit the calibration Menu. The system will prompt the user to save the new
calibration or not. Select Yes to apply the new calibration to the channel and No to exit without saving the
calibration data.

5.15.6 Calibrate PID process control card with K type Thermocouple

After Entering the Calibration menu, select the type as controller and choose the PID process
control card and its input and input type to be calibrated, then press calibrate key.

Page 231 of 499

 The system will prompt the user confirmation to calibrate.

Press Yes to do the Calibration on No to exit. The system will inform the user to input the low-
value input to the channel of the process control card.

Page 232 of 499

 After input 0mV, select ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration lower AD calibration, the system will request the user to input higher
range input to the input channel of the process control card.

After input 60mV, press ok, the user can see the below screen.

After successful calibration of upper AD calibration, the system will prompt the user to connect
the input as K type thermocouple with 0°C at ambient temperature 0°C.

Page 233 of 499

 After input K type thermocouple with 0°C at ambient temperature 0°C, press ok, the user can
see the below screen.

After successful calibration of lower cold junction calibration, the system will show the calibration
completed message.

Press Back key to exit the calibration Menu. The system will prompt the user to save the new
calibration or not. Select Yes to apply the new calibration to the channel and No to exit without saving the
calibration data.

5.16 Procedure to Upgrade and Restore Factory Default Settings

This procedure will allow the user to recover the device when the recorder application is not
running or malfunctioning like hanging. The below procedure should be followed to recover the device.
Power ON the Recorder while Pressing the Reset Button

Page 234 of 499

 Now the screen will appear like below

Format:
Press the Format Button for at least 3 seconds to return the Recorder to factory Settings.
After the Recorder is done the formatting, it will ask for Screen Calibration. Do the Screen Calibration by
touching the ‘+’ symbol on the screen. Repeat the step of calibration as long as the symbol ‘+’ moves on the
screen. Once the calibration is finished touch the screen to exit. The recorder has now been returned to
factory default settings.

Upgrade:
Download the Firmware from the link given. Generally, the file will be compressed. The
compressed file needs to be unzipped then copy the file Recorder_PV210.BIN to the main path of the SD
Card.
Ensure that the SD card is formatted to FAT32 or FAT. Insert the SD card to the SD Card Slot on the
Recorder. Press Upgrade Button for at least 3 Seconds to upgrade the image from SD Card.
Follow the on-Screen instructions.
After the Recorder is done the upgrade, it will ask for Screen Calibration. Do the Screen
Calibration by touching the ‘+’ symbol on the screen. Repeat the step of calibration as long as the symbol ‘+’
moves on the screen. Once the calibration is finished touch the screen to exit the calibration mode and
enter into the recorder application.

Page 235 of 499

6. PC BASED SOFTWARE
The PC Software can be used for configuration of the recorder, viewing and analysing of
historical data, real-time monitoring and logging of data, custom screen development for the recorder. There
is 4 software available for these functions as listed below.
1. Configuration Viewer- For Configuration
2. Historical Viewer- For analysis and viewing of historical data
3. Real-time Viewer-For real-time monitoring and logging
4. Panel Studio- For Custom screen development

6.1 Free Basic Software

The free basic software provided with recorder consists of Configuration Viewer and Historical
Viewer.

6.1.1 Historical Viewer Software Installation

The Historical Viewer software installation will install Historical Viewer and Configuration Viewer
on the PC.

6.1.1.1 System Requirements

Item Minimum Requirements
System IBM PC compatible computer with Intel Pentium IV or above
Operating System Windows XP or above
Memory 1 GB
Hard Disk 50 GB Free Space on the hard disk
Communication Ports RS232 or RS485 or Ethernet Port
Ethernet Port no 502, 26530 to 26533 to be opened
Others USB Port or SD Card Slot

6.1.1.2 Software Installation

Historical viewer software can be installed by following the below procedure.

1. Download the Historical viewer software form the manufacturer’s website.

2. Install latest Dot Net software from Microsoft website
3. Install the software by double-clicking the setupwizard.exe from Historical Viewer folder.

4. Select the language for installation

Page 236 of 499

5. Select the software components to be installed and select install

6. Follow on-screen instructions to select the installation path and press next to continue the
installation.

Page 237 of 499

7. Follow onscreen instructions to complete the installation. Once the installation is completed the
system will show the installation complete message.

8. After installation is successful, the shortcut for Historical viewer software will be created on the
desktop.

9. The structure of Historical viewer on the start menu as below.

Page 238 of 499

 .

6.1.1.3 Uninstallation of Software

The software can be uninstalled by selecting the uninstall option on the start menu.

6.1.2 Start and Exit

The Historical Viewer program can be started by using the shortcut on the desktop or
selecting the program Historical Viewer from the Start menu.
The program can be exit by simply closing the program X symbol on the top right corner of the
screen.

6.1.3 Historical Viewer

When running the program first time the initial screen displays like below.

6.1.3.1 Historical Viewer-Tool Bar

The historical viewer has below tools on the tool bar.
✓ New

✓ Open
✓ Save As

Page 239 of 499

✓ Print

✓ Trend View
✓ Event / Alarm List
✓ Report List

✓ Value List

✓ Manually Export data to Excel

✓ Copy Curves to Clipboard
✓ Remark
✓ Latest Event / Alarm List
✓ Manually Export data to Database Format (*.CSV)
✓ Snapshot
✓ Show Statistics
✓ Manually Export data in PDF

✓ Search by Specific Time

✓ Search by Specific Period

✓ Search by Handwrite

✓ Fast Backward
✓ Backward

✓ Forward

✓ Fast Forward
✓ Zoom In
✓ Zoom Out
✓ Zoom All

✓ Zoom Size
✓ Zoom By Time
✓ Zoom By Time and Value
✓ Select Period (Period A to B)
✓ By Horizontally

✓ By Vertically

Page 240 of 499

 ✓ White Background
✓ Black Background
✓ Show Trend View
✓ Show Circular View

✓ Next Page
✓ Manually import measured data
✓ Configuration

✓ Page Configuration
✓ Scale Selection
✓ Batch Selection
✓ Signature List
✓ Logout
✓ Seek by Tag Name

✓ Seek by Event / Alarm

✓ Seek by Trend Remark

✓ Seek by signature

✓ Trend Scale List

✓ Batch Comments

✓ Decode Method

6.1.3.2 Historical Viewer-Menu Bar

The menu bar consists of 8 menus. They are listed as below.
1. File(F)
2. Edit(E)
3. View(V)
4. Display(D)
5. Page(P)
6. Search(S)
7. Language(L)
8. Help(H)

Page 241 of 499

6.1.3.2.1 File (F)
Below are the submenu options available in File Menu.

1. New: Create a new project.

2. Open: Open an existing project.
3. Save As: Save the project with a new name.
4. Print: Print the data.
5. Recent: Open recently opened projects.
6. Logout: Log out the current user.
7. Exit: Exit the program.

6.1.3.2.2 Edit (E)

Below are the submenu options available in Edit Menu.

1. Manually Import: Manually import the data from the device.

2. Automatically Import and Export Option: Automatically import the data from the device and
exported to Excel, PDF or Database format
3. Manually export data to Excel: Manually export the data to excel

Page 242 of 499

 4. Manually export data to Database Format: Manually export the data to the database format .csv
5. Manually export data to PDF: Manually export the data to PDF
6. Clear: Clear the data from the project for a specific time period or all.
7. Copy: Copy the screen
8. Remark: Add remark to the data
9. Snapshot: Print the snapshot of the trend view.
10. Show Statistics: Show the statistical data Min, Max, Ave, P-P, Mean, RMS, Point A, Point B,
Difference of point A and point B (A-B) of the displayed trend.

11. Signature: Shows the list of signatures on the data.

12. Display Configuration Option: Select the display configuration as automatically or manually.

6.1.3.2.3 View (V)

Below are the submenu options available in the View menu.

Page 243 of 499

 This will allow the user to select the different zoom rate for the data, vertical or horizontal
direction of the trend and black or white background.

6.1.3.2.4 Display (D)

The below are the submenu options available in Display Menu.

Page 244 of 499

 1. Trend View: View the data in trend view mode.
2. Event/Alarm List: View the Event and alarm List of the data.
3. Report List: View the report list of the data.
4. Value List: View the data in Value List mode.

6.1.3.2.5 Page (P)

The below are the submenu options available in Page Menu.

The user can select the display page to be viewed from the shown list.

6.1.3.2.6 Search (S)

Below are the submenu options available in Search Menu.

1. By Time: Search the data at a particular time.

2. By Period: Search between two periods. Hold the mouse left key and move to select the period A

Page 245 of 499

 and Period B.

3. By Handwrite: Search the data by handwriting.

4. By Tag Name: Search the data by tag name.
5. By Event/Alarm: Search the data by Event or Alarm.
6. By Remark: Search the data by the remark.

6.1.3.2.7 Language (L)

The display language of the software can be changed by selecting any one of the available
languages from the sub-menu.

Page 246 of 499

6.1.3.2.8 Help (H)
The help menu provides information about the software and the necessary information.

1. Historical Viewer: Open the software help file.

2. About: Provides the information about the software like version and other related information.

6.1.3.3 Configuration Viewer-Tool Bar

The toolbar of configuration Viewer consists of the below tools.

✓ New
✓ Open
✓ Save
✓ Delete
✓ Bank

✓ Fast Backward
✓ Backward

✓ Forward

✓ Fast Forward
✓ Receive Configuration

Page 247 of 499

 ✓ Send Configuration

6.1.3.4 Configuration Viewer-Menu Bar

The menu bar consists of 8 menus. They are listed as below.
1. File(F)
2. Edit(E)
3. Language(L)
4. Help(H)

6.1.3.4.1 File (F)

Below are the submenu options available in File Menu.

1. Save: Save the changed configuration.

2. Exit: Exit the program.

Page 248 of 499

6.1.3.4.2 Edit (E)
Below are the submenu options available in Edit Menu.

1. Import: Import the configuration from the device or storage media.

2. Export: Export the configuration to the device or storage media.
3. Bank: Change the connection properties for the project.

6.1.3.4.3 Language (L)

The display language of the software can be changed by selecting any one of the available
languages from the sub-menu.

6.1.3.4.4 Help (H)

The help menu provides information about the software and the necessary information.

Page 249 of 499

 1. Configuration Help: Open the software help file.
2. About: Provides the information about the software like version and other related information.

6.1.3.5 Create a New Project

To Create a new project, follow the below procedure.

1. Click the icon or select New from File Menu.

2. The software will prompt the user to select the device type. Select Recorder (PR) and click
ok to create a new project.

3. The Software will prompt the user to configure the project name and the path for the
recorder.

Page 250 of 499

 ❖ Input the project name in the new project name field.
❖ If the device is connected to PC via Ethernet then select Ethernet in the file path and
input the IP address of the recorder then press ok.
Note: If the recorder is configured with static IP purchased from the Internet service
provider and connected with Internet then the data can be received from the
recorder anywhere in the world using this software.
❖ If the historical data is dumped to SD Card or USB Disk then remove the SD card or
USB disk from the recorder. Insert SD Card or USB disk to the PC then select
Storage Media in the file path and then select the path then press ok. The same
procedure can be followed for the files copied from SD card USB disk on the PC by
selecting the file path on the PC.
4. After the successful connection with the assigned path via Ethernet or Storage device, the
software will display the configuration of the device on the project via configuration viewer. If
the security is set for CFR21 then the user login is required.

5. After receiving the configuration close the configuration viewer to automatically import and
view the historical trend of historical data. If the security is set for CFR21 then the user login
is required.

Page 251 of 499

6. If the data is an import from storage media then the system will prompt the user to delete the
data from storage media or not after import.

7. If the security is configured as CFR21 then it is necessary to sign for imported data before
close the project or logout.

8. If the connection to the recorder fails then the software will show the error message.

Page 252 of 499

6.1.3.6 Open an Existing Project
To open and upload the new data to an existing project the following procedures to be followed.

1. Click the icon or select Open from File Menu.

2. The software will list the projects from the default project path for the user to select.

3. Select the project and click open to open the project.

4. The existing data will be displayed along with the login option for CFR21 security.
5. Click icon or select manually import from Edit menu to manually import the data from
the device. The progress will be shown with a progress bar.

6. After the successful import of the data, the software will display the data.

Page 253 of 499

 Note: The device configuration must be the same as the existing project to upload new data to the
project. Otherwise, the software will show a warning message to create a new project.

6.1.3.7 Automatic Import of Data

The historical data can be imported automatically from the device in the defined interval of time.
The following steps to be followed for automatic import.
1. After creating a new project or opening an existing project select automatic import and export option
from the Edit menu.
2.

3. Select automatically, set the time interval, File path. The time interval can be set from 1 hour to 24
hours.

Page 254 of 499

 4. Now the software will automatically import the data from the device to the project.

6.1.3.8 Automatic Import and Export of Data

The historical data can be imported automatically and exported to Excel, PDF or Database
format.
1. After creating a new project or opening an existing project select automatic import and export option
from the Edit menu.

2. Select automatically and export to excel or automatically and export to database format or
automatically and export to PDF, set the time interval, File path and File attributes. The time interval
can be set from 1 hour to 24 hours. The file attribute can be written to single file or multitude files.

Page 255 of 499

 5. Now the software will automatically import the data from the device to the project and export to
Excel or PDF or Database format.

6.1.3.9 Multiple Projects Automatic Import and Export of Data

The software supports the import of multiple projects automatically and exported to Excel, PDF
or Database format. For doing multiple projects import the following procedures need to be followed.
1. Create individual projects for individual recorders.
2. Set the export option in current project tab of Automatically Import and Export Option

3. Select the project to be imported automatically in multiple project tab.

Page 256 of 499

 4. Set the login credentials and the import interval. The login credential must be same for all the
projects.
5. Now the software will automatically import the data from the device to all the projects and export to
Excel or PDF or Database format as per the selection.

6.2 Extensive Software

The extensive software Data Acquisition Studio (DAQ) consists of Real-time Viewer,
Configuration Viewer and Historical Viewer.

6.2.1 Data Acquisition Studio Software Installation

The Data Acquisition Studio installation will install Real-time Viewer, Historical Viewer and
Configuration Viewer on the PC.

6.2.1.1 System Requirements

Item Minimum Requirements
System IBM PC compatible computer with Intel Pentium IV or above
Operating System Windows XP or above
Memory 1 GB
Hard Disk 50 GB Free Space on the hard disk
Communication Ports RS232 or RS485 or Ethernet Port
Others USB Port or SD Card Slot
Licence USB Licence Key

6.2.1.2 Software Installation

The Data Acquisition Studio software can be installed by following the below procedure.
1. Download the Data Acquisition Studio software form the manufacturer’s website.
2. Install latest dot Net software from Microsoft website
3. Install the software by double-clicking the setupwizard.exe from Data Acquisition Studio folder.

Page 257 of 499

4. Select the language for installation and

5. Select the software components to be installed and select install

6. Follow on-screen instructions to select the installation path and press next to continue the
installation.

Page 258 of 499

 7. Follow onscreen instructions to complete the installation. Once the installation is completed the
system will show the installation complete message.

8. After installation is successful, the shortcut for Real-time Viewer and Historical viewer software will
be created on the desktop.

6.2.1.3 Uninstallation of Software

The software can be uninstalled by selecting the uninstall option on the control panel Add or
Remove Programs.

6.2.2 Start and Exit

The Real-time Viewer program can be started by using the shortcut on the desktop or
selecting the program Real-time viewer from the start menu.

Page 259 of 499

 The program can be exit by simply closing the program X symbol on the top right corner of the
screen.

6.2.3 Real-Time Viewer

When running the program first time the initial screen displays like below.

6.2.3.1 Real-Time Viewer – Tool Bar

The real-time viewer has the following toolbars.

✓ New

✓ Open
✓ Save As
✓ Display Page Choice
✓ Configuration Data’

✓ Measured Data
✓ Arrange All (Mixed Mode)

✓ All Channel Digital

✓ Status
✓ Auto Page Mode
✓ Show Event/Alarm List
✓ Digital Mode Display
✓ Bar Graph
✓ Trend Mode
✓ IO Module Configuration (only for IO Modules)
✓ Controller Configuration (only for Controllers)
✓ Recorder Configuration (only for recorders)
✓ Manually Operate Jobs

✓ Reset Counters of IO Module (only for IO modules)

✓ Mute Alarms

6.2.3.2 Real Time Viewer – Menu Bar

The menu bar consists of 6 menus. They are listed as below.

Page 260 of 499

 1. File(F)
2. View(V)
3. Page(P)
4. Window(W)
5. Language(L)
6. Help(H)

6.2.3.2.1 File (F)

The File menu consists of the below sub-menu.

1. New: Create a new project.

2. Open: Open an existing project.
3. Save As: Save the project with a new name.
4. Close: Close the current project
5. Recent: Open recently opened projects.
6. Create DDE link in Excel: Create Dynamic Data Exchange in Excel for real-time values.
7. Exit: Exit the program.

6.2.3.2.2 View (V)

The View menu consists of the below sub-menu.

1. Configuration Data: Opens the configuration data of the project.

2. Measured Data: Opens the historical data of the project via Historical Viewer.

6.2.3.2.3 Page (P)

The Page menu consists of the available display pages to select. The user can select the display
page to be viewed from the shown list.

Page 261 of 499

6.2.3.2.4 Window (W)
The Window menu consists of different display modes to select. The user can select the display
mode to be viewed from the shown list.

1. Trend: Shows the display page in trend mode.

2. Bar: Shows the display page in bar graph mode.
3. Digital: Shows the display page in digital display mode.
4. Event: Shows the Event/ Alarm List display.
5. Arrange All: Shows the display page with Trend, Bar Graph, Digital Display and Event/Alarm List.
6. All Channel Digital: Shows all the configured channels in the digital mode as an overview.
7. Status: Shows the status of counters and Totalizers.

6.2.3.2.5 Language (L)

The display language of the software can be changed by selecting any one of the available
languages from the sub-menu.

Page 262 of 499

6.2.3.2.6 Help (H)
The help menu provides information about the software and the necessary information.

1. Real-time Viewer: Open the software help file.

2. About: Provides the information about the software like version and other related information.

6.2.3.3 Real-time Configuration Viewer-Tool Bar

The real time configuration has the following tools on the tool bar.

✓ Save

✓ Backup the configuration

✓ Delete the project
✓ Option
✓ Print

✓ Bank
✓ Channel Configuration
✓ Display Page Configuration

Page 263 of 499

 ✓ Tools
✓ Comment
✓ Setup Controller (only for Controllers)
✓ Setup all Display pages in Digital Mode Overview display.

✓ Fast Backward
✓ Backward

✓ Forward

✓ Fast Forward
✓ Project Auto configure
✓ Close and return to main program.

6.2.3.3.1 Option
The Options menu of real-time configuration has the following options.
1. Share
2. Email
3. Communication
4. Format
5. Display
6. Print auto-output
7. User Manage
8. The display of AI serial for IO Modules (only for IO Modules)
9. Auto start project
1. Share
The share menu will allow the user to configure for share or not to share the data
with others.

Share/do not share options are available for user selection. If the share option is
selected, then historical data available on the computer can be shared from other
computers. On selection of this share data, the shared folder will be created and the
following message will be shown

Page 264 of 499

 For example, the recorder is connected to the PC with a real-time viewer and wish
to analyse historical data at a different computer. While opening the project in the second
Computer, directly link to the project file available under C:\Data Acquisition Studio
through network configuration. This will minimize the data transfer between Modbus slaves
and the computers and make it more efficient by using available resources through the
network
Configurations.

2. Email
The Email menu will allow the user to configure the email server to send an email
on an event or alarm. The default Port number 25 is used to send email from the SMTP
server. If the network administrator configured a different port in LAN for accessing
internet/email, then the user has to modify the port number accordingly.
To send an email for any event, the procedure is as follows.
❖ Set SMTP server details as below. Please contact system or network
administrator for the server details if the computer is connected in LAN.
❖ Host, Port, User name,
❖ From: Sender email address
❖ To: Receiver email address (Max.10 email addresses can be selected)

❖ In case, email is successful, it delivers as follows

Type: HI Alarm
Source: Tag1
Active Time: 05/08/09, 13:31:04
Value: 50
Comment: Level high

Page 265 of 499

 ❖ If Email is failed to deliver, then it prompts the following error message. In this
case, it requires to check all the email settings

3. Communication
The communication menu will allow the user to configure the communication
parameters for the project.

Sampling rate: It is used to set data display time for Real-Time Viewer. User can select
One from the following for real-time monitoring.

Time out: This is time set for generating time out errors related to real-time viewer
Communication.
For example, if Recorder and PC with data acquisition software are located at
different places connected through Ethernet across different gateways, and then the user
can adjust sampling rate and time out settings to avoid errors in communication. When the
real-time viewer is running, please observe the following taskbar at the bottom side of the
screen.

Here, scan time should always be less than the sampling rate. Otherwise,
communication errors will occur. If PC and Modbus slave devices are connected by a long-
distance network, then there might be chances that scan time gets increased. So check this
and set sampling-rate more than scan time. Also, the user can set time out settings to
generate

Page 266 of 499

 Communication failure errors. Maximum time out settings possible is 60 sec. For example,
scan time is adjusted and time out setting = 30 sec. This means, if scan time is more than
the sampling rate for more than 30 sec, then communication errors will be generated.
4. Format
The Format menu will allow the user to configure the date-time format and set the
name for the software on the PC.

5. Display
The Display menu will allow the user to configure the display properties for
communication error, latest event/alarm list, auto page scrolling and screen display for
alarm action.

Auto-page:
The Auto page function is to rotate pages at a set time interval. If
this option is enabled and time is set, then, display pages in Real-Time Viewer will be
rotated cyclically as per the set time

Page 267 of 499

 Action: Enable, Disable options are available
Interval: This is the time interval and max. 60 sec. is possible

6. Print Auto-output
The Print auto-output menu will allow the user to configure to do the automatic
printing of historical data from the PC in the pre-defined interval.

7. User Manage
The User Manage menu will allow the user to configure the user security for the
project. The user can set the password and auto-logout time.

Disable: The security function will be disabled.

Set Password: Set password only for user security.
User Security Level: The user can set the password and auto-logout time for security.

8. The display of AI serial for IO modules

This is applicable only for the IO module. If the IO module is connected with the
real-time viewer then this option will allow the software to check the input status of the IO
module and display according to the selection in this tab.

Page 268 of 499

 9. Auto start project
This tab will allow the user to configure the last project to be started when the
software started.

6.2.3.3.2 Bank Configuration

There are four banks are available in real-time viewer configuration to configure for the devices
to connect with the software. All four banks will utilize different communication ports for communication.
Ethernet and serial communication ports can be used for communication.
1. Ethernet Bank Configuration
The Ethernet port can be configured with port no as 502 and protocol as Modbus_TCP

Page 269 of 499

 1. RS232/RS485 Bank Configuration
The serial RS232 or RS485 ports can be configured with Protocol as
Modbus_RS232 and other communication parameters such as com port no, Baud Rate,
Parity, Data Bits and Stop Bits as per the connection.

Note: It is possible to connect more than one device with the software with a different mode of
connection. For example, one device can be connected via Ethernet and another device can be
connected via RS485 or RS232.

6.2.3.3.3 Channel Configuration

The channels are auto-configured with all the configured tags from the recorder by the
software. The configured tags channels can be viewed by selecting the channel configuration icon in the
real-time configuration. It will display the configured device and channel information.

Page 270 of 499

 The channel configuration can be modified or deleted by selecting Modify or Delete options.
There are additional channels can be added by selecting Add option in the software. The available channels
are as below.
1. Recorder Channels from Recorder
2. Controller Channels from Controller
3. IO Module Channel from IO Modules
4. Math channels for a Math operation

5. Linear Channels for 3rd party Modbus slave devices to connect via Modbus protocol.

6. Simulate Channels to simulate the input signals by the software

Page 271 of 499

 All the channel configurations are similar to recorder channel configuration. Every channel can
be configured with 5 different types of events or alarms similar to the recorder and each event can be
configured with two jobs.
Device Type: Display channel source
Bank: Display current Bank number
Tag Name: It is to define the name for each channel in a maximum of 9 characters
Auto-Update: If you wish to modify Tag name and modify the configuration, deselect it
Use Gateway-Device Node address: It is the address of selected device type
IP address: Display current gateway IP address
Log Type: Enable/Disable. Select disable while a specific channel is not required at this time.
Select enable while a specific channel is required
Log Speed: It is the logging speed (recording speed) of measured data. Select Log Speed
column, then choose 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 seconds, 1,2,5,10,15 Minutes, 1 Hour, 2
Hour.
Log Method: The method of logging measured data. Select the column, and then choose the Log
method of Instant, Average, Minimum or Maximum data
Instant: logging in the last measured data at the sampling interval
Average: logging in averaged measured data at the sampling interval
Minimum: logging in minimum measured data at the sampling interval
Maximum: logging in maximum measured data at the sampling interval
Trigger: Select various types like “by time” or “by change” or disable
By Time: Datalog based on Log Speed and Log Method
By Change: Depends on Tolerance setting. Log speed and Log Method is disabled if this option
is selected and if this option is selected sampling rate is fixed at 1 sec. This option is
selected to save memory in PC If data logging is required in set log speed (fixed time
interval), select Trigger as by timer. If data logging is required only when there is a
change in process value, then select Trigger as by change. This will save memory
Tolerance: This is enabled if “by change” is selected at Trigger Type. For example, If tolerance is
set at 0.5, then if the new process value is more than or less than 0.5, then only the
new sample will be logged
Data Byte Type: Choose 2 or 4 or 8 byte
Range Low: Range low for the specific channel in the selected device, ex: 4.00 mA

Page 272 of 499

 Range High: Range high for the specific channel in the selected device, Ex: 20.00 mA
Decimal: select one of the options - 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
Gain: It is a multiplier to correct the sensor error. The correct value = (the process value + offset)
x gain
Offset: It is offset value to correct the sensor error
Unit: The engineering unit of input
Sensor: It displays input type automatically as per the type of IO card selected
Scale Low: Defines the low scale with decimal if necessary. For instance, input 0-10 V, the Scale
Low can be set up with value 0.00 to be correspondent to low range 0 V.
Scale High: Defines the high scale with decimal if necessary. For instance input 0-10 V, the Scale
High can be set up with value 100.00 to be correspondent to high range 10 V.

6.2.3.3.4 Event
The Event is frequently used for Alarm purpose. The event can also be used for digital output
DO, Timer, Totalizer, Counter or Report.
Type: There are various types of H, L, HH, LL, R, r or Error to be selected for job or Alarm
purpose.
H: High limit. When the process is over a high limit, the alarm or job is actuated.
L: Low limit. Any the process is lower than the low limit, the alarm or job is actuated
HH: High high limit, to set up another limit higher than the high limit for double warning.
LL: Low low limit, to set up another limit lower than the low limit for double warning.
R: Increasing the rate of change. The job or alarm is actuated when the rate of increasing process
value is greater than the specified rate time interval. For example, when the Setpoint is set to
100_1S, if the process is increasing greater than the value 100 in 1 second, then job or alarm
will be actuated.
r: Decreasing the rate of change. The job or alarm is actuated when the rate of decreasing
process value is greater than the specified rate time interval. For example, when the Setpoint is
set to 50_2S if the process is decreasing greater than the value 50 in 2 seconds, then job or
alarm is actuated.
Dev+: It is deviation+ event. This event will be triggered by the positive deviation of the process
value. The job or alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value higher
than setpoint from the previous process value.

For example,
Setpoint =10
At 10.00.01 Hrs, Tag1=40
At 10.00.02 Hrs, Tag1 = 51
Then, job or alarm is activated
Dev-: It is deviation- event. This event will be triggered by the negative deviation of the process
value. The job or alarm is activated when the process value is deviated by the value lower
than setpoint from the previous process value.
For example,
Setpoint =10
At 10.00.01 Hrs, Tag1=40
At 10.00.02 Hrs, Tag1 = 29
Then, job or alarm is activated.
Error: If there is an error in channel input, then alarm or job is actuated
Setpoint: To set up the process value for actuating Job1 and /or Job2

Page 273 of 499

 Hysteresis: To avoid job has been activated too often, the option available to set for no reaction
in 0.1% to 10% of full span (Low Scale to High Scale).
Job1, Job2: When an event occurs, the task to be performed is called the job. A typical example
is to trigger sound buzzer in the event of high temperature. Each pen can accept five
events (or alarms) and each event can create two jobs. Various types of jobs can be
selected:

6.2.3.3.5 Jobs
The following jobs are available for configuration to be executed on an event
No Action: Do nothing
Log Alarm (Auto Ack): Record alarm with acknowledgement automatically
Log Alarm: Record alarms
Log Event: Record events
Send Email: Send an email if it is configured on an event
Sound Buzzer: Sound the buzzer on an event
DO Latch On: Set digital output/relay on, and then select Target let say DO 1. The relay is
latched when it is activated. Digital Output relays will be shown if the digital output
IO module is configured and available in the database
DO Latch Off: Set digital output/relay off, and then select Target say DO 1. The relay is latched
when it is activated. Digital Output relays will be shown if the digital output IO
module is configured and available in the database
DO Process: Set digital output/relay on for process high or low, and then select Target from DO 1
to DO 6. The relay is not going to be latched when it is activated. Digital Output
relays will be shown if the digital output IO module is configured and available in
the database
Enable Timer: Start the timer, and then select Target from Timer1 to Timer 100 or all Timers
Disable Timer: Stop the timer, and then select Target from Timer1 to Timer 100 or all Timers
Preset Totalz: Start the totalizer with a preset value, and then select Target from Tolz 1 to Tolz
50. It requires configuring totalizer via tools and enabling it to appear totalizer
number in the jobs after selecting Preset Totalizer
Reset Totalz: Reset totalizer into zero, and then select Target from Tolz 1 to Tolz 50. It requires
configuring totalizer and enabling it to appear totalizer number in the jobs after
selecting Preset Totalizer
Enable Totalz: Start the totalizer, and then select Target from Tolz 1 to Tolz 50. It requires
configuring totalizer and enabling it to appear totalizer number in the jobs after
selecting Preset Totalizer
Disable Totalz: Stop the totalizer, and then select Target from Tolz 1 to Tolz 50. It requires
configuring totalizer and enabling it to appear totalizer number in the jobs after
selecting Preset Totalizer
Preset Counter: Start the Counter with a preset value, and then select Target from Cont1 to
Cont50. It requires configuring Counter via tools to appear counter number after
selection of Preset counter in the jobs
Reset Counter: Resets the counter into zero, and then select Target from Cont1 to Cont50.
Inc Counter: Increase the counter, and then select Target from Cont1 to Cont50
Dec Counter: Decrease the counter, and then select Target from Cont1 to Cont50
Log Report: Make the report for Counter and Totalizer
Reset MinMaxAve: In Report function, after logging the MinMaxAve data of AI and Math
channels for one day for example, then reset historical data in order to log new
data for the next day

Page 274 of 499

 Log Message: Log customized comments for alarm as messages on an event. A total of 100
messages available for customer customization
Print Historical Data: Prints the historical data as per print auto output configuration.
Print Event List: Prints the event list as per print auto output configuration.
Print Report List (Min/Max/Ave): Prints the report list as per print auto output configuration.
Print Snapshot: Prints the snapshot of the screen.
Output Historical Data: Output historical data to CSV format as per print auto-output
configuration.
Log Report (Instant): Log the report with instant values.

6.2.3.3.6 Display Page Configuration

‘ The display page configuration will allow the user to configure the display pages as per the
requirement. The display pages will be auto-configured along with the auto channel configuration. The user
can modify the channel and pages as per their requirement. There are 200 display pages available in Total
with 24 pens/page.
Mode: This is for page enable or disable.
Page Marks: This is the name for the specific page. Ex: Section Kiln. Maximum 38 characters are
allowed
Speed: This is the real-time trend display resolution. Select one of the options in 1 sec/dot, 2
sec/dot, 5 sec/dot, 10 sec/dot, 15 sec/dot, 20 sec/dot, 30 sec/dot, 1 min/dot, 2 min/dot, 5
min/dot, 10 min/dot, 15 min/dot, 1hour/dot, 2hour/dot,10 min/page, 30 min/page, 1
hr/page, 2 hrs/page, 4 hrs/page, 8 hrs/page, 12hour/page, day/page and week/page. If
you wish to see both Real-time and historical combined, then, select say day/page at the
display. Then, the Real-time trend in screen will be for the last 24 hrs update dynamically
Direction: Selects the trend direction horizontal or vertical.
Background: Defines the background colour of Trend mode in black or white
Pen: Defines a specific channel as a drawing pen, its colour, width, Display Hi and Display Low.
Channel: Selects a specific analog input AI or Mathematics Math, or selects Disable if a specific
channel is not required.
Color: Selects the colour for each pen.
Width: Selects the width of the trend, 1-thin, 2-medium, 3-wide.
Low: Defines the low scale for a pen on the display.
High: Defines the high scale for a pen on the display.
Forward / backward button: It is to navigate to next/earlier 8 sets of pens for display
configuration

Page 275 of 499

6.2.3.3.7 Tools Configuration
The real-time viewer has Timers, counters, Totalizers as tools for the user to use as per the
application requirement.
1. Timers
Maximum 100 timers available for configuration
Type: Countdown, Repeat Countdown, Daily, Weekly or Monthly.
Countdown: Defines the interval of time, e.g. days, hours, minutes and seconds. (Not Real-Time
clock)
Repeat Countdown: Repeats the previous countdown.
Daily, Weekly or Monthly: The timer works in the selected interval of Real-Time clock
Action: Disables or enables the timer.
Job1, Job2: various jobs as described in jobs for each timer.

2. Counters
Maximum 50 counters are available.
Name: Defines the name of the counter.
Desc: Defines the description for a specific counter on the display.

Page 276 of 499

 Unit: Defines the unit of counter
Preset: Defines the preset value for the counter. The counter starts from a preset value.
Event: Defines the type, setpoint, Job1 or Job2.
Type: Select one of three options: None, Process Hi, Process Low
Setpoint: Defines the setpoint of process value to trigger the counter.
Job1, Job2: various jobs as described in jobs for each counter

3. Totalizers
Maximum 50 Totalizers are available.
Name: Defines the name of the totalizer.
Desc: Defines the description for a specific totalizer on the display.
Source: Select a specific analog input or Math input to be used for totalizing.
Action: Disables or enables the totalizer.
Decimal: Defines the decimal point for the totalizer.
Period: Selects second, minute or hour used for the totalizer.
Unit: Defines the unit of totalizing
Preset: Defines the preset value for the totalizer. The totalizer starts from a preset value.
Low Cut: If Source channel has below this setting, then the value is skipped from Totalizing
Event: Defines the type, setpoint, Job1 or Job2.
Type: Select one of three options: None, Process Hi, Process Low
Setpoint: Defines the setpoint of process value to trigger the totalizer.
Job1, Job2: various jobs as described in jobs for each totalizer.

Page 277 of 499

6.2.3.3.8 Comments
There are 100 comments are available to customize the alarm messages. The user can
select one comment from this list when to log message or send Email jobs are configured. Each comment
can accept a maximum of 50 characters.

6.2.3.3.9 Auto Configuration

The Autoconfiguration will automatically configure the tags from the recorder, IO Module
and controllers. This will simplify the project setup procedure.
Device type: Select Recorder (PR) for the addition of Recorder into the network
Bank: Select bank from 1 to 4 as per bank configuration
Auto-update: Select if it is required to acquire a database of Recorders and give tag name for the channels
automatically
IP Address: IP address of the Recorder. After Entering the IP address press ‘+’ to add to the IP List.
IP List: IP List of the Recorders. If any recorder needs to be removed from the list then select the IP
address from the list then press’-‘ to remove the IP from the list.
Use Converter: Device Node Address: If the device is connected to PC via PC-E converter then select this
option and enter the node address of the device.
From: Start address of the device in the RS485 network.
To: End address of the device in the RS485 network. This is not applicable for Recorders.
Click on “OK” to add all the Recorders into network configuration

Page 278 of 499

6.2.3.4 Create a New Project
To create a new project follow the below steps.
1. Click the icon or select New from File Menu.
2. Set a name for the project

3. The Software requests the user for auto-configuration. Press No to configure the
communication Banks.

Page 279 of 499

4. Click Bank icon to configure communication bank.

5. There are 4 different banks are available for the user to configure. It will allow the software to
read the data from different communication networks like RS232, RS485, and Ethernet.
5.1. If the device is connected to PC via Ethernet port then configure the bank with Protocol
as Modbus_TCP and port no as 502.

5.2. If the device is connected to PC via RS232 or RS485 port then configure the bank with
Protocol as Modbus_RS232 and other communication parameters such as com port
no, Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits and Stop Bits as per the connection.

5.3. After configuring the banks close the configuration viewer and restart the program.

Page 280 of 499

6. Click the icon or select New from File Menu.
7. Set a name for the project

8. The Software requests the user for auto-configuration. Press yes to configure the tags of the
device automatically by the software.

9. Add the device to the project as per the connection.

9.1. Select Recorder (PR) as a device type to read the data from the PR series Recorder.
9.2. Select the Bank as per the connection and select the checkbox of Auto-update Tag
contents to update the tags automatically.
9.3. Configure the log speed and log method

9.4. Enter the IP address and press key to add the device to the project. It there are
any existing devices in the list and needs to be removed then select the IP address and

press key to remove.

Page 281 of 499

9.5. If the device is connected via Ethernet to RS485 converter PC-E then select the
checkbox use converter: Device Node Address and enter the node address of the
device. If multiple devices are connected via PC-E Converter then select the Set node
range checkbox and enter the starting and end node addresses.
9.6. Press OK to establish the communication and auto-update the tags from the recorder.

9.7. If there is more than one device is added to the project then the tag configuration of all
the devices will be listed as below.

Page 282 of 499

10. Close the Real-time configuration viewer to update the tag contents and logging the data
from the configured devices to PC. The configuration Viewer can be closed by pressing the
X key on the right side top or key.

11. Press yes to apply the new settings to the project.

12. If the USB Licence key is not plugged to the USB port of the PC then the Software will show
the warning message and start the demo mode. The software will stop working after the
demo period.

Page 283 of 499

 13. Press OK to start in demo mode.
14. If the USB Licence key is plugged into the USB Port of the PC then the software will start
reading the data from the devices and log the data to the PC.

6.2.3.5 Open an Existing Project

To open an existing project the following procedures to be followed.
1. Click the icon or select Open from File Menu.
2. The software will list the projects from the default project path for the user to select.

3. Select the project and click Open to open the project.

4. If the USB Licence key is not plugged to the USB port of the PC then the Software will show
the warning message and start the demo mode. The software will stop working after the
demo period.

Page 284 of 499

 5. Press OK to start in demo mode.
6. If the USB Licence key is plugged into the USB Port of the PC then the software will start
reading the data from the devices and log the data to the PC.

6.2.3.6 Add a Device to the Existing Device

It is possible to add a device to the existing project and log the data. For adding the device to the
existing project follow the procedure as follows.
7. Open the project by using the Open project option as explained above.
8. Go to Configuration by using Configuration data in the View menu or icon on the
Toolbar.

Page 285 of 499

 9. Click Add and configure the device information to add an additional device to the project.

10. Now the real-time configuration will update the tags with new device information.

11. Close the Real-time Configuration Viewer to update the project with the new device.

6.2.3.7 PR-DAQ RS485 Communication

The recorder can be connected to real-time viewer software using RS232 or RS485 port of
recorder and PC by following the below procedure.

Page 286 of 499

1. Save the PR Configuration to the SD card or USB Disk depends on the selection of External
Storage in Instrument Menu.
2. Press the Save Button on the Configuration page to Save the PR Configuration to the SD card or
USB Disk

3. Remove SD card or USB Disk from PR

4. Connect the SD Card or USB Disk to PC.
5. Open Real-time Viewer in DAQ Software
6. Set the Bank and PR Communication Parameter properly for RS485 Communication.

Page 287 of 499

7. Create a new project
8. Select Device Type as PR and select the Bank related to RS485 setting

9. Select the path of the SD card or USB Disk where Configuration was saved from PR

Page 288 of 499

10. DAQ will import the data from the configuration file and start collecting real-time data from the
Recorder.

11. Close the Real-time configuration viewer to update the tag contents and logging the data from the
configured devices to PC. The configuration Viewer can be closed by pressing the X key on the
right side top or key.

12. Press yes to apply the new settings to the project.

Page 289 of 499

 13. If the USB Licence key is not plugged to the USB port of the PC then the Software will show the
warning message and start the demo mode. The software will stop working after the demo period.

14. Press OK to start in demo mode.

15. If the USB Licence key is plugged into the USB Port of the PC then the software will start reading
the data from the devices and log the data to the PC.

6.2.3.8 PR-DAQ Ethernet Communication

The recorder can be connected to real-time viewer software using the Ethernet port of recorder
and PC by following the below procedure.
1. Open Real-time Viewer in DAQ Software
2. Set the Bank and PR Communication Parameter properly for Ethernet Communication.

Page 290 of 499

Page 291 of 499
3. Create a new project
4. Select Device Type as PR and select the Bank related to Ethernet setting. Enter the IP address and

press key to add the device to the project. It there are any existing devices in the list and

needs to be removed then select the IP address and press key to remove.

5. If the device is connected via Ethernet to RS485 converter PC-E then select the checkbox use
converter: Device Node Address and enter the node address of the device. If multiple devices are
connected via PC-E Converter then select the Set node range checkbox and enter the starting and
end node addresses.
6. Press OK to establish the communication and auto-update the tags from the recorder.

Page 292 of 499

7. If there is more than one device is added to the project then the tag configuration of all the devices
will be listed as below.

8. Close the Real-time configuration viewer to update the tag contents and logging the data from the
configured devices to PC. The configuration Viewer can be closed by pressing the X key on the
right side top or key.

9. Press yes to apply the new settings to the project.

Page 293 of 499

 10. If the USB Licence key is not plugged to the USB port of the PC then the Software will show the
warning message and start the demo mode. The software will stop working after the demo period.

11. Press OK to start in demo mode.

12. If the USB Licence key is plugged into the USB Port of the PC then the software will start reading
the data from the devices and log the data to the PC.

6.2.4 Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) is a standard inter-application communication protocol built into
Microsoft Windows operating systems and supported by many applications that run under Windows. DDE
takes data from one application and gives it to another application. It allows Windows programs that support
DDE to exchange data between themselves.

Page 294 of 499

 Data from DAQ software can be exchanged with Excel on the DDE link. After completion of all
network configuration (adding of all Modbus slaves), then open Data acquisition studio software – Real-time
viewer. Open the existing project or create a project then go to File Menu in Real-time Viewer then select
Create DDE Link in Excel.

Specify the path and file name as follows. By default, the file name will start with DDE and the
project name with underscore. Save the file name in PC at the selected path as above to proceed further.

For example, if Desktop is selected in the path, then excel file should be available in Desktop. If
the MS Office is not installed on the PC, then you cannot open the excel file created in the above procedure.
Please contact your system administrator to install MS office software in the PC. Now try to open the file
from Desktop created for using DDE application with the recorder through Real-time viewer Software.

Click on update to activate DDE between DAQ software and Excel application. If the DDE is
successful, then real-time data of the channels should be updated in the excel file as shown in the sample
screen.

Page 295 of 499

 DDE expression format to get real-time data from the Real-time Viewer software is as follows.

=RealTime_Viewer|TagService!_TagN
Where N = 1,2,3…..
Application = RealTime_Viewer
Topic = Tag Service
Tag name = _Tag1 (Please observe underscore before the tag number)
It is possible to exchange data related to AI, DI, DO, Counters and Totalizers between
DAQ software and third-party applications running under Windows operating systems via DDE.

6.2.4.1 Procedure to find the tag number for the tag name to use in DDE applications
❖ Create a DDE link from Real-time viewer.
❖ Open Excel file. Three columns appear in the excel file as Name, Unit and Value as shown in the
Excel file.
➢ Name: This is tag name actually defined in the channel configuration
➢ Unit: This is unit for the tag name defined in the channel configuration
➢ Value: This is the specific cell where the process value for the tag will appear in real-time.
❖ To find the DDE format for any tag in channel configuration, for a specific tag, double click at
“Value” column for the corresponding tag defined at Name. For example, For Name= AI1 is at
R2C1, double click at cell R2C3 to see DDE format for AI1. Click on Esc button at the keyboard to
see process value at the cell from displaying DDE format.

Page 296 of 499

 ❖ If any “Error” appears in any cell at excel, possible reasons are no data available at the selected
tag. Check the channel configuration and make sure value is available
❖ If any “NAME” text appears in the excel file, it indicates that particular tag is not configured
properly. Tag name may not available at DAQ software.
Note:
If Excel file is not opening from the selected path, then check the following
✓ RAM size in the PC is very less. Restart the computer and then create the DDE link once
again and open the Excel file.
✓ Increase virtual memory in the PC. Please contact the system administrator to check the
virtual memory settings at the PC.
My computer-properties-advanced-performance settings –advanced virtual memory.

6.2.4.2 DDE with 3rd party applications

Once the data is available at Excel at a particular cell, then data can be exchanged with
the 3 party applications like PLC, SCADA, and Visual Basic etc. If data is to be exchanged with
rd

PLC, then PLC programmer can write Visual basic macro in Excel from the following link
Excel – Tools – macro
For the source code examples, PLC programmer may check the PLC manuals for DDE
sample macros. It is also possible to exchange data from recorder to SCADA applications through
DDE.

6.2.5 Configuration of Recorder

There are three ways to configure the recorder. They are listed as below.
1. On the Recorder
2. Software via Ethernet port
3. Removable media

6.2.5.1 On the Recorder

It is possible to configure the recorder directly on the device using the touch screen interface.
Press (Menu), then More and then Config softkey to enter Configuration mode. The user can
directly configure all the parameters on this page. Refer to chapter 5 for more details.

Page 297 of 499

6.2.5.2 Software via Ethernet port
The below steps to be followed to configure via software using the Ethernet port of the recorder.
1. Connect Recorder to PC via cross over or straight Ethernet cable
2. Check the IP address of PC. Make sure to set the IP address of Recorder in the same
domain as PC
For example, the IP address of PC: 192.168.0.200
The IP address of Recorder: 192.168.0.11
3. Use “Ping” from DOS command prompt and check the communication quality. If there is no
response, check the cable or IP address configuration of PC or IP address configuration of
the recorder

4. Double click the historical viewer icon at desktop and follow on-screen instructions to create
a new project.

5. Click the icon or select New from File Menu.

6. The software will prompt the user to select the device type. Select Recorder (PR) and click
ok to create a new project.

Page 298 of 499

7. The Software will prompt the user to configure the project name and the path for the
recorder.

8. Click “OK”.

9. Click “Yes”. It will open the Recorder configuration screen

Page 299 of 499

Note: The configuration screen is the same as the screen available directly in the recorder. Refer to chapter
5 for more details.
10. Do the required changes in the configuration. Click at Send configuration icon

11. Now the recorder configuration has been updated with the new configuration.

6.2.5.3 Removable Media

The recorder can be configured via removable media by following the steps given below.
1. In recorder, insert an empty SD card or USB disk.
2. In the recorder, Press (Menu), then More and then Config softkey to enter
Configuration mode. In the configuration, menu press Save to save the configuration to the
removable media. The removable media can be selected by external storage option in the
Instrument menu. The default selection for external storage is SD Card.

3. Press “Yes” to save the configuration to storage media.

4. Remove the removable media from the recorder. Insert into PC
5. Check the contents of storage media. It should have the following files.

Page 300 of 499

6. Double click the historical viewer icon at desktop and follow on-screen
instructions to create a new project.

7. Select PR Recorder. Click “OK”

8. Select “Storage Media”. Then enter the path of the Recorder files in the USB stick or SD
card. Click “OK”

9. Click “Yes”. It will open the Recorder configuration screen

Page 301 of 499

Note: The configuration screen is the same as the screen available directly in the recorder. Refer to chapter
5 for more details.
10. Do the required changes in the configuration. Click at Send configuration icon

11. In the recorder, Press (Menu), then More and then Config softkey to enter
Configuration mode. In the configuration menu Press “Load”

12. Press “OK”

13. Press “Yes”

14. Now the recorder configuration has been updated with the new configuration.

Page 302 of 499

6.3 Custom Screen Editing Software - Panel Studio
Using this software the user can develop custom screens for custom display same as HMI and
SCADA. All the graphics developed on the screens can also be configured for animations.

Use this editing software to develop custom screens on the Recorder. It is mainly used for
application development for operator interface in industrial applications such as display real-time value of
process parameters like temperature, flow, pressure, visualize process data in meaningful ways such as bar
graphs, dial, meter, level, digital LED, animation like visibility control, blinking, horizontal movement, vertical
movement etc.

Page 303 of 499

6.3.1 Panel Studio Software Installation
The panel studio Software will install the following components on the PC.
▪ Microsoft installer V3.1
▪ Microsoft.Net framework V3.5 SP1
▪ Panel Studio Custom Screen Editing Software
▪ OPC server (Only Required for HMI)
▪ Demo projects (Only Required for HMI)
▪ Historical viewer
▪ HMI Remote viewer (Only Required for HMI)

6.3.1.1 System Requirements

Item Minimum Requirements
System IBM PC compatible computer with Intel Pentium IV or above
Operating System Windows XP or above
Memory 1 GB
Hard Disk 50 GB Free Space on the hard disk
Communication Ports Ethernet Port
Others USB Port
Licence Optional USB Licence Key for Symbol Factory

6.3.1.2 Software Installation

The Panel Studio software can be installed by following the below procedure.
1. Download the Panel Studio software form the manufacturer’s website.
2. Install latest dot Net software from Microsoft website
3. Install the software by double-clicking the setupwizard.exe from Panel Studio folder.

4. Select the required Software needs to be installed on the PC and press Install key to continue the
installation.

Page 304 of 499

5. Follow onscreen instructions to complete the installation. Once the installation is completed the
system will show the installation complete message.

6. After installation is successful, the shortcut for Panel Studio, Historical Viewer and HMI Remote
Viewer will be created on the desktop.

Page 305 of 499

6.3.1.3 Uninstallation of Software
The software can be uninstalled by selecting the uninstall option on the control panel Add or
Remove Programs.

6.3.2 Start and Exit

The Panel Studio program can be started by using the shortcut on the desktop or
selecting the program Panel Studio from the Start menu.
The program can be exit by simply closing the program X symbol on the top right corner of the
screen.

6.3.3 Project status

During design time, it is possible to check the current status of resources being used

“Image” means symbols used from graphics and symbol factory. These symbols are also
considered objects, so, if you add symbols, it also updates the quantity in objects.
For example, if the user adds 2 symbols and one rectangle object. Then, Images = 2, Objects = 3

Page 306 of 499

6.3.4 Create a new project
Open Panel Studio Software and select create a new project to create a new project.

Name: It is the Name of the Project. For example, CustomScreen_PR

Location: It is the path for project file storage.
Model: Select the Recorder Model No from the list. For ex: PR20
Width: It is pixels, resolution in dots available on X-axis
Height: It is pixels, resolution in dots available on Y-axis

Page 307 of 499

Author: Write author name/system integrator name for future reference
Version: It is for version management
Password: It is for user security of the project. The Project can be protected by assigning a password to
open the project.
Comments: It is for project management

After entering all the above details, click “OK” to create a new project.

6.3.5 Menu bar

The menu bar has below menus.

6.3.5.1 File

Page 308 of 499

 1. New Project: To create a new project
2. Open Project: To open an existing project
3. Close Project: To close the present project
4. Save Project: To save Project in the default path
5. Save Project As: Saves project in a selected path other than default path specified while
creating new project settings.
6. Screen: Create a new screen on the project.
7. Upload: To upload project from Recorder back to PC
8. HMI Update: This function will allow the user to update the clock, firmware, language on the
HMI. This function is available only for HMI.
9. Environment: This will allow the user to modify the project environment configurations.
10. Recently: It is to open recently opened projects
11. Exit: To exit from the current project

6.3.5.1.1 Environment

6.3.5.1.1.1 General

1. Language: Select the Language for the project environment. 20 languages are supported by
Panel Studio Software including English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Japanese, French, German, Italian, Polish, Spanish, Portuguese, Brazil
Portuguese, Russian, Thai, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Korean, Swedish, Turkish and
Greek.
2. Environment font: Select the font required for the design-time environment. Example: Menu,
Tool Box, Project explorer, function editor etc.
3. Project Path: Location to the storage of project files. Default project path: C:\Program
Files\Panel Studio\Demo Project
4. Graphic Path: Location of default basic Symbols. Default graphics path: C:\Program
Files\Panel Studio\Panel Studio\Basic Symbols
5. Security: This is to protect opening the software in specific Personal computer (Not for the
project). Once the password is entered, it is required to enter the password
correctly to open the software for the current session. This is useful in a factory
environment to prevent unauthorized users to open the software.

Page 309 of 499

Note: If the user needs a password for a specific project, click “Settings” in the project explorer, select
“General” tab, and then enter the Password.
In general, it is preferred to back up project files regularly in other standard storage media like CD,
DVD etc. It is recommended to store project files in separate folders on the D: drive instead of C: drive.
Developers may make a hard disk partition and save all project files in drives other than the location of the
operating system in the event that if there are problems with Operating system, it is still possible to retrieve
project files.

6.3.5.1.2 Download and Upload

Please refer to the section “Project tools” for more detailed information.

6.3.5.1.3 Snap and Grid

Used to define grid behaviour in the design-time environment.

1. Grid: Select this option and select “Show grid” if grids are to appear on the screen at
design time.
2. Snap lines: Select this option if grids are not required to appear in the screen at
design time.
3. Snap: Select this option if component coordinates should within grids all the time.

6.3.5.1.4 Object default setting

Define default font size, Fill color, Back color and Fore color for the properties of most of the
objects (label, Checkbox, Rectangle, Ellipse, Pie, Table, Dial, Level, Meter, Slider, Thermometer etc.).

Page 310 of 499

6.3.5.2 Edit

6.3.5.3 Format

1. Align: Used to align selected components, objects etc. for adjusting their position precisely in the
screen layout. Available options for selection are Center, Right, Left, Tops, middle & Bottom.
Example: Align two Labels to the left in Recorder screen.
Assume both labels are created in Screen1. Select both labels first using the mouse.
Alternatively, select the first label by left-clicking the mouse, then press “Ctrl” on the keyboard and select the
second label by left-clicking the mouse. Now, in Menu, click “Format”, then select “Align”, then select
“Left”.

Before Align adjustment

After Left Align adjustment

Page 311 of 499

 2. Make the Same Size: To adjust different objects to the same Width, Height, Both width and height,
Size to grid etc.
Example: Adjust five buttons to the same size i.e., height and width.
Create five buttons first. Then, select all these buttons via Mouse, then click “Format”, then
select “Make the same size”, then select “Both”

Before size adjustment

After Same Size adjustment

3. Horizontal spacing: It allows adjustment of horizontal spacing between any objects to make
Equal/Increase/Decrease/Remove.
For example, there are 3 buttons located at the bottom area of a page. Spaces between these
buttons are not equal and the screen does not look good. Select all the 3 buttons via Mouse or using “Ctrl”
on the keyboard along with the mouse. Then in the Menu bar, click “Format”, then select “Horizontal
spacing”, then select “Make equal”. Now, space between all these buttons has an equal distance.

Before Spacing adjustment

After Horizontal spacing adjustment

4. Vertical spacing: It allows adjustment of vertical spacing between any objects to make
Equal/Increase/Decrease/Remove

Before Spacing adjustment

Page 312 of 499

 After vertical spacing adjustment

5. Center in Page: It allows adjustment objects to the centre of the page horizontally and vertically.
For example, there are 3 buttons located on the screen. You wish to locate them in the centre of
the page horizontally. Select these buttons and apply this feature to adjust buttons as per requirement.
Before Center adjustment

After Center adjustment

6. Order
❖ Bring to back: Moves objects to the back
❖ Bring to Front: Moves objects to the front
For example, There is a Rectangle box and a label with different colours. If you wish to keep
label text in front of the Rectangle, select the Rectangle, choose the option, “Bring to Back” and for the

Page 313 of 499

label, choose the option “Bring to Front”, such that both are visible at the same time allowing overlapping of
two objects for clear display.

7. Lock Controls: It is to lock control for further development. Apply this for a second time to unlock
the control.

6.3.5.4 View

Select the required items to view in window layout.

1. Properties
If “properties” is checked as shown above, in the right side bottom of the screen layout, the
properties box will appear showing all the properties for the component/object that is selected.

Page 314 of 499

 In above example, a rectangle is drawn, and once it is selected, the right side bottom corner will
show all the properties for this specific rectangle if “properties” is checked in the View dropdown menu. It is
possible to modify the properties of the rectangle from the property grid. Alternatively, if you double click on
the rectangle, you will see a pop-up window where you can edit properties.

2. Output
If the output is selected in the View drop-down menu, this window appears just below the
screen working area. This window will display any errors that appear during the compilation of
the project.
In Menu, click “Tools”, then “Build”, or alternatively, on the “standard” bar, click the icon to
prepare the build for the application. The project will then compile. A summary is shown in the output
window as shown below.

3. Zoom
It is used to Zoom the current screen to various %, and it is useful during screen editing,
particularly if the screen size of the PC screen is small. If 200% is used and if the PC screen
size is small, then horizontal and vertical slider will appear automatically in screen to navigate
to other areas of the screen easily.

4. Fullscreen
It is to display full screen. After selection, the screen layout will be as shown below. To go
back, in the menu, click at “View” and then “Fullscreen” again
5. Reset window layout
Used to display the default screen layout showing the screen working area, toolbox, project
explorer, output window etc.

Ex: If the user deselects the “project explorer” in the View drop-down menu, then it will not show the
Project Explorer at the right side of the window layout. In this case, the user may select Project explorer
again in the View drop-down menu. Alternatively, in Menu, click “View”, then “Reset Window Layout”, then it
will reset all the view selections and show default window layout.

Page 315 of 499

6.3.5.5 Objects

More details about Basic objects, Enhanced objects, Symbol factory and Graphics are explained
in section “Tool Box”

If you would like to increase font size in the Menu bar, then, in the menu, click File, then click
“Environment” and then set font settings.

Page 316 of 499

6.3.5.6 Project

Above details are explained at section “Project Tools”

6.3.6 Standard bar

The standard bar has below tools.

✓ New Project
✓ Open Project
✓ Save Project
✓ Undo
✓ Redo
✓ Cut
✓ Copy
✓ Paste
✓ Delete
✓ Search
✓ Show Grid
✓ Align to Grid
✓ Build
✓ Offline Simulator
✓ Online Simulator
✓ Stop simulation
✓ Download

✓ Zoom Size
✓ Full screen

Page 317 of 499

6.3.7 Format bar
The Format bar has below tools.

✓ Bring to Front
✓ Bring to Back
✓ Lock the control
✓ Group
✓ Ungroup
✓ Align left
✓ Align centre
✓ Align right
✓ Align Top
✓ Align bottom
✓ Align middle
✓ Make the same width
✓ Make the same height
✓ Make the same size
✓ Size to grid
✓ Make horizontal spacing equal
✓ Increase horizontal spacing
✓ Decrease horizontal spacing
✓ Remove horizontal spacing
✓ Make vertical spacing equal
✓ Increase vertical spacing
✓ Decrease vertical spacing
✓ Remove vertical spacing
✓ Center vertically
✓ Center Horizontally

6.3.8 Project Explorer

The project explorer has the below options on the right side of the screen in software.

Page 318 of 499

6.3.8.1 Screen
This is to add a new screen to the project. It is possible to set screen into the following types
1. Page
2. Template
3. Popup
When a new project is created, screen1 (Page type) is created by default. It is not possible to
change screen1 to either template or popup. Screen1 (start page) should be “Page” type only.

How to add a new page

In Project Explorer, select “Screen1”, then right click your mouse. It will show the screen below.
Click “Add”, and Screen2 will be created and will appear as shown below.

Now, Select Screen1, then check its properties. For example, It is possible to change the
background colour of a screen from the page properties

Right-click mouse keeping the pointer on any page, then, user can edit screen properties via the
wizard.

Page 319 of 499

 It is possible either to open, delete or rename a screen. Select the appropriate screen in the
project explorer, then “Right-click” the mouse to show the above Screen dialogue.

Page 320 of 499

Note: These screen display names are the same as those available at project explorer. These are different
from the title bar (Text) defined for the screen.

❖ Properties
Back Color: Defines the background colour of a component.
❖ Events
Activated: Defines tasks to be executed before opening a Screen.
Deactivated: Defines tasks to be executed before closing a Screen.
❖ Screen Style
Page No: Displays the current page number.
Screen Height: Defines/Displays the current screen height.
Screen Width: Define/Display current screen width.
Template: Select the Template page for this screen.
Type: Defines the type of screen. Available options include Template, Page and Popup.

6.3.9 Toolbox
These can be accessed from the menu bar also from objects.

6.3.9.1 Basic Objects

It is to draw simple shapes on the screen, data entry, data display, alarms view etc.

There are three ways to insert the above objects into the screen.

i) Drag and drop.

ii) Select the object, say a line, then use the mouse to draw a line on the screen.
iii) Select the object, then double click (mouse left click) quickly by keeping the pointer on the selected
object. Then, the object will appear on the screen. For example, select “line” and Double click it 3
times by keep mouse pointer online, you can see 3 lines appear on the screen.

Page 321 of 499

 After inserting an object to screen, it is possible to edit its properties either by Graphical User
Interface (GUI) dialogue or editing properties directly in the property grid.

How to edit via GUI dialogue

Insert any object in a screen. Select the object, right-click the mouse, and then select
properties. Or
Insert any object in a screen. Double click on the Object. A GUI dialogue will open
automatically.

How to edit via the Property grid

By default, the property grid will appear at the bottom-right area of the screen editor. If it is not
available, click on the “View” drop-down menu, then click “Reset Window Layout”. The property grid will
appear at the bottom right side of the screen editor just below the Project Explorer.

Property grid

Before placing any objects in screens, check the section File- Environment and set default font size,
fill color, fore color and back color for the objects as shown below.

Page 322 of 499

6.3.9.1.1 Common Properties
Appearance
Back Color: Sets the background colour of the component.
Fore Color: Sets the Fore colour of the component.
Bevel: Used to set the border including inner border, outer border and style of the border.
Inner Border: True/False
Outer Border: True/False
Style
9 styles are available. They are None, Flat, Single, Double, Raised, Lowered, Double Raised,
Double Lowered, Frame Raised, and Frame Lowered

Behaviour
Visible: True/False, determines whether component/control is visible or hidden
Enable: This is for event control. If linked with a Digital tag, when the tag value =1 in run time,
events configured for the object will be executed. If the tag value = 0, events will be not executed

Data
Tag Binding: Select the Tag of the desired process value
Write design-time value: If selected, it writes the value available at “Text” in design time and in
run time replacing the default value defined at Tag data base.

Page 323 of 499

Design
Name: It is the name of the component.
Security level: Define the security level for the component.
Locked: True/False: It is to Move or Resize the component.
Layout
Dock: Defines which borders of the control are bound to the container.
Location: The coordinates of the upper-left corner of the component relative to the upper-left
corner of the container. Set X and Y position on the screen in pixels.
Size: Size of the component in pixels. Set the height and width of the component in pixels.
Pointer: It is to deselect the tool selection.

6.3.9.1.2 Function editor

This is very useful to select different functions to execute based on operator actions. During
Run time, this provides an easy way for an application developer to use a ready-made macro instead of
writing scripts. Insert a Button into any screen and configure events. The following functions are supported.

Page Control functions

Every screen has a screen number. The pointer will be the screen number for navigation.
GotoFirstPage: It is used to navigate from the current screen to the first screen
GotoPreviousPage: Used to navigate from the current screen to the previous screen
GotoNextPage: Used to navigate from the current screen to next screen
GotoLastPage: Used to navigate from the current screen to the Last screen
GotoPage: Used to navigate from the current screen to a specific screen by name
GotoPageByNumber: Used to navigate from the current screen to a specific page by number
GotoPopUp: Used to open specific pop up screens by name
ClosePopUp: Used to close pop up screens by name

Page 324 of 499

Tag functions

SetValuetoTag: Writes a value to a tag

Example: Set 90 to TagA when the operator presses on a button during run time.

AddValuetoTag: Used to add value to Tag

SubtractValuefromTag: Used to subtract value from Tag
CopyTagBtoTagA: Used to copy TagB value to TagA

AddTagBtoTagA: Used to add TagB to TagA and store result in TagA

SubtractTagBfromTagA: Used to subtract TagB from TagA and store the result in TagA.
SwapTagAforTagB: Used to swap TagB data with TagA
CopyStringTagBtoTagA: Used to copy the string type of TagB to TagA
SetStringtoTag: Used to write a string to a String type Tag

Page 325 of 499

CopyBlockfromTagBtoTagA: Used to copy a block of tags from TagB to Tag1

For example Copy 4 continuous tags from Tag5 to a target location starting with Tag1. Tag5 is
copied to Tag1, Tag6 is copied to Tag2, and so on.
Note: Maximum block size is limited to 80 tags

EditValuetoTag: Used to edit tag value during run time from a keypad. For example, if this
function is called from the button “clicked” event, then, a keypad will open
during run time and the user can enter a setpoint.
TurnBitOn: Used to turn on a bit.
If a momentary Turn on is required, then in “Clicked” action, select Turn On, then, in “Released”
action, select “Turn OFF”.
TurnBitOFF: Used to turn off a bit
Togglebit: Used to toggle the bit

Page 326 of 499

 If a button is not switching properly at the PLC, then, in the “General” tab, select the “Hold” checkbox
and enter the hold time. The default value is 50 msec. If required, adjust this to 100 msec. and check again
if the button is switching properly.

If the button is not switching properly at PLC, then, in General, Tab, select “Hold” checkbox and enter
the hold time. The default value is 50 msec. If required, adjust this to 100 msec. and check again.

Page 327 of 499

6.3.9.1.3 Line

Line: An object used to draw a line and do animation in Run time when linked with a Tag.
User can edit properties via GUI dialogue or property grid. After drag/drop of the object to a
screen, double click the object to open the GUI dialogue, or, select the object and directly enter properties
via the property grid available at the bottom right corner of the screen editor.

Page 328 of 499

General
Appearance
Line Width: Define the Line width
Direction: Horizontal or Vertical
Points
Point1: Define X and Y coordinate for the line starting point and they show current position.
Point2: Defines the X and Y coordinates for the line endpoint and shows the current position.
Tag Binding
Select a Tag to be linked with this line. This is useful if the animation is required.

Animation
This is to do animation online in Run Time
Movement
Select “Enable Move” checkbox if movement animation is required during Run time.

Start Position: Defines X and Y coordinates for the start position when the tag value is at its
minimum during Run Time.

End Position: Define X and Y coordinate for end position when the tag value is at its max.
During the run time.

Page 329 of 499

 The X position indicates movement from Left to Right, this is Horizontal movement. The Y
position indicates movement from Top to Bottom, this is Vertical movement.
For example: Recorder 7” (High Performance) project, 800 X 480 pixels, Normal
installation, Horizontal (Left to Right) = 800 pixels, Vertical (Top to Bottom) = 480 pixels
Enable move: Selected
Start position X = 0, Y = 0
End position X = 800, Y = 0
Tag Value, From = 0, Tag Value To = 100
Now, in Run time, when the Tag value = 0, the line will be at the Top left. When the
Tag value = 100, the position of the line will be at the Top Right
Size
Select “Enable Size” checkbox to enlarge/decrease the size of the component during Run time.

Start Size: Defines X and Y coordinates for the starting size when the tag value is at its
minimum during Run time.
End size: Define X and Y coordinate for end size when the tag value is max. Run time.

Tag Value
Select a Tag to be linked with this line. This is useful if the animation is required to be done on
the line.
Bands
This is to select various bands as part of animation during Run Time

Band Count
A maximum of 32 bands is available.
For example: In the above sample,
If the Tag value is 0 to 20, the line will be Yellow
If the Tag value is 21 to 80, then, line colour = Green
If the Tag value is above 80, line colour = Red

6.3.9.1.4 Polygon

Polygon: Used to draw a polygon. After finishing the drawing, double left-click the polygon using the
mouse to complete the Polygon. It is also possible to link a polygon to a tag and define some user-friendly
animation to appear during Run time.

Page 330 of 499

Page 331 of 499
Animation
This is to do animation with a Polygon in Run Time
Fill
Select “Enable Fill” if filling animation is required on a Polygon object during Run time.
When a tag value changes during Run time, it shows the polygon filling with a defined
colour inside the Polygon object. It’s like a bar graph where the filling is within the polygon
shape.
Start Fill: Defines a Start value for Fill
End Fill: Defines an End value for Fill

Movement
Used to define a movement position. This is the same as previously explained for the Line
object earlier.
Size
Used to define the amount of size increase/decrease. This is the same as previously
explained for the Line object earlier.
Tag Value
Select a Tag to be linked with the Polygon object. This is useful if the animation is required to be
done with the Polygon.

Band editor
A maximum of 32 bands is available.

For example: In the above sample,

If the Tag value is 0 to 20, Polygon fill colour = Yellow
If the Tag value is 21 to 80, then, Polygon fill colour = Green
If the Tag value is above 80, Polygon fill colour = RED
If required, it is also possible to configure the blink property and set blink colour for any band.

Page 332 of 499

6.3.9.1.5 Rectangle
Rectangle: Used to draw a Rectangle and do animation during Run time when linked with a Tag.

Animation Supported: Fill, Movement and Size

The above features are the same as explained for Line and Polygon objects

Page 333 of 499

Band editor
A maximum of 32 bands is available.

For example: In the above sample,

If the Tag value is 0 to 20, Rectangle fill colour = Yellow
If the Tag value is 21 to 80, then, Rectangle fill colour = Green
If the Tag value is above 80, Rectangle fill colour = Red
If required, it is also possible to configure blink property and set blink colour for any band.

6.3.9.1.6 Ellipse
Ellipse: Used to draw an Ellipse or a circle and do animation during Run time when linked with a Tag.

Page 334 of 499

Animation Supported: Fill, Movement and Size
The above features are the same as explained for Line and Polygon objects.

Band editor
A maximum of 32 bands is available.
For example: In above the sample,
If the Tag value is 0 to 20, Ellipse fill colour = Yellow
If the Tag value is 21 to 80, then, Ellipse fill colour = Green
If the Tag value is above 80, Ellipse fill colour = Red
If required, it is also possible to configure blink property and set blink colour for any band.

Page 335 of 499

6.3.9.1.7 Arc

Arc: Used to draw an Arc and do animation during Run time when linked with a Tag.

Start Angle: Defines the start angle. Sweep Angle: Defines the end angle

Supported Animation: Movement and Size

Band editor
A maximum of 32 bands is available. Band editor for “Arc” is the same as explained for the
“Line” object earlier.

Page 336 of 499

6.3.9.1.8 Table
It is used to draw a table during design time by specifying the number of rows & columns. All
rows/columns will have equal width and height. It is possible to place labels on rows (Linked with Tags) for
displaying process values to appear like a tabular column. User can edit properties via the GUI dialogue or
Property grid as per convenience. After dragging/dropping the object to the screen, double click on the
object to open GUI dialogue.

While working with a Table, in page properties, select Snap to Grid = False so that it will be easy to
place labels/textboxes in required positions easily.

Drag and Drop Table from Basic objects to the screen, then double click on Table. The following
screen will open.

Note: Deselect “The same Width” to adjust column width in the Table
Note: Deselect “Same Height” to adjust Row height in the Table

Property grid

Page 337 of 499

Properties
Back Color: It is the back colour of the table
Fore Color: It is the colour for the lines of the table
Line Width: It is the width of the lines of the table
Columns: Defines the number of columns in the table
Rows: Defines the number of rows in the table
Name: The unique name for the table in a specific page
Locked: Used to determine if the table is locked for further moving and resize in design time
and the user can set this in the property grid.

6.3.9.1.9 Numeric Up/Down

Numeric Up/Down is a Graphical User Interface widget that allows the user to increase or
decrease the value of a tag by pressing up or down arrows during Run time, or to enter a numeric value
directly via a keypad. Users can edit properties via GUI dialogue or Property grid for convenience. After
drag/drop of a numeric up/down object to the screen, double click on the object to open GUI dialogue.
Every Numeric Up/Down button should be linked with an Analog Tag.

Except the Up/Down arrow, if a user presses another area of the Numeric Up/Down component in
the recorder during Run time, a numeric keypad will open. The user can then enter a numeric value directly.
The numeric keypad will not appear in the PC during Online/Offline simulation, the user can use the
keyboard directly to enter a numeric value.

Increment
Select the value to be incremented/ decremented each time when the up/down arrow is pressed
during Run time.

Page 338 of 499

Properties
Write design-time value: If selected, it writes value available at “Text” during design time and
also during run time replacing the default value defined in the Tag
database.
Rounding: Rounds to the nearest value
Decimal: Enter the number of decimal points
Value: Current Tag value. It is used to enter a value during design time and to check how value
is displayed during Run time.
Increment: Value to be incremented during Run time after pressing the Up/Down button.
Minimum: Defines the minimum value
Maximum: Defines the maximum value

Soft keyboard
If enabled, it is possible to control the keypad appearance during run time. For example, if the
alignment is selected as Middle center, then, when keypad appears in run time, it will be located to Middle
center in screen

Events
Defines events to be executed when the operator presses the Up/Down arrow and changes the
value during Run time.

6.3.9.1.10 Digital LED

This object is used to view a process value in a digital format. Generally, it is linked with an
analog type tag (example: an analog input tag at a PLC, which is received as 4-20 mA signals from field
transmitters to define things like Temperature, Pressure, Flow, Level, Position etc...)

Page 339 of 499

 For common properties like Back Color, Bevel, etc., please refer section “Common Properties

Property grid

Properties
Back Color: Defines background color for the component
Inner border: Select if the inner border is required for the component
Outer border: Select if the outer border is required for the component
Style: Defines border style. Available options are Single, Double, Raised, Lowered, Double
Raised, Double Lowered, Frame Raised and Frame Lowered
Active Color: Defines Active Color of Segment for Digits

Page 340 of 499

 Inactive Color: Defines the color of inactive segments. In the seven-segment LED display,
some segments may be active and some other segments may be inactive
depending on numeric values.
Digit Height: Defines the height of digits
Digit Width: Define the width of digits
Digit Space: Defines the space between digits
Segment Space: Defines the space between segment to segment for digits
Segment Thickness: Defines the thickness of segments for digits
Decimals: Defines the number of decimal points
Tag Binding: Selects the Analog Tag of process value

6.3.9.1.11 Digital Box

Digital Box is a Graphical User Interface widget that displays a digital tag value along with four
predefined labels as attributes for the process value in Run time.

Digital Boxes are normally used with Analog tags to display process values like Temperature,
Pressure, and Flow etc. They also allow 4 different labels as attributes for displaying tag related
information.

Page 341 of 499

Properties

Attribute1: attribute to be displayed at Top left side of Digital Box

Attribute2: attribute to be displayed at Top Right side of Digital Box
Attibute3: attribute to be displayed at Bottom Left side of Digital Box
Attibute4: attribute to be displayed at Bottom Right side of Digital Box
Attribute font: Define font for the attribute, select type font, and size of font and style of font.
Styles include Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline, and Strikeout.
Back color: Defines background-colour
Fore Color: Define fore-colour for the font
Decimal: Defines the number of decimal places for the value to be displayed
Value font: Used to adjust the size of the display process value font, select type of font, size of
font and style of font. Styles include Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline and Strikeout.

6.3.9.1.12 Text box

Used to Read/Write Alphanumeric text in Run time. It can be linked with any type of tag.

If the object is linked with String type tag, an alpha-numeric keypad opens during Run time if a
user touches the object. If the object is linked with an Analog or Digital tag, a numeric keypad opens during
Run time if a user attempts to touch the object. If a digital tag is used, make sure “decimal” is set to 0.
Alphanumeric keypad

Page 342 of 499

Numeric keypad

Note: For common properties of all components, please check the beginning of this section.
Write design-time value: If selected, it writes the value available at “Text” during design time
and also during run time replacing the default value defined in the Tag
database.

Soft keyboard: If enabled, it is possible to control the keypad appearance during run time. For
example, if “alignment” is selected as the Middle centre, then, when the keypad
appears during run time, it will be located in the middle-centre of the screen

Page 343 of 499

6.3.9.1.13 Label
The “Label” object is used to write a simple line of text for user information on the screen.
Example: Tag name, Pump number display etc. It is also used to display process values (read-only) to
operators if linked with a Tag.

Page 344 of 499

Note: For common properties of all the components, please check the beginning of this section.
Properties
Text: Defines text associated with this component and it should be entered at design time only.

Text Align: It is for Alignment of text. Available options include Top Left, Top Center, Top Right,
Middle Left, Middle Center, Middle Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Center and Bottom
Right
Text Font: Defines font for the text including the type of font, size of font and style of font. Styles
include Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline and Strikeout.
Tag Binding: Select the Analog Tag of a process value
Decimal: Defines the number of decimal points

6.3.9.1.14 Date and time Label

Used to display Date and Time in the screen.

Page 345 of 499

 If date and time are required in more than one screen, it is better to create a screen and
select the screen type as “Template”, and then link this template to all other required screens to display
Date and Time automatically. This is more efficient than keeping Date and Time label in more than one
screen since it uses less memory.

6.3.9.1.15 Button

A Button is commonly used to perform an action after the operator presses it with their finger, or
by clicking using a mouse during Run time.
Generally, “Button” is used to turn ON a bit, Turn OFF a bit etc. when used with Digital type tags.
Example: Start Pump, Stop pump etc.
Three kinds of “Events” are supported for a button. Clicked, Pressed and Released. Several
functions are supported which can be configured from “Events” and all the functions are covered in the next
section “Function editor”.

Page 346 of 499

Properties
Back Color: Selects Back colour for the object. Also, it is possible to select a transparent mode
if required.

Text: Defines the required text to be displayed on the object. It is also possible to enter the
multiline text from firmware V1.20 onwards

Show select: True/False. If it is selected, then, when the operator presses this button, it will
show a dotted line just inside the button. When the operator presses another
button, it automatically shows the selected “show” status to the latest button and
deselects “select” status for the previous button pressed by the operator.
Border Style: Defines border style. Available options include none, fixed single and fixed 3D
Image: Selects the Image to be displayed on the object. The image can be selected from either
Basic symbols or Symbol factory, or a custom image can be used if they are formatted
as BMP, WMF, jpg, gif or png.

Page 347 of 499

 Text font: Define the font including the name of the font, size of font and style of font

Timing: This is an advanced feature and used to make sure operator action is properly received
by PLC when the PLC has a large scan time.
Hold time: This is generally applicable for a “Clicked” event. This keeps executing the action
defined at the “Clicked” event for the time defined at hold time. We suggest using
holding time greater than the PLC scan time. Example: 300 msec.
Example:
Push-button Function

Example: Operator presses button for only 200msec. When the operator clicks the button,
Tag1=1. When operator releases the button, Tag1 = 0, holding time = 1000 msec.
Since holding time is set for a clicked action, the released action “TurnBitOff” will be executed
only after completing 1000 msec, not immediately after the operator releases the button. In this case, if the
PLC scan time is 800 msec, the operator click action will be detected properly because the button will
remain active for 1000 msec.

Page 348 of 499

 Auto Repeat & Interval time: This is generally applicable for a “Pressed” event. It is to repeat
the action defined at the “Pressed” event as per the set interval
time.

Example: When the operator keeps the button pressed, the setpoint should be incremented by
1 for every 1 second.

Auto-repeat with time interval and holding time cannot be used together.

Tag binding: Select the tag that should be linked to the button to show a different display during
run time based on configuration available at Band editor. Any of the configured
Analog or Digital tags can be selected.

If Tag1 is an Analog Type (32 bit), it is also possible to show a different display based on
individual bits. By default, it is disabled. You can select the bit from the combo box and then configure the
band editor per project requirements.

Page 349 of 499

 Bands: Defines bands for the button.
Back color: Defines the back color for the selected band
Fore color: Defines the forecolour to appear for the selected band in run time
Text: Define the text to be displayed for the selected band in run time
Visible: Controls if the button is visible
Blink: Select if blink is required when the tag value reaches a selected band during run time. If
yes is selected, it allows the user to enter a blinking colour.
Bitmap file: Select the image to be displayed on the button when the tag value reaches this
band in run time.
For example, When Tag1=0, shows Red coloured motor symbol on the button. When Tag1=1,
shows Green coloured motor symbol on the button.
Note: Two different symbols are required for the above example
Bmp, WMF, jpg, gif and png types are supported. If the selected file is different than WMF, then,
it is also possible to select Image layout and transparent options.

From File browser: To select the image from a specified location

From Basic Symbol: To select images from the free basic symbols (*.wmf format) available in
Recorder editing software.
From symbol factory: It allows the user to select symbols from the symbol factory (in WMF
format).
Image layout: None, centre and Stretch options are available. Stretch means the selected
bitmap will be stretched to the size of the button.
Note: If the bitmap has poor resolution when stretch is used, it may show a low-quality image in
the screen.
Flip: Used to flip a button. This needs to be configured during design time. Available options
include None, Horizontal, Vertical and Both.
Rotation: Used to rotate the button at predefined angles. This needs to be configured during
design time. Available options include 0O, 90O, 180O and 270O.
Value: Defines the maximum range of the selected band. The low range will be the value
defined at the previous band. There is no need to enter any value for band 1 as its value
is 0 which is low range.

If the button is linked with a Digital Tag, then, in the band editor, it will show only two bands for value 0
and 1. When a button is linked with an Analog tag, it is possible to configure up to 32 bands for showing
different states of the button based on the value of the tag. It shows statuses similar to the word lamp.

Page 350 of 499

 Security control: Defines the security level for the button. It allows the user to operate the
button only when the operator security level is equal to or more than the
security level defined here. Please refer section “Security” at Project explorer
for more information about security features.
Events
Clicked: Define the action that happens when the user presses the button during Run time. If
required, it is possible to configure a holding time for this action.

Holding time is a very useful function. If the PLC has a large scan time, sometimes the operator
“clicked” action will be not detected by the PLC. In this case, it is possible to have a hold time for a “clicked”
event so that operator action will be continuously present for the time defined at “holding”, such that the PLC
will receive the operator action properly.

If the operator touches a button and releases his/her finger instantly, it is called a “Clicked” action.
During this time, a total of three actions will be executed. Click, Pressed and Released

Case-1
Holding time = 0
In the above example, Tag1 value becomes 3

Case-2
Holding time = 5000m sec
In the above example, if the scan time for Tag1 is 1000m sec, the Tag1 value becomes approximately 8.

Page 351 of 499

When the button is clicked, the “Clicked” and “Pressed” event action occurs, and the Tag1 value becomes
2. Since the holding time is 5 sec, for the next 5 seconds, the Tag1 value is incremented by 1 each second.
So, Tag1 value becomes 7. When the button is released, Tag1 value is incremented by 1 again, so it
becomes 8. The above example is for illustration only to understand events for the button object.
Pressed: Define the action that happens when a user continuously presses on a button. If
required, it is possible to configure Auto-repeat and interval time for this action.

Once an operator touches a button, the “clicked” event will be executed first. If the operator keeps
holding the button continuously, the “pressed” action will continuously be executed. When the operator
releases their finger, the “released” action will be executed.
Auto-repeat: On, Time interval=1000 msec. In this example, the Tag1 value will first increment
by 1, then it will keep incrementing by 1 once every 1000 msec. as long as the operator presses the button.
The Tag1 value will also be incremented by 1 when the operator releases the button.
Released: Defines the action when the user releases the button
Switch Function
With this function, two buttons are required. One button to turn a tag ON, and a second button to
turn a tag OFF.

When the operator clicks Button1, Tag1 will = 1. Now, Tag1 will = 1 even after the operator
releases the button, and it will continue to maintain its earlier state. When the operator clicks Button2, Tag1
will = 0.

6.3.9.1.16 Bit lamp

A bit lamp is used to show the digital input status for the operator. It is linked with either a digital
input tag or an Analog input tag. By using the band editor, it is possible to display a different foreground
colour, different background colour, different text, different symbols, different Blink colour, and control
visibility when the Tag value is 0 or 1.

Page 352 of 499

 When a Bit lamp is linked with a digital tag, it has only two bands by default. The Band1 value is
0 and the Band 2 value is 1.
For example: If Tag1 = 0, shows Red coloured background with an Orchid colour blink. If
Tag9=1, show green coloured background.

GUI Wizard

Page 353 of 499

 Bitmap file: Select the image to be displayed when the tag value reaches this band in run time.

For example: When Tag1=0, shows Red coloured motor symbol. When Tag1=1, shows Green
coloured motor symbol
Note: Two different symbols are required for the above
Bmp, WMF, jpg, gif and png types are supported. If the selected file is other than WMF, then it is
also possible to select Image layout and transparent options.

From File browser: Allows the user to select images in formats of BMP, WMF, jpg, gif and png
From Basic Symbol: Allows the user to select WMF format images from basic symbols
From symbol factory: Allows for selecting symbols from symbol factory in .wmf format
Image layout: None, centre and Stretch options are available. Stretch means the selected
bitmap will be fixed to the size of the bit lamp
Note: If the bitmap has poor resolution when stretch is used, it may show a low-quality image in
the screen.
Flip: Used to flip bit lamp and needs to be configured during design time. Available options
include None, Horizontal, Vertical and Both.
Rotation: Used to rotate a bit lamp in predefined angles and needs to be configured at design
time. Available options include 0 O, 90 O, 180 O and 270 O
Circle: By default, a bit lamp object shape is in Rectangle. Select this if you wish to change the
bit lamp shape to a circle. It is more useful to show the status of digital inputs for the
operator during Run time.
How to show the status of an individual bit in Analog type tag
Sometimes, you will get a 16 bit/32 bit tag from a PLC with different diagnostic information, and
you would like to show 16 bit/32 bit lamps in the Recorder screen.
When a Bit lamp is linked with an Analog tag, for example, Int16/Int32, it has two bands. By
default, Band1 value is 0 and the Band 2 value is 1. In this case, using each bit lamp, it is possible to show
the status of each individual bit status within 32 bits as per configuration available at band editor.

Page 354 of 499

In the above figure, Tag2 is an analog type (4 bytes), so, a TagBitNo combo box will appear for the
selection of the required bit within 32 bits (0 to 31).
If Tag2 is Digital type tag, then, TagBitNo. The combo box is not visible.

6.3.9.1.17 Word lamp

Word lamps are similar to Bit lamps but linked with an Analog type tag only. It can have many
bands. By using the band editor, it is possible to display a different foreground colour, different background
colour, different text, different symbols, different Blink colour, and control visibility when Tag values change
values during Run Time.

For example: Tank Level indicator

When Tag1 value is
0 to 10, Text = Low Low Level, Color = Yellow Blinking
11 to 20, Text = Low Level, Color = Yellow Background
21 to 80, Text = Normal, Color = Green back ground
81 to 90, Text = High level, Color = Red back ground
91 to 100, Text = High High Level, Color = Red blinking
Create 5 bands as shown

GUI Wizard/Dialog

Page 355 of 499

Band1 range = 0 to value defined at band2-1. i.e., 0 to 10

Band2 range: Band 2 value to Band3 value-1 i.e., 11 to 20

Band3 range: Band 3 value to Band4 value-1 i.e., 21 to 80

Page 356 of 499

Band4 range: Band 4 value to Band5 value-1 i.e., 81 to 90

Band5 range: More than or equal to the value defined at band 5 (In this case number of bands=5) i.e.,
greater than 91

6.3.9.1.18 CheckBox
The Checkbox (or tick box) is a graphical user interface widget that permits the user to make
multiple selections from a number of options during run time.

Every checkbox is linked with a single Digital tag from the Tag Database. In the above white
box, normally, white space means Not selected, False, Tag Value = 0 Tick mark means, True, Tag value =
1
A caption describing the meaning of the checkbox is normally shown adjacent to the checkbox.
Inverting the state of a checkbox is done by touching with a finger or clicking the mouse on the box, or on
the caption.

Page 357 of 499

Properties
Write design-time value: If selected, it overwrites the default value defined in the tag database.
Checked: Default setting, available options True/False
For example: Tag1 is linked with Checkbox 1. If Checked, the tag = False, that means Tag1=0.
If Checked, the tag = True, then Tag1 = 1.
Text: It is Text that appears near Checkbox as a caption. Example: Text = P101
Events
Changed: Define action using function editor. When the operator presses on checkbox during
Run time, the actions defined here will be executed.
Example: There are three pumps named P101, P102 and P103, and the operator would like to select pump
P101 for the start-up. Using the checkbox, write a meaningful caption via the “TEXT” property to appear at
the right side of checkbox, and link each of the above checkboxes with appropriate Tags. Let’s say P101,
P102 and P103. Then, when P101 is selected by the operator in run time, P101 Tag value will become 1.

If “checked” = false is selected during design time, then Tag value will = 0. If the operator presses on
checkbox during Run time, the symbol ✓ will appear, and the Tag value will become 1.
If “checked” = True is selected during design time, the Tag value will = 1, and the ✓appears
during Run time. If the operator presses the checkbox during design time, the symbol ✓disappears and the
Tag value becomes 0.

If you are unable to select the required selection using the checkbox in Run time, please perform
touch screen calibration.

If Checkbox is linked with an Analog type Tag, then, it is possible to select an individual bit.

Page 358 of 499

6.3.9.1.19 Combo box

A combo box is a commonly-used graphical user interface widget. It is a combination of a drop-

down list or list box and a single-line textbox, allowing the user to choose from the list of existing options in
Run time. Generally, it is linked with an Analog tag. Based on the selection, the value of the tag will be
changed, and it can be used in Logic at PLC.

It saves space in the Recorder screen by allowing the operator to select the option only when it
is required by touching the down arrow at the right side of the Combo box.
Every Combo box is linked with a single Analog tag from properties.

Page 359 of 499

Note: Do not keep any empty space between different text entries, otherwise, unpredictable results may
occur.
Property grid

Properties
Button Width: Defines the width of a Button. It modifies the width of the down arrow at the right
side of the combo button.
Items: Defines all the available options during design time.
For example, there are 7 options available to select a process. Tag1, an analog tag, is linked to
Combo box1 Now, If Option A is selected, then during Run time, Tag1 value will = 0, If Option B is
selected, then Tag1 value will = 1 …. ….. If Option G is selected, then Tag1 value will = 6
Events
Changed: Defines an action using function editor. When the operator presses on a combo box

To increase up/down arrow size on the combo box, increase the size of the text font.

Page 360 of 499

6.3.9.1.20 List box

A list box is a Graphical User Interface widget that allows the user to select a single item from a
list of available items. The available options are entered during Design time and they are available for
selection during Run Time. On selection, it writes a value to a Tag based on the order number. Every List
Box should be linked with an Analog tag.
GUI Wizard/dialogue

Note: Do not keep any empty space between different text entries, otherwise, unpredictable results may
occur.
Property Grid

Page 361 of 499

Properties
Scroll Bar Width: Defines the width of the scroll bar that appears on Right side of the List box.
Items: Define all the available options in design time.
For example, there are 6 options available to select a process. Tag1, an analog tag, is linked to
List box1 Now, If “Select A” is selected, then Tag1 value will = 0 If “Select B” is selected, then Tag1 value
will = 1 …. ….. If “Option G” is selected, then Tag1 value will = 5

Events
Changed: Define actions using function editor. When the operator presses on list box item in
Run time, the actions defined here will be executed.

6.3.9.1.21 Group Panel

Used to group objects in a screen.
Procedure
 Click on “Group Panel” at Basic Objects
 On-Screen, just draw a rectangle with your mouse over the objects that you would like to group
together. It will appear as shown below:

 Now, double click on Group Panel object

 Select “Group Controls” checkbox and click “OK”

Now, you will be able to move grouped objects to another location or rescale them to fit another
screen size etc.

Page 362 of 499

 Group Controls: Select the checkbox to apply the group function. De-select the checkbox for
ungrouping

6.3.9.2 Enhanced Objects

Fine components are available for User interface and display. The components include Dial,
Digital LED, Level, Meter, Slider, Switch, Thermometer and Toggle.

6.3.9.2.1 Common Properties

Appearance
Back Color: Set the background colour of the component.
Bevel: Used to set border including inner border, outer border and style of the border.
Inner Border: True/False
Outer Border: True/False
Style: 9 styles are available
None, Flat, Single, Double, Raised, Lowered, Double Raised, Double lowered, Frame
Raised, Frame Lowered.
Behaviour
Visible: True/False. Determines whether the control is visible or hidden.
Enable: This is for event control. If linked with a Digital tag, if the tag value =1 during run time,
events configured for the object will be executed. If tag value = 0, events will be not
executed
Data
Tag Binding: Select the Analog Tag of process value
Write design-time value: If selected, the value entered here during design time will be replaced
by the default value defined in the tag database.

Design
Name Label1, It is the name of the component. Every component will have a UNIQUE number
on a page. If more than one Label is available on the same page, the number will be
incremented automatically. The user can also change the name of this component if
required. Component “Name” property is very useful and it can be used in scripts also.

Example: Task: Change Label1 “back” color to blue during Run time when Tag1 is equal to 1.
if(Tag1 == 1)
{
Screen1.Label1.BackColor=Color. Blue;
}

Screen1: It is the location of Label1

Label1: Object name
BackColor: Property of Label related to background-colour
Colour.Blue: Target Color
If the above script is executed in scheduler once per second, then when Tag1 = 1, the back colour for
Label1 will change to Blue during Run time.

Properties are case sensitive.

BackColor: OK
Backcolor: Not OK

Page 363 of 499

 Security Level: Define the security level for the component to be used by the operator. If the
operator security level is less than the security level defined for component, it
will not allow the operator to operate the component.
Locked: True/False: It is to Move or Resize the component.
Layout
Dock: Defines which borders of the control are bound to the container.
Location: The coordinates of the upper-left corner of the component relative to the upper-left
corner of the container. Set X and Y position on the screen in pixels.
Size: Size of the component in pixel. Set the height and width of the component in pixels.
Position: It is the defined position of Label, Value etc., for some components. Available options
include None, Top Left, Bottom Right, Both and Internal.

Position naming convention for components

For example Level component, Label Position = Bottom Right
If Orientation is Vertical, the Label will be displayed on the right side of the component.
If Orientation is Horizontal, the Label will be displayed on the bottom side of the component.

6.3.9.2.2 Level
Levels are normally used to display a process parameter value in several steps. Generally, it is
linked with Analog type tag (Analog input type tag at PLC, which is received as 4-20 mA signal from field
transmitters like Ear level transmitters (sound detectors in ball mills, etc.).

Page 364 of 499

Properties
Back Color: Defines the background color for the component.
Labels Position: Define the label position. Available options are Top Left, Bottom Right and
Both. Naming convention depends on orientation. If orientation = Vertical,
then, if “Top left” is selected, the label position will be shown on the “Left” side.
If orientation = Horizontal, then if “Top Left” is selected, the label position will
be shown on the “Top” side of the component.
Orientation: Vertical/Horizontal. Select direction.
Text Font: Used to set the font of the label. Options include Name of Font, Size of font and
style of font. Supported styles include Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline & Strikeout.
Bevel: Defines inner border and outer border for the component. Please refer to common
properties at the beginning of this section for more details.
Decimals: Define the number of decimals to be displayed for value to be displayed along with
level component in run time.
Tag Binding: Selects the Analog Tag of the process value.

Ticks:
Ticks Position: Define Ticks Position. Available options include Top Left, Bottom Right, Both
and None.
Ticks length: Define the length of Ticks in pixels.
Scale:
Scale divisions: Define the number of Big Ticks in the Level graph.
Scale Sub Divisions: Define the number of ticks between two big ticks.
Scale Label Divisions: Define the number of Labels to be displayed. Example: If Scale label
division = 5, Scale = 0-100, then, it display labels as 0, 20, 40, 60, 80 &
100.
Scale Width: Define Scale width. If ticks are selected to display on both directions, this is the
defined width between two scales on both sides.
Bar
Bar Width: Define the width of the Bar graph.
Divisions: Define the number of divisions (Like bricks) to appear in Bar graph.
Space: Define Space between divisions (bricks) in pixels.

Page 365 of 499

 Maximum: This is the max range of the process value (analog input tag)
Minimum: This is the minimum range of Process Value (analog input tag)
Example: If an Ear Level transmitter range is 0 to 100, set Minimum = 0, Maximum = 100.
Reverse Scale: True/False. If it is selected, then, zero will be on the bottom side and 100 will be
at the top side for vertical orientation.
Step: This is the minimum value to reflect the change in the Bar graph position. Bar Step and
Bar division settings are closely related. If Bar divisions = 50 for a scale value of 0-100,
then, if Step=2, when process value changes by value 2, it shows level value change
clearly in level graph.
Value: Used to enter a process value during design time and to check the bar graph display on
the PC. It requires the operator to enter a value in multiples of the step value.
Otherwise, it is automatically rounded to the closest multiple of the step value.
Is Indicator only: If this is selected, the level graph is used for “Read” purposes only. If it is not
selected, you can use a level graph for write purposes similar to the slider to
send a setpoint from the Recorder to a PLC etc. Just use the finger to touch at
various places in Level graph to set the level required.
Value Position: Define the position of process value to be displayed during Run time along next
to the Level graph. Available options include None, Top Left, Bottom Right and
Both.

Sections colors: It is configured bands for the sections to show different colours for Labels and
Ticks in the Level graph.
Example: Three bands
Section 1, Max % = 60 means, its band is from 0 to 60 %, and it will show labels and ticks in black colour.
Section 2, Max % = 80 means its band is from 61 to 80 %.
Section 3, Max % = 100 means its band is from 81 to 100 %.

Page 366 of 499

Note: Band setting is in % for the total Scale defined (Minimum to maximum).

Active Color Section: Defines the active colour for the process value band. For example: If a
process value range is 0-100, set different bands in % for the process
value, and define colours to appear within the level Bar graph during
Run Time.
When the process value is between 0 and 50 % of scale, display bricks in Lime colour.
When the process value is between 51 and 80 % of scale, display bricks in Yellow colour
When the process value is between 81 and 100 % of scale, display bricks in Red colour.

Configuration from Property grid

Click the “ColorSection Array and the following screen will appear. Then, set all the bands and
colours.

Inactive Color Section: Define Inactive colours for process value bands the same as above.
Generally, light colours are selected for Inactive colours and dark
colours with more contrast are selected for Active colours. This way,
users/operators will be able to differentiate between active and inactive
colours easily.

Page 367 of 499

 Events: It is to trigger functions/jobs to be executed when the process value of tag linked with
Level bar graph is changed during run time.

6.3.9.2.3 Meter
A Meter is a component generally used to display process values like pressure, Temperature,
Flow etc. Generally, it is linked with an Analog tag (Analog input type tag at PLC, which is received as 4-20
mA signal from field transmitters like Temperature, pressure, etc...)

Page 368 of 499

Properties
Back colour: It is to set a background colour for the Meter.
Pointer Color: It is to set pointer Color.
Bevel: It is to set border including inner border, outer border, and style of the border.
Inner Border: True/False
Outer Border: True/False
Style: 9 styles are available
None, Flat, Single, Double, Raised, Lowered, Double Raised, Double lowered, Frame Raised,
and Frame Lowered.
Text Font: Used to set the font for the label including Name of Font, Size of font and style of
font. Supported styles include Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline & Strikeout.
Tag Binding: Select the Analog Tag of the process value.

Labels:
LabelsCount: Number of labels to be displayed around the Meter.
Example: Pressure transmitter range 0-100 bar
Label count =10 Around the Meter, you will see labels marked with 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80,
90 and 100.
LabelsRadius: It is to set the radius of Labels to be displayed around the Meter.
LabelsVisible: True/False, it is to set visibility for the label

Pointer

Page 369 of 499

 External Pointer Radius: It is used to set an external pointer Radius, define end position.
Internal pointer Radius: It is used to set the Internal Pointer Radius, defines start position.
Pointer Size: It is to set pointer Size in pixels.
Pointer Type: It is setpointer type. Available types include Triangle, Circle and Line.

Ticks
Ticks Count: Set the number of ticks between labels.
Ticks Length: Set Tick length in pixels.
Ticks Radius: Set Tick Radius
Ticks subdivision counts: Set Tick sub division counts
Ticks Visible: True/False, Set Ticks visibility
Center
Width: Adjust the width of the meter within boundaries.
Height: Adjust the height of meter within boundaries. This is useful when a half-circle meter is
required. The meter needs to be adjusted to the centre as shown below.

Circles

Border circle Color: Set border color for circle.

Circle Color: Set Color for circle.
Circle Radius: Set Radius for circle.

Note: If Border circle colour is the same as the back colour, then the circle will not be visible.

Page 370 of 499

Angles & Scale
Maximum: This is the maximum range of the Process Value (an Analog input Type Tag).
Minimum: This is the minimum range of Process Value (Analog input Type Tag).
Example: If pressure transmitter range is 0 to 100 bar, set Minimum = 0, Maximum = 100.
Start Angle: It is the start angle for the Range low (Analog input)
End Angle: It is the end angle for the Range high (Analog input)
Reverse Scale: It is to set scale direction in Meter
False: Anti-Clockwise
True: Clockwise

Reverse Scale = True

For example: If you want 00 (Left) to 180O (Right) Meter for Process value range 0-100, set the
following.
Start Angle: 0 , End Angle: 180O and Reverse Scale = True.
O

Behaviour
Step: It is the minimum value to reflect the change of pointer position in Meter.
For example: By default, Step = 0, i.e., the pointer moves its position in the Meter in Real-time
even with a minor change in process value.
For example Step = 5, i.e., the pointer moves its position on the Meter in Real-time in steps of 5.
Value: It is used to enter process value in design time and check pointer position in PC.
Indicator only: By default, it should be selected so that the meter will be used for Reading
purposes only. If it is not selected, then you can use the Meter for Write purpose
similar to a Slider to send a setpoint from the Recorder to a PLC etc. Just use
your finger and move the pointer to change the setpoint.
Write design-time value: If selected, it writes design-time value instead of default value
defined at the tag database.

Page 371 of 499

Sections colours
It is to configure bands for the sections to show different colours for Labels and Ticks in Meter.
Example: Three bands
Section 1, Max % = 60. That means its band is from 0 to 60%. It shows labels and ticks in black colour.

Section 2, Max% =80 that means, its band is from 61 to 80 %.

Section 3, Max % = 100 that means, its band is from 81 to 100 %.

Note: Band setting is in % for the total Scale defined (Minimum to maximum).

6.3.9.2.4 Slider
This is normally used to change the setpoint of a process by the operator from the Recorder
during Run time. Generally, it is linked with an analog tag (analog output type tag at PLC, to send 4-20 mA
signal out from PLC to external Controllers, Variable speed drives, etc.).

In the above figure, Scale divisions = 10 (Big ticks).Scale sub divisions = 5 (Small ticks between
big ticks). Scale Label divisions = 10 (0, 10, 20 till 100).

Page 372 of 499

Properties
Back color: Back colour for the component.
Active bar color: Define active bar color.
Slider bar color: Define border colour for the slider.
LED color: Color of the handle
Inactive bar color: Define inactive bar colour.
LabelsPosition: Define Label position. Available options include Top Left, Bottom Right, Both,
Internal and None.
Orientation: Horizontal/Vertical. This is the orientation of the slider component. In the above
figure, it is in the Horizontal position.
Slide size: Define the height and width of the slider.
Text Font: It is to set the font for the label including Name of Font, Size of font and style of font.
Supported styles include Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline & Strikeout.
Bevel: It is to set a border including inner border, outer border and style of the border.
Inner Border: True/False
Outer Border: True/False
Style: 9 styles are available
None, Flat, Single, Double, Raised, Lowered, Double Raised, Double lowered, Frame Raised,
and Frame Lowered.
Tag Binding: Select the Analog Tag of the process value.

Page 373 of 499

Ticks:
Ticks Position: Define ticks position. Available options include Top Left, Bottom Right, Both,
Internal and None.
Ticks Length: Set Tick length in pixels
Scale:
Scale divisions: Define number of Scale divisions (Big ticks).
Scale Sub Divisions: Define the number of Subdivisions (Small Ticks between big ticks).
Scale Label Divisions: Define the number of Labels to appear. Ex. 0, 10, 20 etc. till 100
for scale 0 to 100.

Define the same value for both Scale divisions and Scale label divisions.
Scale Width: Define Scale width.
Note: This is only the width for Scale divisions. Example: If ticks position is selected on both
sides, then it is the gap between two scale ticks (Top and Bottom in Horizontal orientation
or Left and Right in vertical orientation).
Bar:
Bar Width: Define width of Bar.

Scale:
Maximum: This is the maximum range of Setpoint (Analog Tag, Normally Analog Output).
Minimum: This is the minimum range of Setpoint (Analog Tag, Normally Analog Output).
Example: If Controller setpoint is 0 to 100。C, set Minimum = 0, Maximum = 100.
Reverse Scale: If Selected, Scale labels will be displayed in Reverse.
Behaviour:
Step: It is the minimum value change when the slider is moved.
For example: By default, Step = 0, i.e., Slider moves its position in Real-time even with a minor
change in process value.
For example: If Step = 5, Slider moves its position in Real-time in steps of 5.
Value: It is used to enter process value in design time and check the Slider position in PC.
Indicator only: If Indicator only is selected, the slider is used for Read-only. The operator will be
not able to move the slider in Run time. If the Indicator only is not selected, the
slider is used for reading/Write. The operator will be able to move the slider in
Run time for example: change setpoint for variable speed drive.
Value Position: Define position for the value to appear during Run time. Available options
include Top left, Bottom Right, Both, Internal and None.

Page 374 of 499

 Sections colours: It is configured bands for the sections to show different colours for Labels
and Ticks in Slider.
Example: Three bands
Section 1, Max% =60 means its band is from 0 to 60%. It shows labels and ticks in black colour.
Section 2, Max% =80 means its band is from 61 to 80%. It shows labels and ticks in brown
colour.
Section 3, Max% =100 means its band is from 81 to 100%. It shows labels and ticks in Red
colour.
Note: Band setting is in % for the total Scale defined (Minimum to maximum).

6.3.9.2.5 Thermometer
This is normally used to view process temperature by the operator during Run time. Generally, it
is linked with an analog tag (Analog input type tag at PLC, which is received as 4-20 mA signal from field
transmitters like Temperature etc...)

Page 375 of 499

Properties
Back Color: Define back color for the component.
Liquid color: Shows temperature level (mercury) in Thermometer.
Tank Color: Define background colour of thermometer without mercury.
LabelsPosition: Define Label position. Available options include Top Left, Bottom Right, Both,
Internal and None. The naming convention is based on the selected
orientation of the component.
Orientation: Horizontal/Vertical. This is the orientation of the component. In the figure above, it
is in the Horizontal direction.
Indent: It is the gap between the border and the start of the scale.
Text Font: It is to set the font for the label including the Name of Font, Size of font and style of
font. Supported styles include Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline & Strikeout.
Bevel: It is to set the border, including the inner border, outer border and style of the border.
Inner Border: True/False
Outer Border: True/False
Style: 9 styles are available
None, Flat, Single, Double, Raised, Lowered, Double Raised, Double lowered, Frame
Raised, and Frame Lowered.
Tag Binding: Select the Analog Tag of the process value.

Page 376 of 499

Ticks Position: Define ticks position. Available options include Top Left, Bottom Right, Both,
Internal and None.
Ticks Length: Set Tick length in pixels
Scale divisions: Define the number of scale divisions (Big Ticks) for the component.
Scale Sub Divisions: Define the number of Subdivisions between the above scale divisions
(Number of Small ticks between any two Big Ticks).
Scale Label Divisions: Define the number of Labels to be displayed for the component as per
Scale Range of process value. For ex: 0, 10, 20, 30…100.
Scale Width: Define Scale width. If you have ticks on both sides of the component, it defines the
width between Upper (Left) & Lower(Right) scale divisions based on the
orientation of component.
Bar Width: Define the width of Bar in pixels.

Maximum: This is the maximum range of the Setpoint (Analog Tag, Normally this is an Analog
input, 20 mA, 10V DC etc.)
Minimum: This is the minimum range of Setpoint (Analog Tag, Normally this is an Analog input,
4 mA, 0V DC etc.)
Example: If Temperature transmitter range is 0 to 100。C, set Minimum = 0, Maximum = 100.
Reverse Scale: True/False. Define Scale direction.
Step: It is the minimum value to reflect the change of mercury level.
For example: By default, Step = 0 means the Mercury level moves in Real-time even with a
minor change in process value.
For example Step = 5 means the Mercury level moves its position in Real-time in steps of 5.
Value: It is used to enter a process value during design time and check the mercury level
position on the PC.
Indicator only: If selected, this component is used for Read-only. If it is not selected, then this
component can be used for Write/Read purpose.
Write design-time value: If selected, it writes design-time values instead of default values
defined in the tag database.
Value Position: Define position for the value to appear during Run time. Available options
include Top left, Bottom Right, Both, Internal and None. The naming convention
is based on the orientation of the component.

Page 377 of 499

 Section Colors: Define bands to display Ticks and Label colour accordingly based on the value
of the tag during Run time.

6.3.9.2.6 Bar Box

Bar Box is a Graphical User Interface widget that displays a bar graph for an Analog Tag during
Run Time. Every Bar box should be linked with an Analog Tag.

Properties
Border Style: Define border style. Options include fixed single, fixed 3D and none.
Direction: Define direction of Bar graph. Up/Down/Left/Right
Range high: Display scale high.
Range Low: Display scale low.
Value: Default value. It is to check how fore colour, back colour displays in PC during design
time.
Tag Binding: Select the Analog Tag of the process value.

Page 378 of 499

Bands
It is to define various bands for the process value to appear and display animation in Run time.
Band count: Use up/down buttons to increase/decrease the number of bands. Maximum 32
bands are supported. In each band, it is possible to configure back colour, fore
colour and blink properties.
Back color: Define back colour.
Fore Color: Define fore colour.
Blink: Select “True” if blink is required and “False” if blink is not required.
Blink color: If “True” is selected for a blink, then this property is visible and you can select
required blink colour.
Value: It is the band range. For the first band, it is always the Range Low value defined for the
bar box. Band 1 high range is the value defined at Band2. Band 2 high range value is
the value defined at Band3 and so on.

6.3.9.2.7 Scale
The scale is a Graphical User Interface widget used along with bar box if required.

Page 379 of 499

Properties
Back color: Define back color
Fore Color: Define fore color
Line width: Define width of line
Grids: Define number of grids
Direction: Define direction of Scale. Up/Down/Left/Right

6.3.9.2.8 Picture box

Picture box permits the user to link different picture files into a Picture box component during
design time and then later view them during Run time based on the value of the Tag. Supported formats
include Bitmap file (*.bmp), Windows Metafile (*.wmf), JPEG File (*.jpg), Graphics Interchange Format
(*.gif), Portable Network Graphic (*.png).

Properties
Bitmap file Select the image to be shown in the object
Flip: It is to flip the picture file during design time. Available options are Horizontal, Vertical, Both
and None.
Rotate: It is to select the direction for the picture file during design time to adjust direction.
Available directions include 0O, 90O, 180O and 270O
Tag Binding: Select the Analog tag to be linked with the Picture box.

Page 380 of 499

 Movement: Select “Enable Move” if it is required to move picture during Run time from Location
1 to Location 2 based on a tag Value. Start and End coordinates for X and Y needs
to be configured during Design time, and the Picture moves in Run time based on a
Tag value.
Tag Value: Define Tag value

Band Count: Define the number of bands required.

Back Color: Define back colour for the selected picture file in a specific band.
Visible: Define visibility for the picture in a specific band.
Bitmap file: Select picture file for a specific band.
Image Layout: Position of the image within the Picture container. Available options include
None/Center/Stretch. When the stretch is selected, it attempts to fit the picture
file to the size of the container.
Transparent: Select if no back colour is required for a picture file.
Flip: It is to flip the picture file during design time. Available options are Horizontal, Vertical, Both
and None.
Rotate: It is to select the direction for the picture file during design time to adjust direction.
Available directions include 0O, 90O, 180O and 270O
Example: You may take a photo of a section of the factory floor like a tank, then use this on the
Recorder screen instead of a default symbol.

A bitmap file by the name sunset.jpg is linked with Picturebox1 in screen1. If you wish to have the
same sunset.jpg in screen no2, do not create picture box and link with sunset.jpg again. Since a resource
with name sunset already available, if you try to use the same image in another place, it may not allow you
to do so and may give you an error message. If you really need the same image again, copy picture box1 at
screen1 and paste it in screen no 2.

6.3.9.3 Graphics
Graphics are used to place a symbol in a screen like a Tank, Motor etc... Basic symbols are
available in Recorder Editing Software and it includes the following symbol categories.

Page 381 of 499

Symbol categories

No Category Symbols Colours Qty

1 Arrows 7 6 42
2 Blowers 5 6 30
3 Boilers 4 6 24
4 Conveyors 6 6 36
5 Instruments- True Color 7 C 7
6 Lamps 4 6 24
7 Material handling 8 C 8
8 Motors 4 6 24
9 Nature-True Color 6 C 6
10 Office-True Color 7 C 7
11 Pipes 10 6 60
12 Power-True Color 7 C 7
13 Pumps 5 6 30
14 Push buttons 8 6 48
15 Tanks 5 6 30
16 Valves 8 6 48
17 Vehicles-True Color 6 C 6
C = True Color

Page 382 of 499

 Some symbols are available in 6 different colours. They are Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Brown
and Grey.
All the symbols are vector graphics. They occupy less memory and have high quality.
It is possible to set the transparent property for symbols during design-time from the property
grid. “Transparent” means the screen colour itself will appear as background colour, making the object
appear to be see-through. Also, it is possible to change the symbol background colour during design time
and Run time.
How to set the “transparent property to a symbol from the property grid

Page 383 of 499

 Click “Bands”, then set “BackColor” to “Transparent”

Fig: Back color=Transparent

Fig: Back Color=Green

Since all symbols are vector symbols, if a symbol is enlarged, it does not lose quality.
When Recorder Editing Software is installed, all basic symbols will be installed in the default
folder C:\Program Files\Recorder Editing Software\Recorder Editing Software\Basic Symbols
In addition, if the application developer has any additional symbols, they can be placed in the
same folder as the basic symbols for use in the project.
Example: Create a folder named “Custom”, and place it in C:\Program Files\Recorder Editing
Software\Recorder Editing Software\Basic Symbols
It is possible to a set path for graphic symbols in the Recorder software. On the Menu bar, click
the “File” dropdown menu, select “Environment”, then select “Graphics path”. All these will appear in a tree-
type structure within Recorder editor avoiding the need to import these symbols using a “Picture Box”.

Page 384 of 499

 Once a symbol is selected in the Recorder from Graphics, it is possible to change, Flip or rotate
basic symbols in 00, 900, 1800 and 2700

Properties
Tag Binding: Select an Analog Tag if the animation is required for the symbol in Run time.

Movement: Select the Enable/Move checkbox, then, enter the X and Y start and end positions
(this is in pixels).
Tag Value: Linked with the Start and End Positions.

Page 385 of 499

 Ex: Recorder 7” (High Performance), Screen Resolution = 800 X 480, Horizontal installation,
Width=800, Height=480. Move symbol from Left to Right of the screen during Run time when
tag value changes from 0 to 100

To move the symbol from Left to Right, set start and end Positions for X coordinate in pixels,
there is no need to set Y coordinates.
Tag value = 0 corresponds to Start Position (X)
Tag value = 1000 corresponds to End Position (X)

Ex: Recorder 7” (High Performance), Screen Resolution = 800 X 480, Horizontal installation,
Width=800, Height=480. Move symbol from Top to Bottom in the screen at Run time when
tag value changes from 0 to 100

Ex: Recorder 7” (High Performance), Screen Resolution = 800 X 480, Horizontal installation,
Width=800, Height=480. Move symbol from Left Top to Right Bottom on screen at an angle
during Run time when the tag value changes from 0 to 100

Page 386 of 499

Band Count: Used to define bands for run-time animation of the symbol. Max. 32 bands are
supported.
Back Color: Define Back Color of the symbol that should appear in a specific band during Run
time.
Visible: Define visibility control for the symbol in a specific band during Run time.
Image: Select different image file to display in a specific band during Run time.
Flip: Define the flip position for the symbol in a specific band during Run time. Available options
include None, Horizontal, Vertical and Both.

Page 387 of 499

 Rotate: Rotate symbol to any predefined direction in a specific band during Run time. Available
options include 0O, 90O, 180O and 270O
Example: There is Liquid level Tank. When the Tag value =0, an arrow should appear pointing in
the Down direction indicating that a discharge of the tank is in progress. When the Tag value = 1, the arrow
should appear in the Up direction indicating the filling of the tank is in progress.

Page 388 of 499

6.3.9.4 Symbol Factory
Symbol Factory contains more than 4000 symbols in 64 categories.

No. Category Symbols No. Category Symbols

1 3-D Pushbuttons Etc. 73 35 Machining 90
2 Air Conditioning 140 36 Maps and Flags 23
3 Architectural 49 37 Material Handling 118
4 Arrows 63 38 Mining 63
5 ASHRAE Controls & Equipment 39 Misc. Pipes 39
100
6 ASHRAE Ducts 86 40 Misc. Symbols 1 57
7 ASHRAE Piping 49 41 Misc. Symbols 2 79
8 Basic Shapes 86 42 Mixers 24
9 Blowers Etc. 34 43 Motors 38
10 Boilers 36 44 Nature 71
11 Buildings 42 45 Operator Interface 28
12 Chemical 50 46 Panels 14
13 Computer Hardware 38 47 Pipes 82
14 Computer Keys 68 48 Plant Facilities 52
15 Containers 56 49 Power 61
16 Controllers 35 50 Process Cooling 20
17 Conveyors, Belt 40 51 Process Heating 61
18 Conveyors, Misc. 26 52 Pulp & Paper 35
19 Conveyors, Simple 56 53 Pumps 99
20 Ducts 51 54 Safety 27
21 Electrical 83 55 Scales 36
22 Finishing 45 56 Segmented Pipes 41
23 Flexible Tubing 24 57 Sensors 55
24 Flow Meters 35 58 Tank Cutaways 23
25 Food 72 59 Tanks 145
26 General Mfg. 68 60 Textures 181
27 Heating 108 61 Valves 73
28 HVAC 74 62 Vehicles 41
29 Icons and Bitmaps 159 63 Water & Wastewater 112
30 Industrial Misc. 19 64 Wire & Cable 21
31 International Symbols 42 Total 4045
32 ISA Symbols 183
33 ISA Symbols (3-D) 123
34 Laboratory 23

With Recorder Editing Software, only the first symbol from the symbol factory can be selected. If you
need all symbols, order our Recorder Editing Software Plus, and we will supply a USB hardware lock to
access more than 4000 symbol factory graphics.

It is possible to link an Analog Tag with a Symbol factory graphic and change its colours during Run
time. Up to 50 bands are supported.

Page 389 of 499

Design Time
During design time, the applications engineer is allowed to change the colours of these symbols.
Example: Change tank colour from standard greyscale to Green colour.

Task: Place symbol on a screen

Page 390 of 499

In Toolbox, click “Symbol Factory”, then drag and drop a standard control to the screen.

Fig 1 Fig2 Fig3 Fig4

Task: Increase the size of the symbol

Select the symbol on the screen. It will be as shown as in fig2 above.

Then, move the mouse to a square pointer till an arrow appears. Left-click and hold the mouse. Drag the
mouse to increase the size of the symbol as per your requirement and then it will be as shown as in Fig4
above. Alternatively, in the property grid, enter the size in pixels as shown below.

Task: Changing symbol to another category

Drag and the drop symbol factory component onto a screen.

Click , then click on Symbol Factory.NET Properties.

Page 391 of 499

Alternatively, select the symbol factory component using a single click (left) with the mouse. Keep the
mouse cursor on the symbol, then, double click (left) the mouse to open symbol properties. The following
screen will pop up.

Select the required category, select the symbol, then click on the button “OK”, then the new symbol will be
placed on the screen.

Click on Help in the above screen to open a Chm type help file (English) for the symbol factory.

If the above error message appears, it is required to reinstall the symbol factory.
Style
Used to define the style of the symbol in design time.

Page 392 of 499

Click on “Style”. The following screen will appear.

Orientation:
Flip: It is possible to flip the symbol during Design time. Available options include Horizontal,
Vertical, Both and None.

Flip=None Flip = Horizontal

Rotation: It is possible to rotate the symbol during design time. Available options include 00,
900, 1800 and 2700
Padding: Normally it is 0. It is used to decrease the size of the symbol within selected
boundaries.
Stretch: It is used to stretch symbol within selected boundaries.
Fill Color:
Fill color mode: Available options include Original, Shaded, Solid and Hollow.

Page 393 of 499

Fill Color Mode: Original Shaded Solid Hollow
Fill Color: N.A Green Green N.A

Fill color: Define color to be filled in Shaded and Solid fill color mode.

Background:
Back Style: Available options include Transparent & Opaque. Transparent means screen
background colour will appear for the symbol. Opaque means, it is possible to set
different background colours for a specifically selected symbol.
Back color: Define background color when the back style = Opaque.

Blink:
Blink mode: Available options include No Blink, Blink Invisible, Blink shaded and Blink Solid.
NoBlink: Indicates “Blink” is not required for symbol during design time or Run time. Blink Speed
and Blink colour = Not available when this is selected.
BlinkInvisible: Symbol will appear and disappear cyclically during both design time and Run
time per the set Blink speed. Blink colour: Not Available for selection.
BlinkShaded: Symbol will flash 2 colours, one colour at a time on the same symbol per the set
blink speed during both design time and Run time.
Example
Fill Color mode = Shaded, Color = Green
Blink shaded setting: Blink mode=Blink shaded, Blink speed = Medium_800, Blink colour = Blue
The green colour shaded symbol appears first, then the symbol turns into a blue shade after
elapsing the preset time in the blink speed setting.

Blink speed: Define blink speed. Available options include Fast_400, Medium_800, and
Slow_1200. Its period is in ms.
Blink color: Define background-colour

Normally, blink is not used during design time. Default settings are as follows.
1. Fill Color Mode = Original. If a different colour is required for the symbol, select Fill colour mode =
Shaded, then define the Fill colour.
2. By default, Back Style = Transparent in Background
3. By Default, Blink mode = NoBlink

Animation
It is to define the animation for the symbol to appear at Run time in Recorder.
Animation mode: Define animation mode. Available options include Analog Color Fill, Discrete
color fill, Analog integer color fill.
AnalogColorFill: Select this option if you wish to link an analog tag. Then define the band for
the colours. For example, 0 to 10, Color = Yellow, 10-90, Color = Green, 90-
100, Color = Red etc.(See next section “How beak points work” for more
details)

Page 394 of 499

 DiscreteColorFill: Select this option if you wish to pass discrete values like 1,2,3… during Run
time to the Tag linked with the symbol for the display of different colours. (See
next section “How beak points work for more details)
AnalogIntegerColorFill: This is the same as Analog colour fill, but only integer values are
passed to the Tag linked with the symbol. (See next section “How
beak points work for more details)
Band count: Defines the number of bands required for the selected Animation mode
Styles: Define the style of symbols. Available options include Original, Shaded, Solid, Blink
Invisible, Blink shaded and Blink solid. All definitions are the same as explained earlier.

6.3.9.4.1 How breakpoints work

The idea behind Breakpoints is that certain animation will occur when a property of the
component changes. If this change falls within the defined parameters (see below), an animation will be
triggered.
Please note: The screenshots in the examples below are based upon the Symbol Factory .NET Standard
Control, but the same principle applies to the Cutaway control. Two types of animation can be defined
based upon the setting of Animation Mode: Analog Break Points and Discrete Breakpoints
Analog Breakpoints (Animation Mode = Analog integer colour fill or Analog colour fill) Analog
breakpoints are defined as a value on which animation will trigger when a property of the component
reaches that level. Depending upon your component, different properties will need to be changed depending
upon the setting of Animation Mode. These properties are:

Component Animation Mode Setting Property that Changes to trigger an Animation

Standard AnalogColorFill AnalogValue1
Standard AnalogIntegerColorFill AnalogIntValue1
Cutaway AnalogColorFill Level
Cutaway AnalogIntegerColorFill LevelInt

Number and Ordering of Breakpoints

The number of breakpoints available to you is the number of bands defined minus 1. As a
breakpoint is defined as the point to which an animation changes, make sure you arrange the breakpoints
from high to low. For example, suppose you had this screen:

Page 395 of 499

 When the value of your property changes, this is what will happen to the control:

Value of Property The band that is Active Appearance of Component

Less than 10 Band5 Blink Shaded Red
10 to < 20 Band4 Display Shaded Yellow
20 to < 80 Band3 Original
80 to < 90 Band2 Display Shaded Yellow
Greater than 90 Band1 Blink Shaded Red

If you do not order your breakpoints in descending order, your results will be unpredictable.
Discrete break points (Animation mode = Discrete color fill)
Discrete Breakpoints aren't really breakpoints, instead, they enable animation if the
"DiscreteValue" of an element in the Bands Collection is set to true. However, since multiple DiscreteValue
properties can be set at the same time, how does the component determine the animation to display? What
it does is give priority to the animations based upon their order in the Bands Collection. If the first band in
the collection (by default, Band1) has its DiscreteValue set to True, then that animation will be shown no
matter which band also has its DiscreteValue set to true. As another example, if Band2 and Band5 each
have their DiscreteValue set, the animation that is used will be the one defined in Band2. Therefore, given
the following definition of five bands:

Here is what the animations will be shown based upon different values of Discrete Value

Discrete Value Discrete Value Discrete Value Discrete Value Discrete Value Appearance of
for Band1 for Band2 for Band3 for Band4 for Band5 Component
Blink Shaded Red
True False False False False
(Band1)
Shaded Yellow
False True False False False
(Band2)
False False True False False Original (Band 3)
Shaded Orange
False False False True False
(Band 4)

Page 396 of 499

 Discrete Value Discrete Value Discrete Value Discrete Value Discrete Value Appearance of
for Band1 for Band2 for Band3 for Band4 for Band5 Component
Blink Shaded Black
False False False False True
(Band 5)
Blink Shaded Red
True True True True True
(Band 1)
Shaded Yellow
False True True True True
(Band 2)
Blink Shaded Red
True False False False True
(Band 1)
Original (No bands
False False False False False
active)

6.3.9.5 Project Tools

6.3.9.5.1 Build
Once the project is compiled successfully, it creates a build. This build then needs to be
transferred to the Recorder. If there are any errors during the preparation of the build, it will be shown in the
output window just below the screen working area. If the Output screen is not visible below the screen
working area, select it via Menu, “View”, and then click “Output” or apply “Reset window layout” from the
Menu-“View”

After creating a build, if any errors are shown at Output window, do not attempt to download the
application from PC to Recorder, or PC to USB flash disk first clear the errors and make sure that
compilation errors are not present before transferring the application to the Recorder.

6.3.9.5.2 Build & Offline Simulation

First, it creates a build, then runs an Offline simulation.

Page 397 of 499

 It is used to test the application on the PC before downloading the application to the Recorder,
without connecting a PLC to either PC or Recorder. It is possible to enter some values for the tags via a
table to check how the application would appear during run time.

Enter a value under the “SetVal” column, then press the enter key on your keyboard. It will
accept, then show at “CurrentVal”. You will now be able to see these values in objects linked with the
specific tag.

It is better to run offline simulation frequently say once in a couple of hours or after
completing specific screen editing by application engineer to verify how it will works on a Recorder so that if
there are any compilation errors, it is easier to locate and rectify them.

6.3.9.5.3 Stop

It is used to stop a simulation on the PC. When Offline simulation is running, click the Icon
to stop the current running simulation. See the picture below. It is located beneath the “help” dropdown
menu.

If Offline simulation or online simulation is already running on the PC, and the user
attempts to run it again, the build will fail. It prompts an error message similar to the following
Screen1
Build Started….
Could not write to Output file “C:\Program Files\Project\Recorder\Panel.exe”
“The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another process”
Build Failed
In the case of the above message is prompted, click the Stop icon a couple of times and
make sure that icon is not available in Taskbar. Click “Build” once again, then run the simulation.

6.3.9.5.4 Build & Download

It is to build first and then download the application from PC to Recorder.

Page 398 of 499

6.3.9.5.5 Download
It is to download the application from PC to Recorder
Available Options

i) PC to Recorder via Ethernet

ii) Removable Disk to Recorder via USB flash disk

PC to Recorder via Ethernet:

❖ After creating an application, create a build on the PC, and make sure there are no
compilation errors.
❖ Connect Ethernet cable between PC and Recorder
❖ In editor software, set Environment for Download via Ethernet and enter the IP
address of the Recorder. In Environment, Select “Ethernet” at Download, then click
the “OK” button.
❖ In editor software, click “Project”, then click “Download” or click the icon.
❖ The software will build and transfer the application from the PC to the Recorder. If
there are any errors during compilation, they need to be fixed. Once the compilation
errors are fixed, please attempt to download again.

Removable disk to Recorder

❖ After creating an application, create a build in the PC and make sure there are no
compilation errors.
❖ Connect USB flash disk into PC via USB port.
❖ In Recorder editor software, set “Environment” to Download via Removable disk. In
Environment, Select “Removable disk” at Download and then, click the “OK” button.
❖ In Recorder editor software, click “Project”, then click “Download” or click at icon.
❖ The application will transfer from the PC to the USB flash disk.
❖ Insert USB flash disk in Recorder.
❖ Switch on Power to the Recorder. Press “Load”, select Path of project files, then press
“Load” button near path selection.
❖ It transfers the application from the USB flash disk to the Recorder.

Page 399 of 499

6.3.9.5.6 Project status

It is used for project management purposes and to know the limits and usage of objects.

Project used time: It shows how much time a project has been opened for editing purpose.

Page 400 of 499

7. Web Server
It is used to view Paperless Recorder from a Remote location via the Internet.

7.1 Requirements
Item Minimum Requirements
System IBM PC compatible computer with Intel Pentium IV or above
Operating System Windows XP or above
Memory 1 GB
Hard Disk 5 GB Free Space on the hard disk
Communication Ports Ethernet Port
Browser Internet Explorer 10 or above, Google Chrome
IP Address Static IP from Internet Service Provider

Obtain a Static IP address from your Internet Service Provider (ISP). This IP address should be
unique. Once the IP address is configured in the Recorder, use a Ping Instruction from the DOS prompt first
to verify there is successful communication between the Recorder and the PC via the Internet.

Page 401 of 499

7.2 How to configure Webserver Settings
For using Web server application in the PR series Recorder, Configuring the Recorder for a
static IP address, and enabling the Web server.

7.2.1 How to Configure Static IP Address

Press (Menu), then More and then Config softkey to enter Configuration mode. In the
Configuration screen, select “Communication”, then press the “Enter” softkey.

Select IP type = User Define.

Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and DNS Server Settings in the Ethernet Settings.
Note: Make sure to enter Global, Unique, static fix IP address received from the Internet service provider.

Page 402 of 499

7.2.2 How to Enable Web Server

Select Web Server Menu in the Communication screen.

Enable the Web Server for using Web Server application in the Recorder.

After completing the above steps, press the “Back” key, then the “Home” key to return to the
main menu. It will save the configuration settings in the Recorder. Now the Recorder is ready for the Web
Server Applications.
Note: The Web Server update time on the browser is 1 second for real-time data and statuses and 5
Seconds for Alarms.

7.3 How to Access Recorder Real-time Data in PC via Webserver:

❖ Connect Paperless Recorder to the Internet
❖ Open the browser (Internet Explorer 10 or Google Chrome) in the PC

Page 403 of 499

❖ Enter the IP address of the Recorder in the address bar of the browser.
Format: http://192.168.1.111

❖ After a successful connection, the browser will show the real-time page of the recorder as shown
below

❖ By using the menu key various real-time pages, various display mode, the status of DI,
DO, AO, Counter and Totalizer, the real-time alarm on the recorder can be viewed.

Page 404 of 499

.

Page 405 of 499

Page 406 of 499
Page 407 of 499
Page 408 of 499
Page 409 of 499
8. PR Mobile Viewer
It is used to view the real-time data of the paperless recorder from a remote location on the
mobile phone via the internet.

8.1 Requirements
Item Minimum Requirements
Mobile Phone Smart Phone
Screen Size 5.5” or higher
Operating System Android
IP Address Static IP from Internet Service Provider

Obtain a Static IP address from your Internet Service Provider (ISP). This IP address should be
unique. Once the IP address is configured in the Recorder, use a Ping Instruction from the DOS prompt first
to verify there is successful communication between the Recorder and the PC via the Internet.

Page 410 of 499

8.2 How to configure Static IP
For using PR Mobile viewer application with PR series recorder, the recorder has to be
configured with static IP address.

8.2.1 How to Configure Static IP Address

Press (Menu), then More and then Config softkey to enter Configuration mode. In the
Configuration screen, select “Communication”, then press the “Enter” softkey.

Select IP type = User Define.

Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and DNS Server Settings in the Ethernet Settings.
Note: Make sure to enter Global, Unique, static fix IP address received from the Internet service provider.

After completing the above steps, press the “Back” key, then the “Home” key to return to the
main menu. It will save the configuration settings in the Recorder. Now the Recorder is ready to view from
PR Mobile Viewer application.

Page 411 of 499

8.3 PR Mobile Viewer operation
❖ PR Mobile Viewer can be downloaded from the play store using the below QR code.

❖ The PR Mobile Viewer also can be searched manually in the play store.

Page 412 of 499

❖ Download PR Mobile Viewer and install the application.

❖ Open the PR Mobile Viewer application by double-clicking the PR Mobile Viewer icon on the
application list.

❖ Type the IP address of the recorder on the space provided.

❖ After a successful connection, the application will display the real-time data of the recorder as

Page 413 of 499

 below.

❖ By using the menu key various real-time pages, the status of DI, DO, AO, Counter and
Totalizer, the real-time alarm on the recorder can be viewed.

Page 414 of 499

Note:
1. The circular chart is available only for PR30.
2. For best view for a circular chart, use the mobile phone or tablet with more than 7” in screen
size.

Page 415 of 499

Page 416 of 499
Page 417 of 499
Page 418 of 499
The application will show the notification for alarms and system events on the mobile phone.

Page 419 of 499

9. Modbus Communication
9.1 Modbus Address Mapping
9.1.1 Input Register (3xxxxx) Parameter Table for Modbus RTU Slave / TCP Server

9.1.1.1 AI / DI / DO / AO Channel Data (Integer Type)

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1 Reserve Reserve R
2 AI1 AI 1 process value R
3 AI2 AI 2 process value R
4 AI3 AI 3 process value R
5 AI4 AI 4 process value R
6 AI5 AI 5 process value R
7 AI6 AI 6 process value R
8 AI7 AI 7 process value R
9 AI8 AI 8 process value R
10 AI9 AI 9 process value R
11 AI10 AI 10 process value R
12 AI11 AI 11 process value R
13 AI12 AI 12 process value R
14 AI13 AI 13 process value R
15 AI14 AI 14 process value R
16 AI15 AI 15 process value R
17 AI16 AI 16 process value R
18 AI17 AI 17 process value R
19 AI18 AI 18 process value R
20 AI19 AI 19 process value R
21 AI20 AI 20 process value R
22 AI21 AI 21 process value R
23 AI22 AI 22 process value R
24 AI23 AI 23 process value R
25 AI24 AI 24 process value R
26 AI25 AI 25 process value R
27 AI26 AI 26 process value R
28 AI27 AI 27 process value R
29 AI28 AI 28 process value R
30 AI29 AI 29 process value R
31 AI30 AI 30 process value R
32 AI31 AI 31 process value R
33 AI32 AI 32 process value R
34 AI33 AI 33 process value R
35 AI34 AI 34 process value R
36 AI35 AI 35 process value R
37 AI36 AI 36 process value R
38 AI37 AI 37 process value R
39 AI38 AI 38 process value R
40 AI39 AI 39 process value R
41 AI40 AI 40 process value R
42 AI41 AI 41 process value R
43 AI42 AI 42 process value R
44 AI43 AI 43 process value R
45 AI44 AI 44 process value R

Page 420 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
46 AI45 AI 45 process value R
47 AI46 AI 46 process value R
48 AI47 AI 47 process value R
49 AI48 AI 48 process value R
50 DI1 DI 1 process value R
51 DI2 DI 2 process value R
52 DI3 DI 3 process value R
53 DI4 DI 4 process value R
54 DI5 DI 5 process value R
55 DI6 DI 6 process value R
56 DI7 DI 7 process value R
57 DI8 DI 8 process value R
58 DI9 DI 9 process value R
59 DI10 DI 10 process value R
60 DI11 DI 11 process value R
61 DI12 DI 12 process value R
62 DI13 DI 13 process value R
63 DI14 DI 14 process value R
64 DI15 DI 15 process value R
65 DI16 DI 16 process value R
66 DI17 DI 17 process value R
67 DI18 DI 18 process value R
68 DI19 DI 19 process value R
69 DI20 DI 20 process value R
70 DI21 DI 21 process value R
71 DI22 DI 22 process value R
72 DI23 DI 23 process value R
73 DI24 DI 24 process value R
74 DO1 DO 1 process value R
75 DO2 DO 2 process value R
76 DO3 DO 3 process value R
77 DO4 DO 4 process value R
78 DO5 DO 5 process value R
79 DO6 DO 6 process value R
80 DO7 DO 7 process value R
81 DO8 DO 8 process value R
82 DO9 DO 9 process value R
83 DO10 DO 10 process value R
84 DO11 DO 11 process value R
85 DO12 DO 12 process value R
86 DO13 DO 13 process value R
87 DO14 DO 14 process value R
88 DO15 DO 15 process value R
89 DO16 DO 16 process value R
90 DO17 DO 17 process value R
91 DO18 DO 18 process value R
92 DO19 DO 19 process value R
93 DO20 DO 20 process value R
94 DO21 DO 21 process value R
95 DO22 DO 22 process value R
96 DO23 DO 23 process value R
97 DO24 DO 24 process value R
98 AO1 AO 1 process value R

Page 421 of 499

 Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
99 AO2 AO 2 process value R
100 AO3 AO 3 process value R
101 AO4 AO 4 process value R
102 AO5 AO 5 process value R
103 AO6 AO 6 process value R
104 AO7 AO 7 process value R
105 AO8 AO 8 process value R
106 AO9 AO 9 process value R
107 AO10 AO 10 process value R
108 AO11 AO 11 process value R
109 AO12 AO 12 process value R

Note: If the register value is 65534, then there is a communication error.

9.1.1.2 AI / DI / DO / AO Channel Data (Float Type)

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1001 Reserve Reserve R
1003 AI1 AI 1 process value R
1005 AI2 AI 2 process value R
1007 AI3 AI 3 process value R
1009 AI4 AI 4 process value R
1011 AI5 AI 5 process value R
1013 AI6 AI 6 process value R
1015 AI7 AI 7 process value R
1017 AI8 AI 8 process value R
1019 AI9 AI 9 process value R
1021 AI10 AI 10 process value R
1023 AI11 AI 11 process value R
1025 AI12 AI 12 process value R
1027 AI13 AI 13 process value R
1029 AI14 AI 14 process value R
1031 AI15 AI 15 process value R
1033 AI16 AI 16 process value R
1035 AI17 AI 17 process value R
1037 AI18 AI 18 process value R
1039 AI19 AI 19 process value R
1041 AI20 AI 20 process value R
1043 AI21 AI 21 process value R
1045 AI22 AI 22 process value R
1047 AI23 AI 23 process value R
1049 AI24 AI 24 process value R
1051 AI25 AI 25 process value R
1053 AI26 AI 26 process value R
1055 AI27 AI 27 process value R
1057 AI28 AI 28 process value R
1059 AI29 AI 29 process value R
1061 AI30 AI 30 process value R
1063 AI31 AI 31 process value R
1065 AI32 AI 32 process value R
1067 AI33 AI 33 process value R
1069 AI34 AI 34 process value R
1071 AI35 AI 35 process value R

Page 422 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1073 AI36 AI 36 process value R
1075 AI37 AI 37 process value R
1077 AI38 AI 38 process value R
1079 AI39 AI 39 process value R
1081 AI40 AI 40 process value R
1083 AI41 AI 41 process value R
1085 AI42 AI 42 process value R
1087 AI43 AI 43 process value R
1089 AI44 AI 44 process value R
1091 AI45 AI 45 process value R
1093 AI46 AI 46 process value R
1095 AI47 AI 47 process value R
1097 AI48 AI 48 process value R
1099 DI1 DI 1 process value R
1101 DI2 DI 2 process value R
1103 DI3 DI 3 process value R
1105 DI4 DI 4 process value R
1107 DI5 DI 5 process value R
1109 DI6 DI 6 process value R
1111 DI7 DI 7 process value R
1113 DI8 DI 8 process value R
1115 DI9 DI 9 process value R
1117 DI10 DI 10 process value R
1119 DI11 DI 11 process value R
1121 DI12 DI 12 process value R
1123 DI13 DI 13 process value R
1125 DI14 DI 14 process value R
1127 DI15 DI 15 process value R
1129 DI16 DI 16 process value R
1131 DI17 DI 17 process value R
1133 DI18 DI 18 process value R
1135 DI19 DI 19 process value R
1137 DI20 DI 20 process value R
1139 DI21 DI 21 process value R
1141 DI22 DI 22 process value R
1143 DI23 DI 23 process value R
1145 DI24 DI 24 process value R
1147 DO1 DO 1 process value R
1149 DO2 DO 2 process value R
1151 DO3 DO 3 process value R
1153 DO4 DO 4 process value R
1155 DO5 DO 5 process value R
1157 DO6 DO 6 process value R
1159 DO7 DO 7 process value R
1161 DO8 DO 8 process value R
1163 DO9 DO 9 process value R
1165 DO10 DO 10 process value R
1167 DO11 DO 11 process value R
1169 DO12 DO 12 process value R
1171 DO13 DO 13 process value R
1173 DO14 DO 14 process value R
1175 DO15 DO 15 process value R
1177 DO16 DO 16 process value R

Page 423 of 499

 Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1179 DO17 DO 17 process value R
1181 DO18 DO 18 process value R
1183 DO19 DO 19 process value R
1185 DO20 DO 20 process value R
1187 DO21 DO 21 process value R
1189 DO22 DO 22 process value R
1191 DO23 DO 23 process value R
1193 DO24 DO 24 process value R
1195 AO1 AO 1 process value R
1197 AO2 AO 2 process value R
1199 AO3 AO 3 process value R
1201 AO4 AO 4 process value R
1203 AO5 AO 5 process value R
1205 AO6 AO 6 process value R
1207 AO7 AO 7 process value R
1209 AO8 AO 8 process value R
1211 AO9 AO 9 process value R
1213 AO10 AO 10 process value R
1215 AO11 AO 11 process value R
1217 AO12 AO 12 process value R

Note: If the register value is 3.0+E38, then there is a communication error.

9.1.1.3 Math Channel Data (Integer Type)

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
201 Math1 Math 1 process value high word R
202 Math1 Math 1 process value low word R
203 Math2 Math 2 process value high word R
204 Math2 Math 2 process value low word R
205 Math3 Math 3 process value high word R
206 Math3 Math 3 process value low word R
207 Math4 Math 4 process value high word R
208 Math4 Math 4 process value low word R
209 Math5 Math 5 process value high word R
210 Math5 Math 5 process value low word R
211 Math6 Math 6 process value high word R
212 Math6 Math 6 process value low word R
213 Math7 Math 7 process value high word R
214 Math7 Math 7 process value low word R
215 Math8 Math 8 process value high word R
216 Math8 Math 8 process value low word R
217 Math9 Math 9 process value high word R
218 Math9 Math 9 process value low word R
219 Math10 Math 10 process value high word R
220 Math10 Math 10 process value low word R
221 Math11 Math 11 process value high word R
222 Math11 Math 11 process value low word R
223 Math12 Math 12 process value high word R
224 Math12 Math 12 process value low word R
225 Math13 Math 13 process value high word R
226 Math13 Math 13 process value low word R
227 Math14 Math 14 process value high word R
228 Math14 Math 14 process value low word R

Page 424 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
229 Math15 Math 15 process value high word R
230 Math15 Math 15 process value low word R
231 Math16 Math 16 process value high word R
232 Math16 Math 16 process value low word R
233 Math17 Math 17 process value high word R
234 Math17 Math 17 process value low word R
235 Math18 Math 18 process value high word R
236 Math18 Math 18 process value low word R
237 Math19 Math 19 process value high word R
238 Math19 Math 19 process value low word R
239 Math20 Math 20 process value high word R
240 Math20 Math 20 process value low word R
241 Math21 Math 21 process value high word R
242 Math21 Math 21 process value low word R
243 Math22 Math 22 process value high word R
244 Math22 Math 22 process value low word R
245 Math23 Math 23 process value high word R
246 Math23 Math 23 process value low word R
247 Math24 Math 24 process value high word R
248 Math24 Math 24 process value low word R
249 Math25 Math 25 process value high word R
250 Math25 Math 25 process value low word R
251 Math26 Math 26 process value high word R
252 Math26 Math 26 process value low word R
253 Math27 Math 27 process value high word R
254 Math27 Math 27 process value low word R
255 Math28 Math 28 process value high word R
256 Math28 Math 28 process value low word R
257 Math29 Math 29 process value high word R
258 Math29 Math 29 process value low word R
259 Math30 Math 30 process value high word R
260 Math30 Math 30 process value low word R
261 Math31 Math 31 process value high word R
262 Math31 Math 31 process value low word R
263 Math32 Math 32 process value high word R
264 Math32 Math 32 process value low word R
265 Math33 Math 33 process value high word R
266 Math33 Math 33 process value low word R
267 Math34 Math 34 process value high word R
268 Math34 Math 34 process value low word R
269 Math35 Math 35 process value high word R
270 Math35 Math 35 process value low word R
271 Math36 Math 36 process value high word R
272 Math36 Math 36 process value low word R
273 Math37 Math 37 process value high word R
274 Math37 Math 37 process value low word R
275 Math38 Math 38 process value high word R
276 Math38 Math 38 process value low word R
277 Math39 Math 39 process value high word R
278 Math39 Math 39 process value low word R
279 Math40 Math 40 process value high word R
280 Math40 Math 40 process value low word R
281 Math41 Math 41 process value high word R

Page 425 of 499

 Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
282 Math41 Math 41 process value low word R
283 Math42 Math 42 process value high word R
284 Math42 Math 42 process value low word R
285 Math43 Math 43 process value high word R
286 Math43 Math 43 process value low word R
287 Math44 Math 44 process value high word R
288 Math44 Math 44 process value low word R
289 Math45 Math 45 process value high word R
290 Math45 Math 45 process value low word R
291 Math46 Math 46 process value high word R
292 Math46 Math 46 process value low word R
293 Math47 Math 47 process value high word R
294 Math47 Math 47 process value low word R
295 Math48 Math 48 process value high word R
296 Math48 Math 48 process value low word R
297 Math49 Math 49 process value high word R
298 Math49 Math 49 process value low word R
299 Math50 Math 50 process value high word R
300 Math50 Math 50 process value low word R
301 Math51 Math 51 process value high word R
302 Math51 Math 51 process value low word R
303 Math52 Math 52 process value high word R
304 Math52 Math 52 process value low word R
305 Math53 Math 53 process value high word R
306 Math53 Math 53 process value low word R
307 Math54 Math 54 process value high word R
308 Math54 Math 54 process value low word R
309 Math55 Math 55 process value high word R
310 Math55 Math 55 process value low word R
311 Math56 Math 56 process value high word R
312 Math56 Math 56 process value low word R
313 Math57 Math 57 process value high word R
314 Math57 Math 57 process value low word R
315 Math58 Math 58 process value high word R
316 Math58 Math 58 process value low word R
317 Math59 Math 59 process value high word R
318 Math59 Math 59 process value low word R
319 Math60 Math 60 process value high word R
320 Math60 Math 60 process value low word R

Note: If the register value is 4294967294, then there is a communication error.

9.1.1.4 Math Channel Data (Float Type)

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1401 Math1 Math 1 process value R
1403 Math2 Math 2 process value R
1405 Math3 Math 3 process value R
1407 Math4 Math 4 process value R
1409 Math5 Math 5 process value R
1411 Math6 Math 6 process value R
1413 Math7 Math 7 process value R
1415 Math8 Math 8 process value R
1417 Math9 Math 9 process value R

Page 426 of 499

 Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1419 Math10 Math 10 process value R
1421 Math11 Math 11 process value R
1423 Math12 Math 12 process value R
1425 Math13 Math 13 process value R
1427 Math14 Math 14 process value R
1429 Math15 Math 15 process value R
1431 Math16 Math 16 process value R
1433 Math17 Math 17 process value R
1435 Math18 Math 18 process value R
1437 Math19 Math 19 process value R
1439 Math20 Math 20 process value R
1441 Math21 Math 21 process value R
1443 Math22 Math 22 process value R
1445 Math23 Math 23 process value R
1447 Math24 Math 24 process value R
1449 Math25 Math 25 process value R
1451 Math26 Math 26 process value R
1453 Math27 Math 27 process value R
1455 Math28 Math 28 process value R
1457 Math29 Math 29 process value R
1459 Math30 Math 30 process value R
1461 Math31 Math 31 process value R
1463 Math32 Math 32 process value R
1465 Math33 Math 33 process value R
1467 Math34 Math 34 process value R
1469 Math35 Math 35 process value R
1471 Math36 Math 36 process value R
1473 Math37 Math 37 process value R
1475 Math38 Math 38 process value R
1477 Math39 Math 39 process value R
1479 Math40 Math 40 process value R
1481 Math41 Math 41 process value R
1483 Math42 Math 42 process value R
1485 Math43 Math 43 process value R
1487 Math44 Math 44 process value R
1489 Math45 Math 45 process value R
1491 Math46 Math 46 process value R
1493 Math47 Math 47 process value R
1495 Math48 Math 48 process value R
1497 Math49 Math 49 process value R
1499 Math50 Math 50 process value R
1501 Math51 Math 51 process value R
1503 Math52 Math 52 process value R
1505 Math53 Math 53 process value R
1507 Math54 Math 54 process value R
1509 Math55 Math 55 process value R
1511 Math56 Math 56 process value R
1513 Math57 Math 57 process value R
1515 Math58 Math 58 process value R
1517 Math59 Math 59 process value R
1519 Math60 Math 60 process value R

Note: If the register value is 3.0+E38, then there is a communication error.

Page 427 of 499

9.1.1.5 PID Process Control Module Data (Integer Type)
Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
401 C1_PV Current process value R
402 C1_SV Current setpoint Value R
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
403 C1_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
404 C1_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
405 C1_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
406 C1_MV1 Current output 1 value R
407 C1_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
408 C1_ALM R
status4
409 C1_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
410 C1_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
411 C1_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
412 Reserve Reserve R
413 C1_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
414 C1_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
415 C1_Profile Profile number R
416 C1_Segment Segment number R
417 C1_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
418 C1_Run Profile running R
419 C1_Hold Profile held R
420 C1_Up Running ramp up segment R
421 C1_Down Running ramp down segment R
422 C1_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
423 C1_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
424 C2_PV Current process value R

Page 428 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
425 C2_SV Current setpoint Value R
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
426 C2_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
427 C2_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
428 C2_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
429 C2_MV1 Current output 1 value R
430 C2_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
431 C2_ALM R
status4
432 C2_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
433 C2_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
434 C2_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
435 Reserve Reserve R
436 C2_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
437 C2_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
438 C2_Profile Profile number R
439 C2_Segment Segment number R
440 C2_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
441 C2_Run Profile running R
442 C2_Hold Profile held R
443 C2_Up Running ramp up segment R
444 C2_Down Running ramp down segment R
445 C2_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
446 C2_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
447 C3_PV Current process value R
448 C3_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 429 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
449 C3_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
450 C3_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
451 C3_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
452 C3_MV1 Current output 1 value R
453 C3_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
454 C3_ALM R
status4
455 C3_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
456 C3_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
457 C3_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
458 Reserve Reserve R
459 C3_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
460 C3_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
461 C3_Profile Profile number R
462 C3_Segment Segment number R
463 C3_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
464 C3_Run Profile running R
465 C3_Hold Profile held R
466 C3_Up Running ramp up segment R
467 C3_Down Running ramp down segment R
468 C3_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
469 C3_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
470 C4_PV Current process value R
471 C4_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 430 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
472 C4_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
473 C4_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
474 C4_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
475 C4_MV1 Current output 1 value R
476 C4_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
477 C4_ALM R
status4
478 C4_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
479 C4_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
480 C4_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
481 Reserve Reserve R
482 C4_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
483 C4_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
484 C4_Profile Profile number R
485 C4_Segment Segment number R
486 C4_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
487 C4_Run Profile running R
488 C4_Hold Profile held R
489 C4_Up Running ramp up segment R
490 C4_Down Running ramp down segment R
491 C4_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
492 C4_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
493 C5_PV Current process value R
494 C5_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 431 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
495 C5_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
496 C5_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
497 C5_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
498 C5_MV1 Current output 1 value R
499 C5_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
500 C5_ALM R
status4
501 C5_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
502 C5_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
503 C5_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
504 Reserve Reserve R
505 C5_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
506 C5_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
507 C5_Profile Profile number R
508 C5_Segment Segment number R
509 C5_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
510 C5_Run Profile running R
511 C5_Hold Profile held R
512 C5_Up Running ramp up segment R
513 C5_Down Running ramp down segment R
514 C5_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
515 C5_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
516 C6_PV Current process value R
517 C6_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 432 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
518 C6_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
519 C6_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
520 C6_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
521 C6_MV1 Current output 1 value R
522 C6_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
523 C6_ALM R
status4
524 C6_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
525 C6_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
526 C6_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
527 Reserve Reserve R
528 C6_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
529 C6_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
530 C6_Profile Profile number R
531 C6_Segment Segment number R
532 C6_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
533 C6_Run Profile running R
534 C6_Hold Profile held R
535 C6_Up Running ramp up segment R
536 C6_Down Running ramp down segment R
537 C6_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
538 C6_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout

539 C7_PV Current process value R

540 C7_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 433 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
541 C7_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
542 C7_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
543 C7_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
544 C7_MV1 Current output 1 value R
545 C7_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
546 C7_ALM R
status4
547 C7_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
548 C7_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
549 C7_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
550 Reserve Reserve R
551 C7_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
552 C7_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
553 C7_Profile Profile number R
554 C7_Segment Segment number R
555 C7_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
556 C7_Run Profile running R
557 C7_Hold Profile held R
558 C7_Up Running ramp up segment R
559 C7_Down Running ramp down segment R
560 C7_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
561 C7_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
562 C8_PV Current process value R
563 C8_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 434 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
564 C8_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
565 C8_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
566 C8_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
567 C8_MV1 Current output 1 value R
568 C8_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
569 C8_ALM R
status4
570 C8_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
571 C8_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
572 C8_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
573 Reserve Reserve R
574 C8_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
575 C8_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
576 C8_Profile Profile number R
577 C8_Segment Segment number R
578 C8_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
579 C8_Run Profile running R
580 C8_Hold Profile held R
581 C8_Up Running ramp up segment R
582 C8_Down Running ramp down segment R
583 C8_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
584 C8_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout

Page 435 of 499

 Note 1: PVMD
Parameter Value Display Symbol Description
0 PV1 Use PV1 as process value
1 PV2 Use PV2 as process value
2 P1 - 2 Use PV1 - PV2 (difference) as process value
3 P2 - 1 Use PV2 - PV1 (difference) as process value

Note 2, 3: IN1/IN2 unit

Parameter Value Display Symbol Description
0 ℃ Degree C unit
1 ℉ Degree F unit
2 PU Process unit

Note 4: ALM
MSB LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
=BIN2K
If BIN2= 8~18, then
BIN2K=00
If BIN2=1, then BIN2K=01 =ALMK
If BIN2=19, 21, 22, 23 then =00: No Alarm
BIN2K=10 activated
Otherwise, BIN2K=11 =01: Alarm 1
activated
=10: Alarm 2
=BIN1K activated
If BIN1<11, then BIN1K=00 =11: Alarm 1 &
If 11≤ BIN1<17, then alarm 2 activated
BIN1K=01
Otherwise, BIN1K=10
=A1FNK
If A1FN = 8, 9 then
=DP2K=DP2 A1FNK = 0
Otherwise A1FNK = 1

=DP1K=DP1

=0 =A2FNK
If A2FN = 8, 9 then
A2FNK = 0
=BPVMDK Otherwise A2FNK = 1
If BPVMD=1 then
BPVMDK=0
Otherwise BPVMDK=1 =AOFNK
If AOFN = 0, 2, 3 then
AOFNK = 00
If AOFN = 1 then
AOFNK = 01
If AOFN = 4, 7 then
AOFNK = 10
If AOFN = 5, 6 then
AOFNK =11

Page 436 of 499

Note 5: Error Code
Error Code Error Description
1 Illegal setup values used: PV1 is used for both PVMD and SPMD that is meaningless for control
2 Illegal setup values used: PV2 is used for both PVMD and SPMD that is meaningless for control
Illegal setup values used: P1-2 or P2-1 is used for PVMD while PV1 or PV2 is used for SPMD.
3
Dependent values are used for PV and SV will produce the incorrect result of control
Illegal setup values used: COOL is used for OUT2, but DIRT (cooling action) is already used for OUT1
4
or PID mode is not used for OUT1 (that is PB1 or PB2 =0, and TI1 or TI2 =0)
Illegal setup values used: unequal IN1U and IN2U or unequal DP1 and DP2 while P1-2 or P2-1 is used
5 for PVMD or, PV1 or PV2 is used for SPMD or, P1.2.H, P1.2.L, D1.2.H or D1.2.L are used for A1FN or
A2FN
6 Illegal setup values used: OUT2 select =AL2 but A2FN select NONE
7 Illegal setup values used: Dwell timer (TIMR) is selected for both A1FN and A2FN
17 Computing error: Illegal floating-point data
18 Computing error: Arithmetic result overflow or underflow
19 Computing error: divided by zero
20 Computing error: Illegal BCD data entry
21 Timing error: A to D conversion data error due to overrun
26 Fail to perform the auto-tuning function
27 Incorrect calibration procedure or tolerance of analog component too big to meet the specified accuracy
32 Cold junction compensation device(s) malfunction
34 Input 2 ( IN2 ) signal too low
35 Input 2 ( IN2 ) signal too high
36 Input 1 ( IN1 ) signal too low
37 Input 1 ( IN1 ) signal too high
Input 2 ( IN2 ) sensor break, or input 2 current below 1 mA if 4-20 mA is selected, or input 2 voltage
38
below 0.25V if 1 - 5V is selected
Input 1 ( IN1 ) sensor break, or input 1 current below 1 mA if 4-20 mA is selected, or input 1 voltage
39
below 0.25V if 1 - 5V is selected
40 A to D converter or related component(s) malfunction

Note 6: SPMD
Parameter Value Display Symbol Description
0 SP1.2 Use SP1 or SP2 (depends on EIFN) as setpoint
1 MIN.R Use minute ramp rate as setpoint
2 HR.R Use hour ramp rate as setpoint
3 PV1 Use IN1 process value as setpoint
4 PV2 Use IN2 process value as setpoint
5 PUMP Selected for pump control

Note 7: EIFN
Parameter Value Display Symbol Description
0 NONE Event input no function
1 SP2 SP2 activated to replace SP1
2 PID2 PB2, TI2, TD2 activated to replace PB1, TI1, TD1
3 SP.P2 SP2, PB2, TI2, TD2 activated to replace SP1, PB1, TI1, TD1
4 RS.A1 Reset alarm 1 output
5 RS.A2 Reset alarm 2 output
6 R.A1.2 Reset alarm 1 & alarm 2
7 D.O1 Disable Output 1
8 D.O2 Disable Output 2
9 D.O1.2 Disable Output 1 & Output 2
10 LOCK Lock all parameters

Page 437 of 499

9.1.1.6 PID Process Control Module Data (Float Type)
Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1601 C1_PV Current process value R
1603 C1_SV Current setpoint Value R
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
1605 C1_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
1607 C1_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
1609 C1_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
1611 C1_MV1 Current output 1 value R
1613 C1_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
1615 C1_ALM R
status4
1617 C1_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
1619 C1_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
1621 C1_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
1623 Reserve Reserve R
1625 C1_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
1627 C1_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
1629 C1_Profile Profile number R
1631 C1_Segment Segment number R
1633 C1_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
1635 C1_Run Profile running R
1637 C1_Hold Profile held R
1639 C1_Up Running ramp up segment R
1641 C1_Down Running ramp down segment R
1643 C1_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
1645 C1_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
1647 C2_PV Current process value R

Page 438 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1649 C2_SV Current setpoint Value R
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
1651 C2_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
1653 C2_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
1655 C2_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
1657 C2_MV1 Current output 1 value R
1659 C2_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
1661 C2_ALM R
status4
1663 C2_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
1665 C2_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
1667 C2_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
1669 Reserve Reserve R
1671 C2_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
1673 C2_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
1675 C2_Profile Profile number R
1677 C2_Segment Segment number R
1679 C2_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
1681 C2_Run Profile running R
1683 C2_Hold Profile held R
1685 C2_Up Running ramp up segment R
1687 C2_Down Running ramp down segment R
1689 C2_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
1691 C2_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
1693 C3_PV Current process value R
1695 C3_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 439 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
1697 C3_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
1699 C3_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
1701 C3_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
1703 C3_MV1 Current output 1 value R
1705 C3_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
1707 C3_ALM R
status4
1709 C3_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
1711 C3_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
1713 C3_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
1715 Reserve Reserve R
1717 C3_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
1719 C3_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
1721 C3_Profile Profile number R
1723 C3_Segment Segment number R
1725 C3_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
1727 C3_Run Profile running R
1729 C3_Hold Profile held R
1731 C3_Up Running ramp up segment R
1733 C3_Down Running ramp down segment R
1735 C3_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
1737 C3_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
1739 C4_PV Current process value R
1741 C4_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 440 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
1743 C4_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
1745 C4_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
1747 C4_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
1749 C4_MV1 Current output 1 value R
1751 C4_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
1753 C4_ALM R
status4
1755 C4_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
1757 C4_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
1759 C4_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
1761 Reserve Reserve R
1763 C4_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
1765 C4_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
1767 C4_Profile Profile number R
1769 C4_Segment Segment number R
1771 C4_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
1773 C4_Run Profile running R
1775 C4_Hold Profile held R
1777 C4_Up Running ramp up segment R
1779 C4_Down Running ramp down segment R
1781 C4_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
1783 C4_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
1785 C5_PV Current process value R
1787 C5_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 441 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
1789 C5_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
1791 C5_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
1793 C5_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
1795 C5_MV1 Current output 1 value R
1797 C5_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
1799 C5_ALM R
status4
1801 C5_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
1803 C5_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
1805 C5_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
1807 Reserve Reserve R
1809 C5_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
1811 C5_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
1813 C5_Profile Profile number R
1815 C5_Segment Segment number R
1817 C5_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
1819 C5_Run Profile running R
1821 C5_Hold Profile held R
1823 C5_Up Running ramp up segment R
1825 C5_Down Running ramp down segment R
1827 C5_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
1829 C5_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
1831 C6_PV Current process value R
1833 C6_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 442 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
1835 C6_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
1837 C6_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
1839 C6_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
1841 C6_MV1 Current output 1 value R
1843 C6_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
1845 C6_ALM R
status4
1847 C6_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
1849 C6_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
1851 C6_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
1853 Reserve Reserve R
1855 C6_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
1857 C6_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
1859 C6_Profile Profile number R
1861 C6_Segment Segment number R
1863 C6_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
1865 C6_Run Profile running R
1867 C6_Hold Profile held R
1869 C6_Up Running ramp up segment R
1871 C6_Down Running ramp down segment R
1873 C6_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
1875 C6_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
1877 C7_PV Current process value R
1879 C7_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 443 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
1881 C7_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
1883 C7_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
1885 C7_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
1887 C7_MV1 Current output 1 value R
1889 C7_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
1891 C7_ALM R
status4
1893 C7_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
1895 C7_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
1897 C7_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
1899 Reserve Reserve R
1901 C7_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
1903 C7_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
1905 C7_Profile Profile number R
1907 C7_Segment Segment number R
1909 C7_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
1911 C7_Run Profile running R
1913 C7_Hold Profile held R
1915 C7_Up Running ramp up segment R
1917 C7_Down Running ramp down segment R
1919 C7_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
1921 C7_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout
1923 C8_PV Current process value R
1925 C8_SV Current setpoint Value R

Page 444 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
PV mode selection1
0 : PV1
1927 C8_PVMD 1 : PV2 R
2 : PV1 - 2
3 : PV2 - 1
IN1 unit selection2
0:℃
1929 C8_IN1U R
1:℉
2 : PU
IN2 unit selection3
0:℃
1931 C8_IN2U R
1:℉
2 : PU
1933 C8_MV1 Current output 1 value R
1935 C8_MV2 Current output 2 value R
Contains conditional code of parameters' resolution and current alarm
1937 C8_ALM R
status4
1939 C8_ERROR Current error code5 R
Setpoint mode selection6
0: SP1.2
1: MIN.R
1941 C8_SPMD 2: HR.R R
3: PV1
4: PV2
5: PUMP
Event input function7
0: None
1: SP2
2: PID2
3: SP.P2
4: RS.A1
1943 C8_EIFN R
5: RS.A2
6: R.A1.2
7: D.O1
8: D.O2
9: D.O1.2
10: LOCK
1945 Reserve Reserve R
1947 C8_SP1 Setpoint 1 R
1949 C8_SP2 Setpoint 2 R
1951 C8_Profile Profile number R
1953 C8_Segment Segment number R
1955 C8_Cycle Cycle remaining for the current loop R
1957 C8_Run Profile running R
1959 C8_Hold Profile held R
1961 C8_Up Running ramp up segment R
1963 C8_Down Running ramp down segment R
1965 C8_Unit Current input unit R
Profile error
1967 C8_ProfileERROR 0: Normal R
1: Holdback timeout

Page 445 of 499

9.1.1.7 System Information (Integer Type)
Modbus Address Register Name Access
901 Percentage free of internal memory R
902 Percentage free of external memory R

9.1.1.8 System Information (Float Type)

Modbus Address Register Name Access
2901 Percentage free of internal memory R
2903 Percentage free of external memory R

9.1.1.9 Alarm Status (Integer Type)

Modbus Address Register Name Access
Alarm Status
3001 Bit 0: System Alarm R
Bit 1 ~ Bit 15:AI 1 ~AI 15
Alarm Status
3002 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15:AI 16 ~AI 31
Alarm Status
3003 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15:AI 32 ~AI 47
Alarm Status
3004 Bit 0: AI 48 R
Bit 1 ~ Bit 15: Math 1 ~ Math 15
Alarm Status
3005 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15: Math 16 ~ Math 31
Alarm Status
3006 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15: Math 32 ~ Math 47
Alarm Status
3007 Bit 0 ~ Bit 12: Math 48 ~ Math 60 R
Bit 13 ~ Bit 15: DI 1 ~ DI3
Alarm Status
3008 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15: DI 4 ~ DI 19
Alarm Status
3009 Bit 0 ~ Bit 4: DI 20 ~ DI 24 R
Bit 5 ~ Bit 15: Ext 1 ~ Ext11
Alarm Status
3010 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15: Ext 12 ~ Ext 27
Alarm Status
3011 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15: Ext 28 ~ Ext 43
Alarm Status
3012 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15: Ext 44 ~ Ext 59
Alarm Status
3013 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15: Ext 60 ~ Ext 75
Alarm Status
3014 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 15: Ext 76 ~ Ext 91
Alarm Status
3015 R
Bit 0 ~ Bit 4: Ext 92 ~ Ext 96

Page 446 of 499

9.1.2 Holding Register (4xxxxx) Parameter Table for Modbus RTU Slave / TCP Server

9.1.2.1 External Channels 2 Bytes Data (Integer Type)

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1 Ext1 Measured data on External 1 R/W
2 Ext2 Measured data on External 2 R/W
3 Ext3 Measured data on External 3 R/W
4 Ext4 Measured data on External 4 R/W
5 Ext5 Measured data on External 5 R/W
6 Ext6 Measured data on External 6 R/W
7 Ext7 Measured data on External 7 R/W
8 Ext8 Measured data on External 8 R/W
9 Ext9 Measured data on External 9 R/W
10 Ext10 Measured data on External 10 R/W
11 Ext11 Measured data on External 11 R/W
12 Ext12 Measured data on External 12 R/W
13 Ext13 Measured data on External 13 R/W
14 Ext14 Measured data on External 14 R/W
15 Ext15 Measured data on External 15 R/W
16 Ext16 Measured data on External 16 R/W
17 Ext17 Measured data on External 17 R/W
18 Ext18 Measured data on External 18 R/W
19 Ext19 Measured data on External 19 R/W
20 Ext20 Measured data on External 20 R/W
21 Ext21 Measured data on External 21 R/W
22 Ext22 Measured data on External 22 R/W
23 Ext23 Measured data on External 23 R/W
24 Ext24 Measured data on External 24 R/W
25 Ext25 Measured data on External 25 R/W
26 Ext26 Measured data on External 26 R/W
27 Ext27 Measured data on External 27 R/W
28 Ext28 Measured data on External 28 R/W
29 Ext29 Measured data on External 29 R/W
30 Ext30 Measured data on External 30 R/W
31 Ext31 Measured data on External 31 R/W
32 Ext32 Measured data on External 32 R/W
33 Ext33 Measured data on External 33 R/W
34 Ext34 Measured data on External 34 R/W
35 Ext35 Measured data on External 35 R/W
36 Ext36 Measured data on External 36 R/W
37 Ext37 Measured data on External 37 R/W
38 Ext38 Measured data on External 38 R/W
39 Ext39 Measured data on External 39 R/W
40 Ext40 Measured data on External 40 R/W
41 Ext41 Measured data on External 41 R/W
42 Ext42 Measured data on External 42 R/W
43 Ext43 Measured data on External 43 R/W
44 Ext44 Measured data on External 44 R/W
45 Ext45 Measured data on External 45 R/W
46 Ext46 Measured data on External 46 R/W
47 Ext47 Measured data on External 47 R/W
48 Ext48 Measured data on External 48 R/W
49 Ext49 Measured data on External 49 R/W
50 Ext50 Measured data on External 50 R/W

Page 447 of 499

 Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
51 Ext51 Measured data on External 51 R/W
52 Ext52 Measured data on External 52 R/W
53 Ext53 Measured data on External 53 R/W
54 Ext54 Measured data on External 54 R/W
55 Ext55 Measured data on External 55 R/W
56 Ext56 Measured data on External 56 R/W
57 Ext57 Measured data on External 57 R/W
58 Ext58 Measured data on External 58 R/W
59 Ext59 Measured data on External 59 R/W
60 Ext60 Measured data on External 60 R/W
61 Ext61 Measured data on External 61 R/W
62 Ext62 Measured data on External 62 R/W
63 Ext63 Measured data on External 63 R/W
64 Ext64 Measured data on External 64 R/W
65 Ext65 Measured data on External 65 R/W
66 Ext66 Measured data on External 66 R/W
67 Ext67 Measured data on External 67 R/W
68 Ext68 Measured data on External 68 R/W
69 Ext69 Measured data on External 69 R/W
70 Ext70 Measured data on External 70 R/W
71 Ext71 Measured data on External 71 R/W
72 Ext72 Measured data on External 72 R/W
73 Ext73 Measured data on External 73 R/W
74 Ext74 Measured data on External 74 R/W
75 Ext75 Measured data on External 75 R/W
76 Ext76 Measured data on External 76 R/W
77 Ext77 Measured data on External 77 R/W
78 Ext78 Measured data on External 78 R/W
79 Ext79 Measured data on External 79 R/W
80 Ext80 Measured data on External 80 R/W
81 Ext81 Measured data on External 81 R/W
82 Ext82 Measured data on External 82 R/W
83 Ext83 Measured data on External 83 R/W
84 Ext84 Measured data on External 84 R/W
85 Ext85 Measured data on External 85 R/W
86 Ext86 Measured data on External 86 R/W
87 Ext87 Measured data on External 87 R/W
88 Ext88 Measured data on External 88 R/W
89 Ext89 Measured data on External 89 R/W
90 Ext90 Measured data on External 90 R/W
91 Ext91 Measured data on External 91 R/W
92 Ext92 Measured data on External 92 R/W
93 Ext93 Measured data on External 93 R/W
94 Ext94 Measured data on External 94 R/W
95 Ext95 Measured data on External 95 R/W
96 Ext96 Measured data on External 96 R/W

Note: If the register value is 65534, then there is a communication error.

9.1.2.2 External Channels 4 Bytes Data (Integer Type)

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
201 Ext1 The high word of measured data is on External 1 R/W
202 Ext1 The low word of measured data is on External 1 R/W

Page 448 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
203 Ext2 The high word of measured data is on External 2 R/W
204 Ext2 The low word of measured data is on External 2 R/W
205 Ext3 The high word of measured data is on External 3 R/W
206 Ext3 The low word of measured data is on External 3 R/W
207 Ext4 The high word of measured data is on External 4 R/W
208 Ext4 The low word of measured data is on External 4 R/W
209 Ext5 The high word of measured data is on External 5 R/W
210 Ext5 The low word of measured data is on External 5 R/W
211 Ext6 The high word of measured data is on External 6 R/W
212 Ext6 The low word of measured data is on External 6 R/W
213 Ext7 The high word of measured data is on External 7 R/W
214 Ext7 The low word of measured data is on External 7 R/W
215 Ext8 The high word of measured data is on External 8 R/W
216 Ext8 The low word of measured data is on External 8 R/W
217 Ext9 The high word of measured data is on External 9 R/W
218 Ext9 The low word of measured data is on External 9 R/W
219 Ext10 The high word of measured data is on External 10 R/W
220 Ext10 The low word of measured data is on External 10 R/W
221 Ext11 The high word of measured data is on External 11 R/W
222 Ext11 The low word of measured data is on External 11 R/W
223 Ext12 The high word of measured data is on External 12 R/W
224 Ext12 The low word of measured data is on External 12 R/W
225 Ext13 The high word of measured data is on External 13 R/W
226 Ext13 The low word of measured data is on External 13 R/W
227 Ext14 The high word of measured data is on External 14 R/W
228 Ext14 The low word of measured data is on External 14 R/W
229 Ext15 The high word of measured data is on External 15 R/W
230 Ext15 The low word of measured data is on External 15 R/W
231 Ext16 The high word of measured data is on External 16 R/W
232 Ext16 The low word of measured data is on External 16 R/W
233 Ext17 The high word of measured data is on External 17 R/W
234 Ext17 The low word of measured data is on External 17 R/W
235 Ext18 The high word of measured data is on External 18 R/W
236 Ext18 The low word of measured data is on External 18 R/W
237 Ext19 The high word of measured data is on External 19 R/W
238 Ext19 The low word of measured data is on External 19 R/W
239 Ext20 The high word of measured data is on External 20 R/W
240 Ext20 The low word of measured data is on External 20 R/W
241 Ext21 The high word of measured data is on External 21 R/W
242 Ext21 The low word of measured data is on External 21 R/W
243 Ext22 The high word of measured data is on External 22 R/W
244 Ext22 The low word of measured data is on External 22 R/W
245 Ext23 The high word of measured data is on External 23 R/W
246 Ext23 The low word of measured data is on External 23 R/W
247 Ext24 The high word of measured data is on External 24 R/W
248 Ext24 The low word of measured data is on External 24 R/W
249 Ext25 The high word of measured data is on External 25 R/W
250 Ext25 The low word of measured data is on External 25 R/W
251 Ext26 The high word of measured data is on External 26 R/W
252 Ext26 The low word of measured data is on External 26 R/W
253 Ext27 The high word of measured data is on External 27 R/W
254 Ext27 The low word of measured data is on External 27 R/W
255 Ext28 The high word of measured data is on External 28 R/W

Page 449 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
256 Ext28 The low word of measured data is on External 28 R/W
257 Ext29 The high word of measured data is on External 29 R/W
258 Ext29 The low word of measured data is on External 29 R/W
259 Ext30 The high word of measured data is on External 30 R/W
260 Ext30 The low word of measured data is on External 30 R/W
261 Ext31 The high word of measured data is on External 31 R/W
262 Ext31 The low word of measured data is on External 31 R/W
263 Ext32 The high word of measured data is on External 32 R/W
264 Ext32 The low word of measured data is on External 32 R/W
265 Ext33 The high word of measured data is on External 33 R/W
266 Ext33 The low word of measured data is on External 33 R/W
267 Ext34 The high word of measured data is on External 34 R/W
268 Ext34 The low word of measured data is on External 34 R/W
269 Ext35 The high word of measured data is on External 35 R/W
270 Ext35 The high word of measured data is on External 35 R/W
271 Ext36 The high word of measured data is on External 36 R/W
272 Ext36 The low word of measured data is on External 36 R/W
273 Ext37 The high word of measured data is on External 37 R/W
274 Ext37 The low word of measured data is on External 37 R/W
275 Ext38 The high word of measured data is on External 38 R/W
276 Ext38 The low word of measured data is on External 38 R/W
277 Ext39 The high word of measured data is on External 39 R/W
278 Ext39 The low word of measured data is on External 39 R/W
279 Ext40 The high word of measured data is on External 40 R/W
280 Ext40 The low word of measured data is on External 40 R/W
281 Ext41 The high word of measured data is on External 41 R/W
282 Ext41 The low word of measured data is on External 41 R/W
283 Ext42 The high word of measured data is on External 42 R/W
284 Ext42 The low word of measured data is on External 42 R/W
285 Ext43 The high word of measured data is on External 43 R/W
286 Ext43 The low word of measured data is on External 43 R/W
287 Ext44 The high word of measured data is on External 44 R/W
288 Ext44 The low word of measured data is on External 44 R/W
289 Ext45 The high word of measured data is on External 45 R/W
290 Ext45 The low word of measured data is on External 45 R/W
291 Ext46 The high word of measured data is on External 46 R/W
292 Ext46 The low word of measured data is on External 46 R/W
293 Ext47 The high word of measured data is on External 47 R/W
294 Ext47 The low word of measured data is on External 47 R/W
295 Ext48 The high word of measured data is on External 48 R/W
296 Ext48 The low word of measured data is on External 48 R/W
297 Ext49 The high word of measured data is on External 49 R/W
298 Ext49 The low word of measured data is on External 49 R/W
299 Ext50 The high word of measured data is on External 50 R/W
300 Ext50 The low word of measured data is on External 50 R/W
301 Ext51 The high word of measured data is on External 51 R/W
302 Ext51 The low word of measured data is on External 51 R/W
303 Ext52 The high word of measured data is on External 52 R/W
304 Ext52 The low word of measured data is on External 52 R/W
305 Ext53 The high word of measured data is on External 53 R/W
306 Ext53 The low word of measured data is on External 53 R/W
307 Ext54 The high word of measured data is on External 54 R/W
308 Ext54 The low word of measured data is on External 54 R/W

Page 450 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
309 Ext55 The high word of measured data is on External 55 R/W
310 Ext55 The low word of measured data is on External 55 R/W
311 Ext56 The high word of measured data is on External 56 R/W
312 Ext56 The low word of measured data is on External 56 R/W
313 Ext57 The high word of measured data is on External 57 R/W
314 Ext57 The low word of measured data is on External 57 R/W
315 Ext58 The high word of measured data is on External 58 R/W
316 Ext58 The low word of measured data is on External 58 R/W
317 Ext59 The high word of measured data is on External 59 R/W
318 Ext59 The low word of measured data is on External 59 R/W
319 Ext60 The high word of measured data is on External 60 R/W
320 Ext60 The low word of measured data is on External 60 R/W
321 Ext61 The high word of measured data is on External 61 R/W
322 Ext61 The low word of measured data is on External 61 R/W
323 Ext62 The high word of measured data is on External 62 R/W
324 Ext62 The low word of measured data is on External 62 R/W
325 Ext63 The high word of measured data is on External 63 R/W
326 Ext63 The low word of measured data is on External 63 R/W
327 Ext64 The high word of measured data is on External 64 R/W
328 Ext64 The low word of measured data is on External 64 R/W
329 Ext65 The high word of measured data is on External 65 R/W
330 Ext65 The low word of measured data is on External 65 R/W
331 Ext66 The high word of measured data is on External 66 R/W
332 Ext66 The low word of measured data is on External 66 R/W
333 Ext67 The high word of measured data is on External 67 R/W
334 Ext67 The low word of measured data is on External 67 R/W
335 Ext68 The high word of measured data is on External 68 R/W
336 Ext68 The low word of measured data is on External 68 R/W
337 Ext69 The high word of measured data is on External 69 R/W
338 Ext69 The low word of measured data is on External 69 R/W
339 Ext70 The high word of measured data is on External 70 R/W
340 Ext70 The low word of measured data is on External 70 R/W
341 Ext71 The high word of measured data is on External 71 R/W
342 Ext71 The low word of measured data is on External 71 R/W
343 Ext72 The high word of measured data is on External 72 R/W
344 Ext72 The low word of measured data is on External 72 R/W
345 Ext73 The high word of measured data is on External 73 R/W
346 Ext73 The low word of measured data is on External 73 R/W
347 Ext74 The high word of measured data is on External 74 R/W
348 Ext74 The low word of measured data is on External 74 R/W
349 Ext75 The high word of measured data is on External 75 R/W
350 Ext75 The low word of measured data is on External 75 R/W
351 Ext76 The high word of measured data is on External 76 R/W
352 Ext76 The low word of measured data is on External 76 R/W
353 Ext77 The high word of measured data is on External 77 R/W
354 Ext77 The low word of measured data is on External 77 R/W
355 Ext78 The high word of measured data is on External 78 R/W
356 Ext78 The low word of measured data is on External 78 R/W
357 Ext79 The high word of measured data is on External 79 R/W
358 Ext79 The low word of measured data is on External 79 R/W
359 Ext80 The high word of measured data is on External 80 R/W
360 Ext80 The low word of measured data is on External 80 R/W
361 Ext81 The high word of measured data is on External 81 R/W

Page 451 of 499

 Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
362 Ext81 The low word of measured data is on External 81 R/W
363 Ext82 The high word of measured data is on External 82 R/W
364 Ext82 The low word of measured data is on External 82 R/W
365 Ext83 The high word of measured data is on External 83 R/W
366 Ext83 The low word of measured data is on External 83 R/W
367 Ext84 The high word of measured data is on External 84 R/W
368 Ext84 The low word of measured data is on External 84 R/W
369 Ext85 The high word of measured data is on External 85 R/W
370 Ext85 The low word of measured data is on External 85 R/W
371 Ext86 The high word of measured data is on External 86 R/W
372 Ext86 The low word of measured data is on External 86 R/W
373 Ext87 The high word of measured data is on External 87 R/W
374 Ext87 The low word of measured data is on External 87 R/W
375 Ext88 The high word of measured data is on External 88 R/W
376 Ext88 The low word of measured data is on External 88 R/W
377 Ext89 The high word of measured data is on External 89 R/W
378 Ext89 The low word of measured data is on External 89 R/W
379 Ext90 The high word of measured data is on External 90 R/W
380 Ext90 The low word of measured data is on External 90 R/W
381 Ext91 The high word of measured data is on External 91 R/W
382 Ext91 The low word of measured data is on External 91 R/W
383 Ext92 The high word of measured data is on External 92 R/W
384 Ext92 The low word of measured data is on External 92 R/W
385 Ext93 The high word of measured data is on External 93 R/W
386 Ext93 The low word of measured data is on External 93 R/W
387 Ext94 The high word of measured data is on External 94 R/W
388 Ext94 The low word of measured data is on External 94 R/W
389 Ext95 The high word of measured data is on External 95 R/W
390 Ext95 The low word of measured data is on External 95 R/W
391 Ext96 The high word of measured data is on External 96 R/W
392 Ext96 The low word of measured data is on External 96 R/W

Note: If the register value is 4294967294, then there is a communication error.

9.1.2.3 External Channels 4 Bytes Data (Float Type)

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1001 Ext1 Measured data on External 1 R/W
1003 Ext2 Measured data on External 2 R/W
1005 Ext3 Measured data on External 3 R/W
1007 Ext4 Measured data on External 4 R/W
1009 Ext5 Measured data on External 5 R/W
1011 Ext6 Measured data on External 6 R/W
1013 Ext7 Measured data on External 7 R/W
1015 Ext8 Measured data on External 8 R/W
1017 Ext9 Measured data on External 9 R/W
1019 Ext10 Measured data on External 10 R/W
1021 Ext11 Measured data on External 11 R/W
1023 Ext12 Measured data on External 12 R/W
1025 Ext13 Measured data on External 13 R/W
1027 Ext14 Measured data on External 14 R/W
1029 Ext15 Measured data on External 15 R/W
1031 Ext16 Measured data on External 16 R/W
1033 Ext17 Measured data on External 17 R/W

Page 452 of 499

Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1035 Ext18 Measured data on External 18 R/W
1037 Ext19 Measured data on External 19 R/W
1039 Ext20 Measured data on External 20 R/W
1041 Ext21 Measured data on External 21 R/W
1043 Ext22 Measured data on External 22 R/W
1045 Ext23 Measured data on External 23 R/W
1047 Ext24 Measured data on External 24 R/W
1049 Ext25 Measured data on External 25 R/W
1051 Ext26 Measured data on External 26 R/W
1053 Ext27 Measured data on External 27 R/W
1055 Ext28 Measured data on External 28 R/W
1057 Ext29 Measured data on External 29 R/W
1059 Ext30 Measured data on External 30 R/W
1061 Ext31 Measured data on External 31 R/W
1063 Ext32 Measured data on External 32 R/W
1065 Ext33 Measured data on External 33 R/W
1067 Ext34 Measured data on External 34 R/W
1069 Ext35 Measured data on External 35 R/W
1071 Ext36 Measured data on External 36 R/W
1073 Ext37 Measured data on External 37 R/W
1075 Ext38 Measured data on External 38 R/W
1077 Ext39 Measured data on External 39 R/W
1079 Ext40 Measured data on External 40 R/W
1081 Ext41 Measured data on External 41 R/W
1083 Ext42 Measured data on External 42 R/W
1085 Ext43 Measured data on External 43 R/W
1087 Ext44 Measured data on External 44 R/W
1089 Ext45 Measured data on External 45 R/W
1091 Ext46 Measured data on External 46 R/W
1093 Ext47 Measured data on External 47 R/W
1095 Ext48 Measured data on External 48 R/W
1097 Ext49 Measured data on External 49 R/W
1099 Ext50 Measured data on External 50 R/W
1101 Ext51 Measured data on External 51 R/W
1103 Ext52 Measured data on External 52 R/W
1105 Ext53 Measured data on External 53 R/W
1107 Ext54 Measured data on External 54 R/W
1109 Ext55 Measured data on External 55 R/W
1111 Ext56 Measured data on External 56 R/W
1113 Ext57 Measured data on External 57 R/W
1115 Ext58 Measured data on External 58 R/W
1117 Ext59 Measured data on External 59 R/W
1119 Ext60 Measured data on External 60 R/W
1121 Ext61 Measured data on External 61 R/W
1123 Ext62 Measured data on External 62 R/W
1125 Ext63 Measured data on External 63 R/W
1127 Ext64 Measured data on External 64 R/W
1129 Ext65 Measured data on External 65 R/W
1131 Ext66 Measured data on External 66 R/W
1133 Ext67 Measured data on External 67 R/W
1135 Ext68 Measured data on External 68 R/W
1137 Ext69 Measured data on External 69 R/W
1139 Ext70 Measured data on External 70 R/W

Page 453 of 499

 Modbus Address Notation Register Name Access
1141 Ext71 Measured data on External 71 R/W
1143 Ext72 Measured data on External 72 R/W
1145 Ext73 Measured data on External 73 R/W
1147 Ext74 Measured data on External 74 R/W
1149 Ext75 Measured data on External 75 R/W
1151 Ext76 Measured data on External 76 R/W
1153 Ext77 Measured data on External 77 R/W
1155 Ext78 Measured data on External 78 R/W
1157 Ext79 Measured data on External 79 R/W
1159 Ext80 Measured data on External 80 R/W
1161 Ext81 Measured data on External 81 R/W
1163 Ext82 Measured data on External 82 R/W
1165 Ext83 Measured data on External 83 R/W
1167 Ext84 Measured data on External 84 R/W
1169 Ext85 Measured data on External 85 R/W
1171 Ext86 Measured data on External 86 R/W
1173 Ext87 Measured data on External 87 R/W
1175 Ext88 Measured data on External 88 R/W
1177 Ext89 Measured data on External 89 R/W
1179 Ext90 Measured data on External 90 R/W
1181 Ext91 Measured data on External 91 R/W
1183 Ext92 Measured data on External 92 R/W
1185 Ext93 Measured data on External 93 R/W
1187 Ext94 Measured data on External 94 R/W
1189 Ext95 Measured data on External 95 R/W
1191 Ext96 Measured data on External 96 R/W

Note: If the register value is 3.0+E38, then there is a communication error.

9.1.3 Holding Register Parameter Table for Remote Command

9.1.3.1 Command Data

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
0 : Stop
10002 Start / Stop data log R/W
1 : Start
10003 Year 2000 ~ 2030 W
10004 Month 1 ~ 12 W
10005 Day 1 ~ 31 W
10006 Hour 0 ~ 23 W
10007 Minute 0 ~ 59 W
10008 Second 0 ~ 59 W
Include 2 characters for
10102 Batch Name R/W
1
each register○
10103 Batch Name  R/W
10104 Batch Name  R/W
10105 Batch Name  R/W
10106 Batch Name  R/W
10107 Batch Name  R/W
10108 Batch Name  R/W
10109 Batch Name  R/W
10110 Batch Name  R/W
10111 Batch Name  R/W
10112 Batch Name  R/W

Page 454 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
10113 Batch Name  R/W
10114 Batch Name  R/W
10115 Batch Name  R/W
10116 Batch Name  R/W
10117 Batch Name  R/W
10118 Batch Name  R/W
10119 Batch Name  R/W
10120 Lot NO. 1 ~ 65535 R/W
Include 2 characters for
10121 Comment1 R/W
1
each register○
10122 Comment1  R/W
10123 Comment1  R/W
10124 Comment1  R/W
10125 Comment1  R/W
10126 Comment1  R/W
10127 Comment1  R/W
10128 Comment1  R/W
10129 Comment1  R/W
10130 Comment1  R/W
10131 Comment1  R/W
10132 Comment1  R/W
10133 Comment1  R/W
10134 Comment1  R/W
10135 Comment1  R/W
10136 Comment1  R/W
10137 Comment1  R/W
10138 Comment1  R/W
10139 Comment1  R/W
10140 Comment1  R/W
10141 Comment1  R/W
10142 Comment1  R/W
10143 Comment1  R/W
10144 Comment1  R/W
10145 Comment1  R/W
10146 Comment1  R/W
10147 Comment1  R/W
10148 Comment1  R/W
10149 Comment1  R/W
10150 Comment1  R/W
10151 Comment1  R/W
10152 Comment1  R/W
10153 Comment1  R/W
10154 Comment1  R/W
10155 Comment1  R/W
10156 Comment1  R/W
10157 Comment2  R/W
10158 Comment2  R/W
10159 Comment2  R/W
10160 Comment2  R/W
10161 Comment2  R/W
10162 Comment2  R/W
10163 Comment2  R/W
10164 Comment2  R/W

Page 455 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
10165 Comment2  R/W
10166 Comment2  R/W
10167 Comment2  R/W
10168 Comment2  R/W
10169 Comment2  R/W
10170 Comment2  R/W
10171 Comment2  R/W
10172 Comment2  R/W
10173 Comment2  R/W
10174 Comment2  R/W
10175 Comment2  R/W
10176 Comment2  R/W
10177 Comment2  R/W
10178 Comment2  R/W
10179 Comment2  R/W
10180 Comment2  R/W
10181 Comment2  R/W
10182 Comment2  R/W
10183 Comment2  R/W
10184 Comment2  R/W
10185 Comment2  R/W
10186 Comment2  R/W
10187 Comment2  R/W
10188 Comment2  R/W
10189 Comment2  R/W
10190 Comment2  R/W
10191 Comment2  R/W
10192 Comment2  R/W
10193 Comment3  R/W
10194 Comment3  R/W
10195 Comment3  R/W
10196 Comment3  R/W
10197 Comment3  R/W
10198 Comment3  R/W
10199 Comment3  R/W
10200 Comment3  R/W
10201 Comment3  R/W
10202 Comment3  R/W
10203 Comment3  R/W
10204 Comment3  R/W
10205 Comment3  R/W
10206 Comment3  R/W
10207 Comment3  R/W
10208 Comment3  R/W
10209 Comment3  R/W
10210 Comment3  R/W
10211 Comment3  R/W
10212 Comment3  R/W
10213 Comment3  R/W
10214 Comment3  R/W
10215 Comment3  R/W
10216 Comment3  R/W
10217 Comment3  R/W

Page 456 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
10218 Comment3  R/W
10219 Comment3  R/W
10220 Comment3  R/W
10221 Comment3  R/W
10222 Comment3  R/W
10223 Comment3  R/W
10224 Comment3  R/W
10225 Comment3  R/W
10226 Comment3  R/W
10227 Comment3  R/W
10228 Comment3  R/W
10229 Comment4  R/W
10230 Comment4  R/W
10231 Comment4  R/W
10232 Comment4  R/W
10233 Comment4  R/W
10234 Comment4  R/W
10235 Comment4  R/W
10236 Comment4  R/W
10237 Comment4  R/W
10238 Comment4  R/W
10239 Comment4  R/W
10240 Comment4  R/W
10241 Comment4  R/W
10242 Comment4  R/W
10243 Comment4  R/W
10244 Comment4  R/W
10245 Comment4  R/W
10246 Comment4  R/W
10247 Comment4  R/W
10248 Comment4  R/W
10249 Comment4  R/W
10250 Comment4  R/W
10251 Comment4  R/W
10252 Comment4  R/W
10253 Comment4  R/W
10254 Comment4  R/W
10255 Comment4  R/W
10256 Comment4  R/W
10257 Comment4  R/W
10258 Comment4  R/W
10259 Comment4  R/W
10260 Comment4  R/W
10261 Comment4  R/W
10262 Comment4  R/W
10263 Comment4  R/W
10264 Comment4  R/W
10265 Comment5  R/W
10266 Comment5  R/W
10267 Comment5  R/W
10268 Comment5  R/W
10269 Comment5  R/W
10270 Comment5  R/W

Page 457 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
10271 Comment5  R/W
10272 Comment5  R/W
10273 Comment5  R/W
10274 Comment5  R/W
10275 Comment5  R/W
10276 Comment5  R/W
10277 Comment5  R/W
10278 Comment5  R/W
10279 Comment5  R/W
10280 Comment5  R/W
10281 Comment5  R/W
10282 Comment5  R/W
10283 Comment5  R/W
10284 Comment5  R/W
10285 Comment5  R/W
10286 Comment5  R/W
10287 Comment5  R/W
10288 Comment5  R/W
10289 Comment5  R/W
10290 Comment5  R/W
10291 Comment5  R/W
10292 Comment5  R/W
10293 Comment5  R/W
10294 Comment5  R/W
10295 Comment5  R/W
10296 Comment5  R/W
10297 Comment5  R/W
10298 Comment5  R/W
10299 Comment5  R/W
10300 Comment5  R/W
10301 Comment6  R/W
10302 Comment6  R/W
10303 Comment6  R/W
10304 Comment6  R/W
10305 Comment6  R/W
10306 Comment6  R/W
10307 Comment6  R/W
10308 Comment6  R/W
10309 Comment6  R/W
10310 Comment6  R/W
10311 Comment6  R/W
10312 Comment6  R/W
10313 Comment6  R/W
10314 Comment6  R/W
10315 Comment6  R/W
10316 Comment6  R/W
10317 Comment6  R/W
10318 Comment6  R/W
10319 Comment6  R/W
10320 Comment6  R/W
10321 Comment6  R/W
10322 Comment6  R/W
10323 Comment6  R/W

Page 458 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
10324 Comment6  R/W
10325 Comment6  R/W
10326 Comment6  R/W
10327 Comment6  R/W
10328 Comment6  R/W
10329 Comment6  R/W
10330 Comment6  R/W
10331 Comment6  R/W
10332 Comment6  R/W
10333 Comment6  R/W
10334 Comment6  R/W
10335 Comment6  R/W
10336 Comment6  R/W
10337 Comment7  R/W
10338 Comment7  R/W
10339 Comment7  R/W
10340 Comment7  R/W
10341 Comment7  R/W
10342 Comment7  R/W
10343 Comment7  R/W
10344 Comment7  R/W
10345 Comment7  R/W
10346 Comment7  R/W
10347 Comment7  R/W
10348 Comment7  R/W
10349 Comment7  R/W
10350 Comment7  R/W
10351 Comment7  R/W
10352 Comment7  R/W
10353 Comment7  R/W
10354 Comment7  R/W
10355 Comment7  R/W
10356 Comment7  R/W
10357 Comment7  R/W
10358 Comment7  R/W
10359 Comment7  R/W
10360 Comment7  R/W
10361 Comment7  R/W
10362 Comment7  R/W
10363 Comment7  R/W
10364 Comment7  R/W
10365 Comment7  R/W
10366 Comment7  R/W
10367 Comment7  R/W
10368 Comment7  R/W
10369 Comment7  R/W
10370 Comment7  R/W
10371 Comment7  R/W
10372 Comment7  R/W
10373 Comment8  R/W
10374 Comment8  R/W
10375 Comment8  R/W
10376 Comment8  R/W

Page 459 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
10377 Comment8  R/W
10378 Comment8  R/W
10379 Comment8  R/W
10380 Comment8  R/W
10381 Comment8  R/W
10382 Comment8  R/W
10383 Comment8  R/W
10384 Comment8  R/W
10385 Comment8  R/W
10386 Comment8  R/W
10387 Comment8  R/W
10388 Comment8  R/W
10389 Comment8  R/W
10390 Comment8  R/W
10391 Comment8  R/W
10392 Comment8  R/W
10393 Comment8  R/W
10394 Comment8  R/W
10395 Comment8  R/W
10396 Comment8  R/W
10397 Comment8  R/W
10398 Comment8  R/W
10399 Comment8  R/W
10400 Comment8  R/W
10401 Comment8  R/W
10402 Comment8  R/W
10403 Comment8  R/W
10404 Comment8  R/W
10405 Comment8  R/W
10406 Comment8  R/W
10407 Comment8  R/W
10408 Comment8  R/W
10409 Comment9  R/W
10410 Comment9  R/W
10411 Comment9  R/W
10412 Comment9  R/W
10413 Comment9  R/W
10414 Comment9  R/W
10415 Comment9  R/W
10416 Comment9  R/W
10417 Comment9  R/W
10418 Comment9  R/W
10419 Comment9  R/W
10420 Comment9  R/W
10421 Comment9  R/W
10422 Comment9  R/W
10423 Comment9  R/W
10424 Comment9  R/W
10425 Comment9  R/W
10426 Comment9  R/W
10427 Comment9  R/W
10428 Comment9  R/W
10429 Comment9  R/W

Page 460 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
10430 Comment9  R/W
10431 Comment9  R/W
10432 Comment9  R/W
10433 Comment9  R/W
10434 Comment9  R/W
10435 Comment9  R/W
10436 Comment9  R/W
10437 Comment9  R/W
10438 Comment9  R/W
10439 Comment9  R/W
10440 Comment9  R/W
10441 Comment9  R/W
10442 Comment9  R/W
10443 Comment9  R/W
10444 Comment9  R/W
10445 Comment10  R/W
10446 Comment10  R/W
10447 Comment10  R/W
10448 Comment10  R/W
10449 Comment10  R/W
10450 Comment10  R/W
10451 Comment10  R/W
10452 Comment10  R/W
10453 Comment10  R/W
10454 Comment10  R/W
10455 Comment10  R/W
10456 Comment10  R/W
10457 Comment10  R/W
10458 Comment10  R/W
10459 Comment10  R/W
10460 Comment10  R/W
10461 Comment10  R/W
10462 Comment10  R/W
10463 Comment10  R/W
10464 Comment10  R/W
10465 Comment10  R/W
10466 Comment10  R/W
10467 Comment10  R/W
10468 Comment10  R/W
10469 Comment10  R/W
10470 Comment10  R/W
10471 Comment10  R/W
10472 Comment10  R/W
10473 Comment10  R/W
10474 Comment10  R/W
10475 Comment10  R/W
10476 Comment10  R/W
10477 Comment10  R/W
10478 Comment10  R/W
10479 Comment10  R/W
10480 Comment10  R/W
10481 Description  R/W
10482 Description  R/W

Page 461 of 499

 Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
10483 Description  R/W
10484 Description  R/W
10485 Description  R/W
10486 Description  R/W
10487 Description  R/W
10488 Description  R/W
10489 Description  R/W
10490 Description  R/W
10491 Description  R/W
10492 Description  R/W
10493 Description  R/W
10494 Description  R/W
10495 Description  R/W
10496 Description  R/W
10497 Description  R/W
10498 Description  R/W
10499 Description  R/W
10500 Description  R/W
10501 Description  R/W
10502 Description  R/W
10503 Description  R/W
10504 Description  R/W
10505 Description  R/W
10506 Description  R/W
10507 Description  R/W
10508 Description  R/W
10509 Description  R/W
10510 Description  R/W
10511 Description  R/W
10512 Description  R/W
10513 Description  R/W
10514 Description  R/W
10515 Description  R/W
10516 Description  R/W
10517 Description  R/W
10518 Description  R/W
10519 Description  R/W
10520 Description  R/W
10521 Description  R/W
10522 Description  R/W
10523 Description  R/W
10524 Description  R/W
10525 Description  R/W
10526 Description  R/W
10527 Description  R/W
10528 Description  R/W
10529 Description  R/W
10530 Description  R/W

9.1.3.2 Scale Low (DWord Type)

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4001 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI1  R/W
4002 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI1  R/W

Page 462 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4003 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI2  R/W
4004 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI2  R/W
4005 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI3  R/W
4006 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI3  R/W
4007 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI4  R/W
4008 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI4  R/W
4009 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI5  R/W
4010 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI5  R/W
4011 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI6  R/W
4012 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI6  R/W
4013 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI7  R/W
4014 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI7  R/W
4015 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI8  R/W
4016 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI8  R/W
4017 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI9  R/W
4018 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI9  R/W
4019 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI10  R/W
4020 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI10  R/W
4021 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI11  R/W
4022 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI11  R/W
4023 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI12  R/W
4024 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI12  R/W
4025 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI13  R/W
4026 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI13  R/W
4027 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI14  R/W
4028 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI14  R/W
4029 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI15  R/W
4030 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI15  R/W
4031 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI16  R/W
4032 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI16  R/W
4033 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI17  R/W
4034 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI17  R/W
4035 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI18  R/W
4036 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI18  R/W
4037 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI19  R/W
4038 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI19  R/W
4039 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI20  R/W
4040 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI20  R/W
4041 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI21  R/W
4042 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI21  R/W
4043 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI22  R/W
4044 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI22  R/W
4045 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI23  R/W
4046 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI23  R/W
4047 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI24  R/W
4048 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI24  R/W
4049 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI25  R/W
4050 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI25  R/W
4051 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI26  R/W
4052 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI26  R/W
4053 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI27  R/W
4054 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI27  R/W
4055 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI28  R/W

Page 463 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4056 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI28  R/W
4057 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI29  R/W
4058 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI29  R/W
4059 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI30  R/W
4060 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI30  R/W
4061 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI31  R/W
4062 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI31  R/W
4063 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI32  R/W
4064 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI32  R/W
4065 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI33  R/W
4066 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI33  R/W
4067 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI34  R/W
4068 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI34  R/W
4069 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI35  R/W
4070 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI35  R/W
4071 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI36  R/W
4072 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI36  R/W
4073 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI37  R/W
4074 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI37  R/W
4075 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI38  R/W
4076 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI38  R/W
4077 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI39  R/W
4078 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI39  R/W
4079 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI40  R/W
4080 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI40  R/W
4081 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI41  R/W
4082 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI41  R/W
4083 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI42  R/W
4084 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI42  R/W
4085 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI43  R/W
4086 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI43  R/W
4087 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI44  R/W
4088 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI44  R/W
4089 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI45  R/W
4090 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI45  R/W
4091 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI46  R/W
4492 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI46  R/W
4093 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI47  R/W
4094 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI47  R/W
4095 The low word of Scale Low data is on AI48  R/W
4096 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI48  R/W
4097 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI1 R
4098 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI1 R
4099 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI2 R
4100 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI2 R
4101 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI3 R
4102 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI3 R
4103 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI4 R
4104 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI4 R
4105 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI5 R
4106 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI5 R
4107 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI6 R
4108 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI6 R

Page 464 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4109 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI7 R
4110 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI7 R
4111 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI8 R
4112 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI8 R
4113 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI9 R
4114 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI9 R
4115 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI10 R
4116 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI10 R
4117 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI11 R
4118 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI11 R
4119 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI12 R
4120 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI12 R
4121 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI13 R
4122 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI13 R
4123 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI14 R
4124 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI14 R
4125 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI15 R
4126 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI15 R
4127 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI16 R
4128 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI16 R
4129 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI17 R
4130 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI17 R
4131 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI18 R
4132 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI18 R
4133 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI19 R
4134 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI19 R
4135 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI20 R
4136 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI20 R
4137 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI21 R
4138 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI21 R
4139 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI22 R
4140 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI22 R
4141 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI23 R
4142 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI23 R
4143 The low word of Scale Low data is on DI24 R
4144 The high word of Scale Low data is on DI24 R
4145 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO1 R
4146 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO1 R
4147 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO2 R
4148 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO2 R
4149 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO3 R
4150 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO3 R
4151 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO4 R
4152 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO4 R
4153 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO5 R
4154 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO5 R
4155 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO6 R
4156 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO6 R
4157 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO7 R
4158 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO7 R
4159 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO8 R
4160 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO8 R
4161 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO9 R

Page 465 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4162 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO9 R
4163 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO10 R
4164 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO10 R
4165 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO11 R
4166 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO11 R
4167 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO12 R
4168 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO12 R
4169 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO13 R
4170 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO13 R
4171 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO14 R
4172 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO14 R
4173 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO15 R
4174 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO15 R
4175 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO16 R
4176 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO16 R
4177 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO17 R
4178 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO17 R
4179 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO18 R
4180 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO18 R
4181 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO19 R
4182 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO19 R
4183 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO20 R
4184 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO20 R
4185 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO21 R
4186 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO21 R
4187 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO22 R
4188 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO22 R
4189 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO23 R
4190 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO23 R
4191 The low word of Scale Low data is on DO24 R
4192 The high word of Scale Low data is on DO24 R
4193 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO1 R
4194 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO1 R
4195 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO2 R
4196 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO2 R
4197 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO3 R
4198 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO3 R
4199 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO4 R
4200 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO4 R
4201 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO5 R
4202 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO5 R
4203 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO6 R
4204 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO6 R
4205 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO7 R
4206 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO7 R
4207 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO8 R
4208 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO8 R
4209 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO9 R
4210 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO9 R
4211 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO10 R
4212 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO10 R
4213 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO11 R
4214 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO11 R

Page 466 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4215 The low word of Scale Low data is on AO12 R
4216 The high word of Scale Low data is on AO12 R
4217 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math1 R
4218 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math1 R
4219 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math2 R
4220 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math2 R
4221 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math3 R
4222 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math3 R
4223 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math4 R
4224 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math4 R
4225 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math5 R
4226 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math5 R
4227 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math6 R
4228 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math6 R
4229 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math7 R
4230 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math7 R
4231 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math8 R
4232 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math8 R
4233 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math9 R
4234 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math9 R
4235 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math10 R
4236 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math10 R
4237 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math11 R
4238 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math11 R
4239 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math12 R
4240 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math12 R
4241 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math13 R
4242 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math13 R
4243 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math14 R
4244 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math14 R
4245 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math15 R
4246 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math15 R
4247 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math16 R
4248 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math16 R
4249 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math17 R
4250 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math17 R
4251 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math18 R
4252 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math18 R
4253 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math19 R
4254 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math19 R
4255 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math20 R
4256 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math20 R
4257 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math21 R
4258 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math21 R
4259 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math22 R
4260 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math22 R
4261 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math23 R
4262 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math23 R
4263 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math24 R
4264 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math24 R
4265 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math25 Maximum: 5 R
4266 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math25 R
4267 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math26 R

Page 467 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4268 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math26 R
4269 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math27 R
4270 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math27 R
4271 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math28 R
4272 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math28 R
4273 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math29 R
4274 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math29 R
4275 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math30 R
4276 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math30 R
4277 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math31 R
4278 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math31 R
4279 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math32 R
4280 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math32 R
4281 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math33 R
4282 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math33 R
4283 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math34 R
4284 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math34 R
4285 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math35 R
4286 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math35 R
4287 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math36 R
4288 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math36 R
4289 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math37 R
4290 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math37 R
4291 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math38 R
4292 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math38 R
4293 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math39 R
4294 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math39 R
4295 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math40 R
4296 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math40 R
4297 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math41 R
4298 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math41 R
4299 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math42 R
4300 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math42 R
4301 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math43 R
4302 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math43 R
4303 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math44 R
4304 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math44 R
4305 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math45 R
4306 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math45 R
4307 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math46 R
4308 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math46 R
4309 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math47 R
4310 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math47 R
4311 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math48 R
4312 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math48 R
4313 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math49 R
4314 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math49 R
4315 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math50 R
4316 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math50 R
4317 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math51 R
4318 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math51 R
4319 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math52 R
4320 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math52 R

Page 468 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4321 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math53 R
4322 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math53 R
4323 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math54 R
4324 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math54 R
4325 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math55 R
4326 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math55 R
4327 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math56 R
4328 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math56 R
4329 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math57 R
4330 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math57 R
4331 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math58 R
4332 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math58 R
4333 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math59 R
4334 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math59 R
4335 The low word of Scale Low data is on Math60 R
4336 The high word of Scale Low data is on Math60 R
4337 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext1 R
4338 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext1 R
4339 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext2 R
4340 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext2 R
4341 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext3 R
4342 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext3 R
4343 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext4 R
4344 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext4 R
4345 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext5 R
4346 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext5 R
4347 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext6 R
4348 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext6 R
4349 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext7 R
4350 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext7 R
4351 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext8 R
4352 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext8 R
4353 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext9 R
4354 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext9 R
4355 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext10 R
4356 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext10 R
4357 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext11 R
4358 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext11 R
4359 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext12 R
4360 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext12 R
4361 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext13 R
4362 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext13 R
4363 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext14 R
4364 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext14 R
4365 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext15 R
4366 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext15 R
4367 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext16 R
4368 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext16 R
4369 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext17 R
4370 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext17 R
4371 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext18 R
4372 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext18 R
4373 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext19 R

Page 469 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4374 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext19 R
4375 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext20 R
4376 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext20 R
4377 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext21 R
4378 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext21 R
4379 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext22 R
4380 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext22 R
4381 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext23 R
4382 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext23 R
4383 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext24 R
4384 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext24 R
4385 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext25 R
4386 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext25 R
4387 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext26 R
4388 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext26 R
4389 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext27 R
4390 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext27 R
4391 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext28 R
4392 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext28 R
4393 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext29 R
4394 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext29 R
4395 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext30 R
4396 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext30 R
4397 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext31 R
4398 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext31 R
4399 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext32 R
4400 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext32 R
4401 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext33 R
4402 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext33 R
4403 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext34 R
4404 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext34 R
4405 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext35 R
4406 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext35 R
4407 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext36 R
4408 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext36 R
4409 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext37 R
4410 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext37 R
4411 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext38 R
4412 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext38 R
4413 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext39 R
4414 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext39 R
4415 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext40 R
4416 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext40 R
4417 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext41 R
4418 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext41 R
4419 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext42 R
4420 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext42 R
4421 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext43 R
4422 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext43 R
4423 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext44 R
4424 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext44 R
4425 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext45 R
4426 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext45 R

Page 470 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4427 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext46 R
4428 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext46 R
4429 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext47 R
4430 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext47 R
4431 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext48 R
4432 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext48 R
4433 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext49 R
4434 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext49 R
4435 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext50 R
4436 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext50 R
4437 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext51 R
4438 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext51 R
4439 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext52 R
4440 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext52 R
4441 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext53 R
4442 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext53 R
4443 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext54 R
4444 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext54 R
4445 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext55 R
4446 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext55 R
4447 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext56 R
4448 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext56 R
4449 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext57 R
4450 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext57 R
4451 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext58 R
4452 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext58 R
4453 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext59 R
4454 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext59 R
4455 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext60 R
4456 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext60 R
4457 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext61 R
4458 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext61 R
4459 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext62 R
4460 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext62 R
4461 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext63 R
4462 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext63 R
4463 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext64 R
4464 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext64 R
4465 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext65 R
4466 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext65 R
4467 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext66 R
4468 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext66 R
4469 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext67 R
4470 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext67 R
4471 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext68 R
4472 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext68 R
4473 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext69 R
4474 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext69 R
4475 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext70 R
4476 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext70 R
4477 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext71 R
4478 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext71 R
4479 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext72 R

Page 471 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
4480 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext72 R
4481 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext73 R
4482 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext73 R
4483 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext74 R
4484 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext74 R
4485 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext75 R
4486 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext75 R
4487 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext76 R
4488 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext76 R
4489 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext77 R
4490 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext77 R
4491 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext78 R
4492 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext78 R
4493 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext79 R
4494 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext79 R
4495 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext80 R
4496 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext80 R
4497 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext81 R
4498 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext81 R
4499 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext82 R
4500 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext82 R
4501 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext83 R
4502 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext83 R
4503 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext84 R
4504 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext84 R
4505 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext85 R
4506 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext85 R
4507 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext86 R
4508 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext86 R
4509 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext87 R
4510 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext87 R
4511 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext88 R
4512 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext88 R
4513 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext89 R
4514 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext89 R
4515 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext90 R
4516 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext90 R
4517 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext91 R
4518 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext91 R
4519 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext92 R
4520 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext92 R
4521 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext93 R
4522 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext93 R
4523 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext94 R
4524 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext94 R
4525 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext95 R
4526 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext95 R
4527 The low word of Scale Low data is on Ext96 R
4528 The high word of Scale Low data is on Ext96 R

Page 472 of 499

9.1.3.3 Scale High (DWord Type)
Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6001 The low word of Scale High data is on AI1  R/W
6002 The high word of Scale High data is on AI1  R/W
6003 The low word of Scale High data is on AI2  R/W
6004 The high word of Scale High data is on AI2  R/W
6005 The low word of Scale High data is on AI3  R/W
6006 The high word of Scale High data is on AI3  R/W
6007 The low word of Scale High data is on AI4  R/W
6008 The high word of Scale High data is on AI4  R/W
6009 The low word of Scale High data is on AI5  R/W
6010 The high word of Scale High data is on AI5  R/W
6011 The low word of Scale High data is on AI6  R/W
6012 The high word of Scale High data is on AI6  R/W
6013 The low word of Scale High data is on AI7  R/W
6014 The high word of Scale High data is on AI7  R/W
6015 The low word of Scale High data is on AI8  R/W
6016 The high word of Scale High data is on AI8  R/W
6017 The low word of Scale High data is on AI9  R/W
6018 The high word of Scale High data is on AI9  R/W
6019 The low word of Scale High data is on AI10  R/W
6020 The high word of Scale High data is on AI10  R/W
6021 The low word of Scale High data is on AI11  R/W
6022 The high word of Scale High data is on AI11  R/W
6023 The low word of Scale High data is on AI12  R/W
6024 The high word of Scale High data is on AI12  R/W
6025 The low word of Scale High data is on AI13  R/W
6026 The high word of Scale Low data is on AI13  R/W
6027 The low word of Scale High data is on AI14  R/W
6028 The high word of Scale High data is on AI14  R/W
6029 The low word of Scale High data is on AI15  R/W
6030 The high word of Scale High data is on AI15  R/W
6031 The low word of Scale High data is on AI16  R/W
6032 The high word of Scale High data is on AI16  R/W
6033 The low word of Scale High data is on AI17  R/W
6034 The high word of Scale High data is on AI17  R/W
6035 The low word of Scale High data is on AI18  R/W
6036 The high word of Scale High data is on AI18  R/W
6037 The low word of Scale High data is on AI19  R/W
6038 The high word of Scale High data is on AI19  R/W
6039 The low word of Scale High data is on AI20  R/W
6040 The high word of Scale High data is on AI20  R/W
6041 The low word of Scale High data is on AI21  R/W
6042 The high word of Scale High data is on AI21  R/W
6043 The low word of Scale High data is on AI22  R/W
6044 The high word of Scale High data is on AI22  R/W
6045 The low word of Scale High data is on AI23  R/W
6046 The high word of Scale High data is on AI23  R/W
6047 The low word of Scale High data is on AI24  R/W
6048 The high word of Scale High data is on AI24  R/W
6049 The low word of Scale High data is on AI25  R/W
6050 The high word of Scale High data is on AI25  R/W
6051 The low word of Scale High data is on AI26  R/W
6052 The high word of Scale High data is on AI26  R/W

Page 473 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6053 The low word of Scale High data is on AI27  R/W
6054 The high word of Scale High data is on AI27  R/W
6055 The low word of Scale High data is on AI28  R/W
6056 The high word of Scale High data is on AI28  R/W
6057 The low word of Scale High data is on AI29  R/W
6058 The high word of Scale High data is on AI29  R/W
6059 The low word of Scale High data is on AI30  R/W
6060 The high word of Scale High data is on AI30  R/W
6061 The low word of Scale High data is on AI31  R/W
6062 The high word of Scale High data is on AI31  R/W
6063 The low word of Scale High data is on AI32  R/W
6064 The high word of Scale High data is on AI32  R/W
6065 The low word of Scale High data is on AI33  R/W
6066 The high word of Scale High data is on AI33  R/W
6067 The low word of Scale High data is on AI34  R/W
6068 The high word of Scale High data is on AI34  R/W
6069 The low word of Scale High data is on AI35  R/W
6070 The high word of Scale High data is on AI35  R/W
6071 The low word of Scale High data is on AI36  R/W
6072 The high word of Scale High data is on AI36  R/W
6073 The low word of Scale High data is on AI37  R/W
6074 The high word of Scale High data is on AI37  R/W
6075 The low word of Scale High data is on AI38  R/W
6076 The high word of Scale High data is on AI38  R/W
6077 The low word of Scale High data is on AI39  R/W
6078 The high word of Scale High data is on AI39  R/W
6079 The low word of Scale High data is on AI40  R/W
6080 The high word of Scale High data is on AI40  R/W
6081 The low word of Scale High data is on AI41  R/W
6082 The high word of Scale High data is on AI41  R/W
6083 The low word of Scale High data is on AI42  R/W
6084 The high word of Scale High data is on AI42  R/W
6085 The low word of Scale High data is on AI43  R/W
6086 The high word of Scale High data is on AI43  R/W
6087 The low word of Scale High data is on AI44  R/W
6088 The high word of Scale High data is on AI44  R/W
6089 The low word of Scale High data is on AI45  R/W
6090 The high word of Scale High data is on AI45  R/W
6091 The low word of Scale High data is on AI46  R/W
6492 The high word of Scale High data is on AI46  R/W
6093 The low word of Scale High data is on AI47  R/W
6094 The high word of Scale High data is on AI47  R/W
6095 The low word of Scale High data is on AI48  R/W
6096 The high word of Scale High data is on AI48  R/W
6097 The low word of Scale High data is on DI1 R
6098 The high word of Scale High data is on DI1 R
6099 The low word of Scale High data is on DI2 R
6100 The high word of Scale High data is on DI2 R
6101 The low word of Scale High data is on DI3 R
6102 The high word of Scale High data is on DI3 R
6103 The low word of Scale High data is on DI4 R
6104 The high word of Scale High data is on DI4 R
6105 The low word of Scale High data is on DI5 R

Page 474 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6106 The high word of Scale High data is on DI5 R
6107 The low word of Scale High data is on DI6 R
6108 The high word of Scale High data is on DI6 R
6109 The low word of Scale High data is on DI7 R
6110 The high word of Scale High data is on DI7 R
6111 The low word of Scale High data is on DI8 R
6112 The high word of Scale High data is on DI8 R
6113 The low word of Scale High data is on DI9 R
6114 The high word of Scale High data is on DI9 R
6115 The low word of Scale High data is on DI10 R
6116 The high word of Scale High data is on DI10 R
6117 The low word of Scale High data is on DI11 R
6118 The high word of Scale High data is on DI11 R
6119 The low word of Scale High data is on DI12 R
6120 The high word of Scale High data is on DI12 R
6121 The low word of Scale High data is on DI13 R
6122 The high word of Scale High data is on DI13 R
6123 The low word of Scale High data is on DI14 R
6124 The high word of Scale High data is on DI14 R
6125 The low word of Scale High data is on DI15 R
6126 The high word of Scale High data is on DI15 R
6127 The low word of Scale High data is on DI16 R
6128 The high word of Scale High data is on DI16 R
6129 The low word of Scale High data is on DI17 R
6130 The high word of Scale High data is on DI17 R
6131 The low word of Scale High data is on DI18 R
6132 The high word of Scale High data is on DI18 R
6133 The low word of Scale High data is on DI19 R
6134 The high word of Scale High data is on DI19 R
6135 The low word of Scale High data is on DI20 R
6136 The high word of Scale High data is on DI20 R
6137 The low word of Scale High data is on DI21 R
6138 The high word of Scale High data is on DI21 R
6139 The low word of Scale High data is on DI22 R
6140 The high word of Scale High data is on DI22 R
6141 The low word of Scale High data is on DI23 R
6142 The high word of Scale High data is on DI23 R
6143 The low word of Scale High data is on DI24 R
6144 The high word of Scale High data is on DI24 R
6145 The low word of Scale High data is on DO1 R
6146 The high word of Scale High data is on DO1 R
6147 The low word of Scale High data is on DO2 R
6148 The high word of Scale High data is on DO2 R
6149 The low word of Scale High data is on DO3 R
6150 The high word of Scale High data is on DO3 R
6151 The low word of Scale High data is on DO4 R
6152 The high word of Scale High data is on DO4 R
6153 The low word of Scale High data is on DO5 R
6154 The high word of Scale High data is on DO5 R
6155 The low word of Scale High data is on DO6 R
6156 The high word of Scale High data is on DO6 R
6157 The low word of Scale High data is on DO7 R
6158 The high word of Scale High data is on DO7 R

Page 475 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6159 The low word of Scale High data is on DO8 R
6160 The high word of Scale High data is on DO8 R
6161 The low word of Scale High data is on DO9 R
6162 The high word of Scale High data is on DO9 R
6163 The low word of Scale High data is on DO10 R
6164 The high word of Scale High data is on DO10 R
6165 The low word of Scale High data is on DO11 R
6166 The high word of Scale High data is on DO11 R
6167 The low word of Scale High data is on DO12 R
6168 The high word of Scale High data is on DO12 R
6169 The low word of Scale High data is on DO13 R
6170 The high word of Scale High data is on DO13 R
6171 The low word of Scale High data is on DO14 R
6172 The high word of Scale High data is on DO14 R
6173 The low word of Scale High data is on DO15 R
6174 The high word of Scale High data is on DO15 R
6175 The low word of Scale High data is on DO16 R
6176 The high word of Scale High data is on DO16 R
6177 The low word of Scale High data is on DO17 R
6178 The high word of Scale High data is on DO17 R
6179 The low word of Scale High data is on DO18 R
6180 The high word of Scale High data is on DO18 R
6181 The low word of Scale High data is on DO19 R
6182 The high word of Scale High data is on DO19 R
6183 The low word of Scale High data is on DO20 R
6184 The high word of Scale High data is on DO20 R
6185 The low word of Scale High data is on DO21 R
6186 The high word of Scale High data is on DO21 R
6187 The low word of Scale High data is on DO22 R
6188 The high word of Scale High data is on DO22 R
6189 The low word of Scale High data is on DO23 R
6190 The high word of Scale High data is on DO23 R
6191 The low word of Scale High data is on DO24 R
6192 The high word of Scale High data is on DO24 R
6193 The low word of Scale High data is on AO1 R
6194 The high word of Scale High data is on AO1 R
6195 The low word of Scale High data is on AO2 R
6196 The high word of Scale High data is on AO2 R
6197 The low word of Scale High data is on AO3 R
6198 The high word of Scale High data is on AO3 R
6199 The low word of Scale High data is on AO4 R
6200 The high word of Scale High data is on AO4 R
6201 The low word of Scale High data is on AO5 R
6202 The high word of Scale High data is on AO5 R
6203 The low word of Scale High data is on AO6 R
6204 The high word of Scale High data is on AO6 R
6205 The low word of Scale High data is on AO7 R
6206 The high word of Scale High data is on AO7 R
6207 The low word of Scale High data is on AO8 R
6208 The high word of Scale High data is on AO8 R
6209 The low word of Scale High data is on AO9 R
6210 The high word of Scale High data is on AO9 R
6211 The low word of Scale High data is on AO10 R

Page 476 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6212 The high word of Scale High data is on AO10 R
6213 The low word of Scale High data is on AO11 R
6214 The high word of Scale High data is on AO11 R
6215 The low word of Scale High data is on AO12 R
6216 The high word of Scale High data is on AO12 R
6217 The low word of Scale High data is on Math1 R
6218 The high word of Scale High data is on Math1 R
6219 The low word of Scale High data is on Math2 R
6220 The high word of Scale High data is on Math2 R
6221 The low word of Scale High data is on Math3 R
6222 The high word of Scale High data is on Math3 R
6223 The low word of Scale High data is on Math4 R
6224 The high word of Scale High data is on Math4 R
6225 The low word of Scale High data is on Math5 R
6226 The high word of Scale High data is on Math5 R
6227 The low word of Scale High data is on Math6 R
6228 The high word of Scale High data is on Math6 R
6229 The low word of Scale High data is on Math7 R
6230 The high word of Scale High data is on Math7 R
6231 The low word of Scale High data is on Math8 R
6232 The high word of Scale High data is on Math8 R
6233 The low word of Scale High data is on Math9 R
6234 The high word of Scale High data is on Math9 R
6235 The low word of Scale High data is on Math10 R
6236 The high word of Scale High data is on Math10 R
6237 The low word of Scale High data is on Math11 R
6238 The high word of Scale High data is on Math11 R
6239 The low word of Scale High data is on Math12 R
6240 The high word of Scale High data is on Math12 R
6241 The low word of Scale High data is on Math13 R
6242 The high word of Scale High data is on Math13 R
6243 The low word of Scale High data is on Math14 R
6244 The high word of Scale High data is on Math14 R
6245 The low word of Scale High data is on Math15 R
6246 The high word of Scale High data is on Math15 R
6247 The low word of Scale High data is on Math16 R
6248 The high word of Scale High data is on Math16 R
6249 The low word of Scale High data is on Math17 R
6250 The high word of Scale High data is on Math17 R
6251 The low word of Scale High data is on Math18 R
6252 The high word of Scale High data is on Math18 R
6253 The low word of Scale High data is on Math19 R
6254 The high word of Scale High data is on Math19 R
6255 The low word of Scale High data is on Math20 R
6256 The high word of Scale High data is on Math20 R
6257 The low word of Scale High data is on Math21 R
6258 The high word of Scale High data is on Math21 R
6259 The low word of Scale High data is on Math22 R
6260 The high word of Scale High data is on Math22 R
6261 The low word of Scale High data is on Math23 R
6262 The high word of Scale High data is on Math23 R
6263 The low word of Scale High data is on Math24 R
6264 The high word of Scale High data is on Math24 R

Page 477 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6265 The low word of Scale High data is on Math25 Maximum: 5 R
6266 The high word of Scale High data is on Math25 R
6267 The low word of Scale High data is on Math26 R
6268 The high word of Scale High data is on Math26 R
6269 The low word of Scale High data is on Math27 R
6270 The high word of Scale High data is on Math27 R
6271 The low word of Scale High data is on Math28 R
6272 The high word of Scale High data is on Math28 R
6273 The low word of Scale High data is on Math29 R
6274 The high word of Scale High data is on Math29 R
6275 The low word of Scale High data is on Math30 R
6276 The high word of Scale High data is on Math30 R
6277 The low word of Scale High data is on Math31 R
6278 The high word of Scale High data is on Math31 R
6279 The low word of Scale High data is on Math32 R
6280 The high word of Scale High data is on Math32 R
6281 The low word of Scale High data is on Math33 R
6282 The high word of Scale High data is on Math33 R
6283 The low word of Scale High data is on Math34 R
6284 The high word of Scale High data is on Math34 R
6285 The low word of Scale High data is on Math35 R
6286 The high word of Scale High data is on Math35 R
6287 The low word of Scale High data is on Math36 R
6288 The high word of Scale High data is on Math36 R
6289 The low word of Scale High data is on Math37 R
6290 The high word of Scale High data is on Math37 R
6291 The low word of Scale High data is on Math38 R
6292 The high word of Scale High data is on Math38 R
6293 The low word of Scale High data is on Math39 R
6294 The high word of Scale High data is on Math39 R
6295 The low word of Scale High data is on Math40 R
6296 The high word of Scale High data is on Math40 R
6297 The low word of Scale High data is on Math41 R
6298 The high word of Scale High data is on Math41 R
6299 The low word of Scale High data is on Math42 R
6300 The high word of Scale High data is on Math42 R
6301 The low word of Scale High data is on Math43 R
6302 The high word of Scale High data is on Math43 R
6303 The low word of Scale High data is on Math44 R
6304 The high word of Scale High data is on Math44 R
6305 The low word of Scale High data is on Math45 R
6306 The high word of Scale High data is on Math45 R
6307 The low word of Scale High data is on Math46 R
6308 The high word of Scale High data is on Math46 R
6309 The low word of Scale High data is on Math47 R
6310 The high word of Scale High data is on Math47 R
6311 The low word of Scale High data is on Math48 R
6312 The high word of Scale High data is on Math48 R
6313 The low word of Scale High data is on Math49 R
6314 The high word of Scale High data is on Math49 R
6315 The low word of Scale High data is on Math50 R
6316 The high word of Scale High data is on Math50 R
6317 The low word of Scale High data is on Math51 R

Page 478 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6318 The high word of Scale High data is on Math51 R
6319 The low word of Scale High data is on Math52 R
6320 The high word of Scale High data is on Math52 R
6321 The low word of Scale High data is on Math53 R
6322 The high word of Scale High data is on Math53 R
6323 The low word of Scale High data is on Math54 R
6324 The high word of Scale High data is on Math54 R
6325 The low word of Scale High data is on Math55 R
6326 The high word of Scale High data is on Math55 R
6327 The low word of Scale High data is on Math56 R
6328 The high word of Scale High data is on Math56 R
6329 The low word of Scale High data is on Math57 R
6330 The high word of Scale High data is on Math57 R
6331 The low word of Scale High data is on Math58 R
6332 The high word of Scale High data is on Math58 R
6333 The low word of Scale High data is on Math59 R
6334 The high word of Scale High data is on Math59 R
6335 The low word of Scale High data is on Math60 R
6336 The high word of Scale High data is on Math60 R
6337 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext1 R
6338 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext1 R
6339 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext2 R
6340 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext2 R
6341 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext3 R
6342 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext3 R
6343 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext4 R
6344 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext4 R
6345 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext5 R
6346 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext5 R
6347 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext6 R
6348 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext6 R
6349 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext7 R
6350 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext7 R
6351 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext8 R
6352 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext8 R
6353 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext9 R
6354 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext9 R
6355 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext10 R
6356 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext10 R
6357 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext11 R
6358 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext11 R
6359 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext12 R
6360 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext12 R
6361 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext13 R
6362 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext13 R
6363 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext14 R
6364 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext14 R
6365 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext15 R
6366 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext15 R
6367 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext16 R
6368 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext16 R
6369 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext17 R
6370 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext17 R

Page 479 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6371 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext18 R
6372 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext18 R
6373 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext19 R
6374 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext19 R
6375 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext20 R
6376 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext20 R
6377 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext21 R
6378 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext21 R
6379 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext22 R
6380 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext22 R
6381 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext23 R
6382 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext23 R
6383 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext24 R
6384 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext24 R
6385 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext25 R
6386 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext25 R
6387 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext26 R
6388 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext26 R
6389 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext27 R
6390 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext27 R
6391 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext28 R
6392 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext28 R
6393 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext29 R
6394 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext29 R
6395 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext30 R
6396 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext30 R
6397 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext31 R
6398 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext31 R
6399 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext32 R
6400 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext32 R
6401 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext33 R
6402 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext33 R
6403 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext34 R
6404 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext34 R
6405 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext35 R
6406 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext35 R
6407 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext36 R
6408 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext36 R
6409 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext37 R
6410 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext37 R
6411 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext38 R
6412 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext38 R
6413 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext39 R
6414 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext39 R
6415 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext40 R
6416 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext40 R
6417 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext41 R
6418 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext41 R
6419 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext42 R
6420 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext42 R
6421 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext43 R
6422 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext43 R
6423 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext44 R

Page 480 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6424 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext44 R
6425 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext45 R
6426 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext45 R
6427 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext46 R
6428 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext46 R
6429 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext47 R
6430 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext47 R
6431 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext48 R
6432 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext48 R
6433 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext49 R
6434 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext49 R
6435 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext50 R
6436 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext50 R
6437 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext51 R
6438 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext51 R
6439 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext52 R
6440 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext52 R
6441 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext53 R
6442 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext53 R
6443 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext54 R
6444 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext54 R
6445 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext55 R
6446 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext55 R
6447 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext56 R
6448 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext56 R
6449 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext57 R
6450 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext57 R
6451 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext58 R
6452 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext58 R
6453 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext59 R
6454 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext59 R
6455 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext60 R
6456 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext60 R
6457 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext61 R
6458 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext61 R
6459 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext62 R
6460 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext62 R
6461 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext63 R
6462 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext63 R
6463 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext64 R
6464 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext64 R
6465 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext65 R
6466 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext65 R
6467 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext66 R
6468 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext66 R
6469 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext67 R
6470 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext67 R
6471 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext68 R
6472 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext68 R
6473 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext69 R
6474 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext69 R
6475 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext70 R
6476 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext70 R

Page 481 of 499

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
6477 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext71 R
6478 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext71 R
6479 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext72 R
6480 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext72 R
6481 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext73 R
6482 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext73 R
6483 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext74 R
6484 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext74 R
6485 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext75 R
6486 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext75 R
6487 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext76 R
6488 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext76 R
6489 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext77 R
6490 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext77 R
6491 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext78 R
6492 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext78 R
6493 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext79 R
6494 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext79 R
6495 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext80 R
6496 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext80 R
6497 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext81 R
6498 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext81 R
6499 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext82 R
6500 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext82 R
6501 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext83 R
6502 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext83 R
6503 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext84 R
6504 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext84 R
6505 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext85 R
6506 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext85 R
6507 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext86 R
6508 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext86 R
6509 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext87 R
6510 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext87 R
6511 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext88 R
6512 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext88 R
6513 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext89 R
6514 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext89 R
6515 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext90 R
6516 The high word of Scale High data is onExt90 R
6517 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext91 R
6518 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext91 R
6519 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext92 R
6520 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext92 R
6521 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext93 R
6522 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext93 R
6523 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext94 R
6524 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext94 R
6525 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext95 R
6526 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext95 R
6527 The low word of Scale High data is on Ext96 R
6528 The high word of Scale High data is on Ext96 R

Page 482 of 499

Note:
The Scale Low / High can be modified only when the input type is Linear.

9.1.3.3.1 How to calculate Modbus Scale Low / High

❖ Get Scale low and Scale High from Recorder AI Configuration
❖ Calculate ΔScale Range,
ΔScale Range = Scale High - Scale Low
❖ Calculate Modbus Range
Modbus ΔScale Range = ΔScale Range * 1.2
❖ Calculate Modbus Scale Low = Scale Low - (Modbus ΔScale Range - ΔScale Range)
❖ Calculate Modbus Scale High = Scale High + (Modbus ΔScale Range - ΔScale Range)
❖ Convert the Modbus Scale Low / High value to DWord value using the below formulae.
(𝐌𝐨𝐝𝐛𝐮𝐬 𝐒𝐜𝐚𝐥𝐞 𝐋𝐨𝐰 ∗ 𝐃𝐏 𝐕𝐚𝐥𝐮𝐞) − (−𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟕𝟒𝟖𝟑𝟔𝟒𝟖)
𝐷𝑊𝑜𝑟𝑑 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 = ( ) ∗ 𝟒𝟐𝟗𝟒𝟗𝟔𝟕𝟐𝟗𝟓
𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟕𝟒𝟖𝟑𝟔𝟒𝟕 − (−𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟕𝟒𝟖𝟑𝟔𝟒𝟖)

DP DP Value
0 1
1 10
2 100
3 1000
4 10000
5 100000

For example:
Scale Low is 500, Scale High is 1000
ΔScale Range = Scale High - Scale Low = 1000 -500 = 500
Modbus ΔScale Range = ΔScale Range * 1.2 = 500*1.2= 600
Modbus Scale Low = Scale Low - (Modbus ΔScale Range - ΔScale Range)
= 500 - (600 -500) = 500 -100 = 400
Modbus Scale High = Scale High + (Modbus ΔScale Range -ΔScale Range)
= 1000 + (600 - 500) = 1000 + 100 = 1100
Convert the Modbus Scale Low value to DWord value:
(((400 * DP Value) - (-2147483648)) / (2147483647-(-2147483648))) * 4294967295
The DP value is 1 when the DP is 0 =>
((400 - (-2147483648)) / 4294967295) *4294967295
= (2147484048/4294967295)* 4294967295
= 2147484048
Convert the Modbus Scale High value to DWord value:
(((1100 * DP Value) - (-2147483648)) / (2147483647- (-2147483648))) * 294967295
The DP value is 1 when the DP is 0 =>
(1100 - (-2147483648)) / (2147483647 - (-2147483648)) *4294967295
= (2147484748/4294967295)* 4294967295
=2147484748
Convert DWord value to Real Scale Value:
Modbus Scale High = ((((DWord Value - 0) * 4294967295) / 4294967295) + (-2147483648)) / DP Value
=((((2147484748-0)* 4294967295) / 4294967295) + (-2147483648))/1
=(((2147484748*4294967295)/ 4294967295)- 2147483648)/1
=2147484748-2147483648
=1100

Page 483 of 499

Modbus Scale Low = ((((DWord Value - 0) * 4294967295) / 4294967295) + (-2147483648)) / DP Value
= ((((2147484048-0) * 4294967295) / 4294967295) + (-2147483648))/1
= (((2147484048* 4294967295) / 4294967295) -2147483648)/1
=2147484048-2147483648
=400

9.1.3.3.2 How to calculate Scale Low / High

Let’s say Scale Low is ‘A’ and Scale High is ‘B’.
Modbus Scale Low = Scale Low - (Modbus ΔScale Range - ΔScale Range)
= Scale Low-(Scale High-Scale Low) *1.2- (Scale High-Scale Low)
=A-(B-A) *1.2-(B-A)
=A-(1.2B-1.2A-B+A)
=A-(0.2B-0.2A)
Modbus Scale Low =1.2A-0.2B-----------------------------------Equation 1

Modbus Scale High = Scale High + (Modbus ΔScale Range -ΔScale Range)
= Scale High + ((Scale High-Scale Low) *1.2 – (Scale High- Scale Low))
=B+((B-A) *1.2-(B-A))
=B+(1.2B-1.2A-B+A)
=B+(0.2B-0.2A)
Modbus Scale High =1.2B-0.2A--------------------------------- Equation 2
Multiply by 6
6*Modbus Scale High =7.2B-1.2A
1.2A=7.2B-(6*Modbus Scale High) ------------------------------Equation 3
Replace 1.2A in Equation 1 with the value in Equation 3
Modbus Scale Low =1.2A-0.2B
Modbus Scale Low=7.2B-(6*Modbus Scale High)-0.2B
Modbus Scale Low=7B-(6*Modbus Scale High)
Modbus Scale Low+(6*Modbus Scale High) =7B
(Modbus Scale Low+(6*Modbus Scale High))/7 =B--------------------------Equation 4
Replace B Value in Equation 2 to find A Value
Modbus Scale High =1.2B-0.2A
Modbus Scale High =1.2*((Modbus Scale Low+(6*Modbus Scale High))/7)-0.2A
0.2A=1.2*((Modbus Scale Low+(6*Modbus Scale High))/7)-Modbus Scale High
A=(1.2*((Modbus Scale Low+(6*Modbus Scale High))/7)-Modbus Scale High)/0.2--------------Equation 5

9.1.3.4 Others (Word Type)

Modbus Address Register Name Note Access
11001 PR Version R
11002 Plus NO. ○1 R
Note:
Value Description
0 Standard
1 Plus 1
2 Plus 2
3 Plus 3

Page 484 of 499

9.2 Modbus Communication

9.2.1 Read Input Registers (Function 0x04)

The function code is used to read from 1 to 120 contiguous input registers in the remote device.
Query
The query message specifies the starting register and quantity of registers to be read. Registers
are addressed starting at zero: register 1 – 16 are addressed as 0 – 15.
Here is an example of a request to read register 0 (register type is Input Register, the address is 1) from
slave device 1:
Field Name RTU example (Hex)
Slave Address 01
Function 04
Starting Address Hi 00
Starting Address Lo 00
Quantity of Registers Hi 00
Quantity of Registers Lo 01
Error Check Lo 31
Error Check Hi CA
Total Bytes 8

Response
The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per registers, with the binary
contents right justified within each byte. For each register, the first byte contains the high order bits and
the second contains the low order bits.
The response is return when the data is completely assembled. Here is an example of a response
to the query on the opposite page:
Field Name RTU example (Hex)
Slave Address 01
Function 04
Byte Count 02
Data Hi 00
Data Lo 0A
Error Check Lo 39
Error Check Hi 37
Total Bytes 7

9.2.2 Preset (Write) Multiple Registers (Function 0x10)

The function code is used to write a block of contiguous registers (1 to 120 registers) in a remote
device.
Query
The query message specified the register references to be preset. Registers are addressed starting at
zero: register 1 is addressed as 0. The requested preset values are specified in the query data field.
Data is packed as two bytes per register.
Here is an example of a request to preset two registers starting at 40001 to 00 0A and 01 02 hex in
slave device 1:

Page 485 of 499

 Field Name RTU example (Hex)
Slave Address 01
Function 10
Starting Address Hi 00
Starting Address Lo 00
Quantity of Registers Hi 00
Quantity of Registers Lo 02
Byte Count 04
Data Hi 00
Data Lo 0A
Data Hi 01
Data Lo 02
Error Check Lo 53
Error Check Hi FC
Total Bytes 13
Response
The normal response returns the slave address, function code, starting address and quantity of
registers preset. Here is an example of a response to the query shown above:

Field Name RTU example (Hex)

Slave Address 01
Function 10
Starting Address Hi 00
Starting Address Lo 00
Quantity of Registers Hi 00
Quantity of Registers Lo 02
Error Check Lo 41
Error Check Hi C8
Total Bytes 13

9.2.3 Placing the CRC into a message

When the 16 bit CRC (two 8 bit bytes) is transmitted in the message, the low order byte will be
transmitted first, followed by the high order byte.
For example, if the CRC value is 1241 hex:
Slave Address Function Data CRC Lo CRC Hi
-- -- -- 41 12

Note: Broadcast mode is not supported.

9.3 Sample Code

9.3.1 CRC Generation Function
An example of a C language function performing CRC generation is shown on the following pages.
All of the possible CRC values are preloaded into two arrays, which are simply indexed as the function
increments through the message buffer. One array contains all of the 256 possible CRC values for the
high byte of the 16 bit CRC field, and the other array contains all of the values for the low byte. Indexing
the CRC in this way provides faster execution than would be achieved by calculating a new CRC value
with each new character from the message buffer.

Page 486 of 499

/****************************************************************/
// Parameter:
// puchMsg -> unsigned char* puchMsg: message to calculate CRC upon
// usDataLne -> unsigned short usDataLen: quantity of bytes in message
/****************************************************************/
unsigned short CRC16(puchMsg, usDataLen)
{
unsigned char uchCRCHi=0xFF; /* high byte of CRC initialized */
unsigned char uchCRCLo=0xFF; /* low byte of CRC initialized */
unsigned uIndex; /* will index into CRC lookup table */
while (usDataLen––) /* pass through message buffer */
{
uIndex = uchCRCHi ^ *puchMsgg++; /* calculate the CRC */
uchCRCHi = uchCRCLo ^ auchCRCHi[uIndex];
uchCRCLo = auchCRCLo[uIndex];
}
return (uchCRCHi << 8 | uchCRCLo);
}
High-Order Byte Table
/* Table of CRC values for high–order byte */
static unsigned char auchCRCHi[] = {
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81,
0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0,
0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01,
0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81,
0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0,
0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01,
0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81,
0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0,
0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01,
0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81,
0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0,
0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01,
0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41,
0x00, 0xC1, 0x81, 0x40, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x01, 0xC0, 0x80, 0x41, 0x00, 0xC1, 0x81,
0x40
};
Low-Order Byte Table
/* Table of CRC values for low–order byte */
static char auchCRCLo[] = {
0x00, 0xC0, 0xC1, 0x01, 0xC3, 0x03, 0x02, 0xC2, 0xC6, 0x06, 0x07, 0xC7, 0x05, 0xC5, 0xC4,
0x04, 0xCC, 0x0C, 0x0D, 0xCD, 0x0F, 0xCF, 0xCE, 0x0E, 0x0A, 0xCA, 0xCB, 0x0B, 0xC9, 0x09,
0x08, 0xC8, 0xD8, 0x18, 0x19, 0xD9, 0x1B, 0xDB, 0xDA, 0x1A, 0x1E, 0xDE, 0xDF, 0x1F, 0xDD,
0x1D, 0x1C, 0xDC, 0x14, 0xD4, 0xD5, 0x15, 0xD7, 0x17, 0x16, 0xD6, 0xD2, 0x12, 0x13, 0xD3,
0x11, 0xD1, 0xD0, 0x10, 0xF0, 0x30, 0x31, 0xF1, 0x33, 0xF3, 0xF2, 0x32, 0x36, 0xF6, 0xF7,
0x37, 0xF5, 0x35, 0x34, 0xF4, 0x3C, 0xFC, 0xFD, 0x3D, 0xFF, 0x3F, 0x3E, 0xFE, 0xFA, 0x3A,

Page 487 of 499

 0x3B, 0xFB, 0x39, 0xF9, 0xF8, 0x38, 0x28, 0xE8, 0xE9, 0x29, 0xEB, 0x2B, 0x2A, 0xEA, 0xEE,
0x2E, 0x2F, 0xEF, 0x2D, 0xED, 0xEC, 0x2C, 0xE4, 0x24, 0x25, 0xE5, 0x27, 0xE7, 0xE6, 0x26,
0x22, 0xE2, 0xE3, 0x23, 0xE1, 0x21, 0x20, 0xE0, 0xA0, 0x60, 0x61, 0xA1, 0x63, 0xA3, 0xA2,
0x62, 0x66, 0xA6, 0xA7, 0x67, 0xA5, 0x65, 0x64, 0xA4, 0x6C, 0xAC, 0xAD, 0x6D, 0xAF, 0x6F,
0x6E, 0xAE, 0xAA, 0x6A, 0x6B, 0xAB, 0x69, 0xA9, 0xA8, 0x68, 0x78, 0xB8, 0xB9, 0x79, 0xBB,
0x7B, 0x7A, 0xBA, 0xBE, 0x7E, 0x7F, 0xBF, 0x7D, 0xBD, 0xBC, 0x7C, 0xB4, 0x74, 0x75, 0xB5,
0x77, 0xB7, 0xB6, 0x76, 0x72, 0xB2, 0xB3, 0x73, 0xB1, 0x71, 0x70, 0xB0, 0x50, 0x90, 0x91,
0x51, 0x93, 0x53, 0x52, 0x92, 0x96, 0x56, 0x57, 0x97, 0x55, 0x95, 0x94, 0x54, 0x9C, 0x5C,
0x5D, 0x9D, 0x5F, 0x9F, 0x9E, 0x5E, 0x5A, 0x9A, 0x9B, 0x5B, 0x99, 0x59, 0x58, 0x98, 0x88,
0x48, 0x49, 0x89, 0x4B, 0x8B, 0x8A, 0x4A, 0x4E, 0x8E, 0x8F, 0x4F, 0x8D, 0x4D, 0x4C, 0x8C,
0x44, 0x84, 0x85, 0x45, 0x87, 0x47, 0x46, 0x86, 0x82, 0x42, 0x43, 0x83, 0x41, 0x81, 0x80,
0x40
};

9.3.2 Read Data Function

/****************************************************************/
// Parameter:
// Addr -> Slave ID
// StReg -> Starting Register Address
// RegQuantities -> Register Quantities
// MbsBuf -> Receive Data Buffer
/****************************************************************/
bool ReadData(unsigned char Addr, unsigned short StReg,
unsigned short RegQuantities, unsigned char* MbsBuf)
{
unsigned char msg[8];
unsigned char Func = 0x04;
unsigned short Crc;

msg[0] = Addr;
msg[1] = Func;
msg[2] = HIBYTE(StReg);
msg[3] = LOBYTE(StReg);
msg[4] = HIBYTE(RegQuantities);
msg[5] = LOBYTE(RegQuantities);
Crc = CRC16(msg,6);
msg[6] = HIBYTE(Crc);
msg[7] = LOBYTE(Crc);
int snd = 8; /* byte number of buffer msg */
int rcv = (5+(RegQuantities*2));
/* Send snd bytes content of msg to COMM port */
/* Receive rcv bytes of response from COMM port to MbsBuf */
if (receiving data length is same as rcv)
return true;
else
return false;
}

Page 488 of 499

9.3.3 Convert Data Function

/****************************************************************/
// Parameter:
// ValueRangeLo -> Minimum value of the value range
// ValueRangeHi -> Maximum value of the value range
// ScaleLo -> Minimum value of the scale value
// ScaleHi -> Maximum value of the scale value
// RegData -> Current register data from remote device
/****************************************************************/
double ConvertData(double ValueRangeLo,
double ValueRangeHi,
double ScaleLo,
double ScaleHi,
double RegData)
{
double ConvertValue;
ConvertValue = (((RegData*(ScaleHi - ScaleLo))/ (ValueRangeHi - ValueRangeLo)) + ScaleLo);
return ConvertValue;
}

9.3.4 Read AI Function

bool ReadAIData(void)
{
unsigned char MsgBuf[40];
unsigned char Addr = 1; /* Slave Id */
unsigned short StartRegAdd = 2;
unsigned short RegQuantities = 5;
int ScaleLo, ScaleHi,
ValueRangeLo, ValueRangeHi,
AiData;
unsigned short RegData;

// Read register data from remote device

ReadData(Addr, StartRegAdd, RegQuantities, MsgBuf);

// Step 1: Parsing data for AI1

RegData = MAKEWORD(MsgBuf[4], MsgBuf[3]);

// Step 2: Set value range

//Because AI data type was set as 2 bytes, the value range would be
// showing between -32768 to 32767
ValueRangeLo = -32768;
ValueRangeHi = 32767;

// Step 3: Set value range for scale

//The default of Sensor type in AI1 is set as『Thermocouple K Type』.
// Scale low value is showing “-120”, scale high value is showing “1000”
//Please refer to AI configuration for Modbus Scale

Page 489 of 499

 ScaleLo = -120;
ScaleHi = 1000;

// Step 4: Execute converted function

AiData = (int)ConvertData(ValueRangeLo,
ValueRangeHi,
ScaleLo,
ScaleHi,
RegData);
// Step 5: Repeat Step 1 to Step 4 for getting another AI data
}

9.3.5 Read Math Function

bool ReadMathData(void)
{
unsigned char MsgBuf[120];
unsigned char i, j;
unsigned char Addr = 1; /* Slave Id */
unsigned short StartRegAdd = 201;
unsigned short RegQuantities = (10*2); // Math data is float type, so each Math value take two registers
double ScaleLo, ScaleHi, ValueRangeLo, ValueRangeHi;
double RegData, MathData;

// Read register data from remote device

ReadData(Addr, StartRegAdd, RegQuantities, MsgBuf);

// Step 1: Set value range

//The default of Math data type was set as 4 bytes, the value range will be showing between 0 to
//4294967295
ValueRangeLo = 0;
ValueRangeHi = 4294967295;

// Step 2: Set value range for scale

// When the property of “Transformation” in scale was set as disable, the range will be showing
//-2147483648 to 2147483647
// If the property of “Transformation” in Scale was set as “Value” or “Math Channel”, please refer to
//Appendix D

ScaleLo = -2147483648;
ScaleHi = 2147483647;

// Step 3: Please refer to the decimal value for the conversion of each
Math
switch(decimal value)
{
case 1:
ScaleLo = ScaleLo / 10;
ScaleHi = ScaleHi / 10;

Page 490 of 499

 break;
case 2:
ScaleLo = ScaleLo / 100;
ScaleHi = ScaleHi / 100;
break;
case 3:
ScaleLo = ScaleLo / 1000;
ScaleHi = ScaleHi / 1000;
break;
case 4:
ScaleLo = ScaleLo / 10000;
ScaleHi = ScaleHi / 10000;
break;
case 5:
ScaleLo = ScaleLo / 100000;
ScaleHi = ScaleHi / 100000;
break;
default:
break;
}

// Step 4: Parsing data for Math1

RegData = (UINT)MAKELONG(MAKEWORD(MsgBuf[j+1],
MsgBuf[j]),
MAKEWORD(MsgBuf[j+3],
MsgBuf[j+2]));

// Step 5: Execute converted function

MathData = ConvertData(ValueRangeLo,
ValueRangeHi,
ScaleLo,
ScaleHi,
RegData);

// Step 6: Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 for getting another data of Math

9.3.6 Read DI Function

bool ReadDIData(void)
{
unsigned char MsgBuf[96];
unsigned char Addr = 1; /* Slave Id */
unsigned short StartRegAdd = 50;
unsigned short RegQuantities = 5;
bool DiData;

Page 491 of 499

 // Read register data from remote device
ReadData(Addr, StartRegAdd, RegQuantities, MsgBuf);

// Step 1: Parsing data for DI1

DiData = (bool)MAKEWORD(MsgBuf[4], MsgBuf[3]);

// Step 2: Repeat Step 1 for getting another DI data

}

9.3.7 Read AO Function

bool ReadAOData(void)
{
unsigned char MsgBuf[48];
unsigned char Addr = 1; /* Slave Id */
unsigned short StartRegAdd = 601;
unsigned short RegQuantities = 5;
unsigned short RegData;
float AoData;

// Read register data from remote device

ReadData(Addr, StartRegAdd, RegQuantities, MsgBuf);

// Because the AO expression is specific, so we need using specific // expression to convert the value
//as following:
// Step 1: Parsing data for AO1
RegData = MAKEWORD(MsgBuf[4], MsgBuf[3]);

// Step2: To do converted expression for AO1

AoData = ((RegData * 65.535)/65535)-32.768;

// Step 3: Repeat Step 1 to Step 2 for getting another AO data

9.3.8 Read DO Function

bool ReadDOData(void)
{
unsigned char MsgBuf[48];
unsigned char Addr = 1; /* Slave Id */
unsigned short StartRegAdd = 74;
unsigned short RegQuantities = 5;
bool DoData;

// Read register data from remote device

ReadData(Addr, StartRegAdd, RegQuantities, MsgBuf);

// Step 1: Parsing data for DO1

Page 492 of 499

 DiData = (bool)MAKEWORD(MsgBuf[4], MsgBuf[3]);

// Step 2: Repeat Step 1 for getting another DO data

}

9.3.9 Read External Function

bool ReadExtData(void)
{
unsigned char MsgBuf[128];
unsigned char Addr = 1; /* Slave Id */
unsigned short StartRegAdd = 401;
unsigned short RegQuantities = 20;
unsigned short ExtData;
// Read register data from remote device
ReadData(Addr, StartRegAdd, RegQuantities, MsgBuf);

// Step 1: Parsing data for Ext1

DiData = MAKEWORD(MsgBuf[4], MsgBuf[3]);

// Step 2: Repeat Step 1 for getting another Ext data

Note:
*1: Above sample code is according to the PR20 setting if the user needs changing the MsgBuf size and
RegQuantities value from PR10 or PR30, please refer to the user manual.
Because the Input Register Ext data is same like Holding Register Ext data, so the data type of
the ExtData must according to the setting of real case, if the data type of ExtData is 4 bytes, please
refer to “ReadMathData” function in Step 1, Step 2, Step 4 and Step 5 to convert data type of customer
Requirement (Such as Int32 or UInt32 or float data type).
}

9.4 Appendix
9.4.1 Modbus RTU Slave / TCP Server Register data type table
Field Name Data Size Data Type Note
AI 2 Bytes WORD Little Endian
Math 4 Bytes UINT32 Little Endian
DI 2 Bytes WORD Little Endian
AO 2 Bytes WORD Little Endian
DO 2 Bytes WORD Little Endian
External 2 Bytes / 4 Bytes WORD / DWORD Little Endian

9.4.2 Inquire AI range

The Modbus scale range for each AI channel is available in the channel configuration page as
shown below.

Page 493 of 499

9.4.3 AI Conversion Example
The below example shows the procedure to convert the raw value received in Modbus register to
engineering value. If the floating-point type mapped register used to read then the user doesn’t need to do
any conversion. The register itself has the engineering value. If the integer type register is used then the user
needs to do the conversion as per the below to convert the raw value to engineering value. The Modbus low
scale and high scale value are available on the channel configuration page as shown in the above picture.
AI Value= (Data Register Value* (AI High Scale-AI low scale)/65535) + AI low scale
For example, the AI range is set to -200 to 1100. If the register value is 32000 then the actual AI value is as
below.
AI Value = (Data Register Value* (AI High Scale-AI low scale)/65535) + AI low scale
= (32000*(1100-(-200))/65535) + (-200)
= (32000*1300)/65535-200
= 634.78-200
= 434.78

9.4.4 Math Conversion Sample

The below example shows the procedure to convert the raw value received in Modbus register to
engineering value. If the floating-point type mapped register used to read then the user doesn’t need to do
any conversion. The register itself has the engineering value. If the integer type register is used then the user
needs to do the conversion as per the below to convert the raw value to engineering value.

Page 494 of 499

9.4.4.1 Transformation Disable

If the transformation is set to disable and the decimal point is ‘0’ then the value received on the
register doesn’t need any conversion. If the decimal value is set as “1”, then the value must be divided by 10
to match with the value in Math of PR. If the decimal value is set as “2”, then the value must be divided by
100 to match with the value in Math of PR. If the decimal value is set as “3” then the value must be divided
by 1000 to match the value in Math of PR. If the decimal value is set as “4” then the value must be divided by
10000 to match the value in Math of PR. If the decimal value is set as “5” then the value must be divided by
100000 to match the value in Math of PR.

9.4.4.2 Transformation as value

If the transformation is set to value and the table is configured with transformation table entries
then the below formulae to be used to convert the raw value of DWord register to actual math channel value.
Math value = (((Register value * (ScaleHi - ScaleLo)) / 4294967295) + ScaleLo)

The scale low and scale hi of the math channel can be referenced from transformation table
output values. For example, the transformation table configured as below.

Page 495 of 499

 The high scale of this channel is 90 and the low scale of this channel is 10. The value of math
channel is 68. The value at the Modbus register is 3092376452. The register value can be converted to
math channel actual value by using the below conversion.
Math value = (((Register value * (ScaleHi - ScaleLo)) / 4294967295) + ScaleLo)
= ((3092376452*(90-10))/4294967295)+10)
= ((3092376452*80)/ 4294967295)+10
= 57.6+10
= 58+10 (rounded to nearest integer)
= 68

9.4.4.3 Transformation as Math Channel

If the transformation is set to value and the decimal point is ‘0’ then the value received on the
register doesn’t need any conversion. If the decimal value is set as “1”, then the value must be divided by 10
to match with the value in Math of PR. If the decimal value is set as “2”, then the value must be divided by
100 to match with the value in Math of PR. If the decimal value is set as “3” then the value must be divided
by 1000 to match the value in Math of PR. If the decimal value is set as “4” then the value must be divided by
10000 to match the value in Math of PR. If the decimal value is set as “5” then the value must be divided by
100000 to match the value in Math of PR.

Page 496 of 499

9.4.5 AO Conversion Example
The AO Value data contains the raw data which can be converted to actual AO value using the
below conversion.
AO value = (((Register value * 65.535) / 65535) - 32.768)
For example, the AO value received in the register is 52411 then the actual value is calculated
as below.
AO value = (((52411 * 65.535) / 65535) - 32.768)
= 3434754.885/65535 – 32.768
=19.643

9.4.6 External Channel Conversion for AI channel

Configure the data type is 2 Byte.
Change the Actual low and Actual high of the external channel as similar to AI Channel.

9.4.7 External Channel Conversion for DI and DO channel

The DI and DO channels don’t need any conversion to read in the external channel. The channel
data type needs to be configured as 2 Byte.

Page 497 of 499

9.4.8 External Channel Conversion for AO channel
Configure the channel as 2 Byte.
Configure the external channel Actual Value Low as -32.768 and Actual Value High as 32.767.

9.4.9 External Channel Conversion for Math channel

Configure the channel as 4 Byte.
Configure the Actual Value Low and high as below depends on the decimal value of Math channel
configuration.
If the decimal is 0, Actual Value Low as -2147483648.0 and Actual value High as 2147483647.0.
If the decimal is 1, Actual Value Low as -214748364.8 and Actual value High as 214748364.7.
If the decimal is 2, Actual Value Low as -21474836.48 and Actual value High as 21474836.47.

Page 498 of 499

If the decimal is 3, Actual Value Low as -2147483.648 and Actual value High as 2147483.647.
If the decimal is 4, Actual Value Low as -214748.3648 and Actual value High as 214748.3647.
If the decimal is 5, Actual Value Low as -21474.83648 and Actual value High as 21474.83647.

Page 499 of 499